HomeMy WebLinkAboutRE Smith Engineering & Construction Inc; 1998-10-14; 3348-.
.
-
Recording requested by:
CITY OF CARLSBAD
When recorded mail to:
City Clerk
City of Carlsbad
1200 Carlsbad Village Dr.
!.’ .’ _., . *.
.- . . .
3/n/c& 2. 35&LP P . .
DOE ‘. 2 2000-0073008 .
I
FEB 119 2000 II:20 AM
OFFICIAL RECORDS SAN DIE60 WuNiY RECORDER'S OFFICE
3664 GREGORY J. SWITH, (INMY RECURDER FEES: 0.00
Carlsbad, CA 92008
Space above this line for Recorder’s Use
NOTICE OF COMPLETION
Notice is hereby given that:
1.
2. 3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
a.
The undersigned is owner of the interest or estate stated below in the property hereinafter
described.
The full name of the undersigned is City of Carlsbad, a municipal corporation. The full address of the undersigned is 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad, California
92008. The nature of the title of the undersigned is: In fee.
A work of improvement on the property hereinafter described was completed on December
31, 1999.
The name of the contractor, if any, for such work of improvement is R.E. Smith Engineering
and Construction, Inc.
The property on which said work of improvement was completed is in the City of Carlsbad, County of San Diego, State of California, and is described as the Poinsettia Park Phase I-A
Improvements, Project No. 3348. The address of said property is within the limits of the City of Carlsbad.
VERIFICATION OF CITY CLERK
I, the undersigned, say:
I am the City Clerk of the City of Carlsbad, 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad, - _ California, 92008; the City Council of said City on February sr 2000, accepted the above described work as completed and ordered that a Notice of Completion be filed.
I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct.
Executedon February 9, , 2000, at Carlsbad, California.
CITY OF CARLSBAD
Karen R. Kundtz,
Assistant City Clerk
i
CITY OF CARLSBAD
San Diego County
California
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIAL
PROVISIONS
*--
FOR
POINSETTIA PARK PHASE I-A
CONTRACT NO. 3348
June 1998
(3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 1 of 299 Pages
TABLE OF CONTENTS item Paae
NOTICE INVITING BIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
CONTRACTOR’S PROPOSAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*......................................................................... 7
BID SECURITY FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*.............................................................. 20
BIDDER’S BOND TO ACCOMPANY PROPOSAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
GUIDELINES FOR COMPLETING THE “DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID” AND ‘DESIGNATION OF OWNER OPERATOWLESSOR & AMOUNT OF OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR WORK” FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR &AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID . . . . . . . . . . 25
DESIGNATION OF OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR & AMOUNT OF OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
BIDDER’S STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL RESPONSIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
BIDDER’S STATEMENT OF TECHNICAL ABILITY AND EXPERIENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
BIDDER’S CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE FOR GENERAL LIABILITY, EMPLOYERS’ LIABILITY, AUTOMOTIVE LIABILITY AND WORKERS’ COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
BIDDER’S STATEMENT OF RE-DEBARMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
BIDDER’S DISCLOSURE OF DISCIPLINE RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT TO BE EXECUTED BY BIDDER AND SUBMIlTED WITH BID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
CONTRACT PUBLIC WORKS ..,.............................................................................................. 34
lABOR AND MATERIALS BOND .,.....................................................................................,.... 41
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE/WARRANTY BOND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
REPRESENTATION AND CERTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR SURETY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 1, GENERAL,PROVlSlONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 2, CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS.............. 72
SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 3, CONSTRUCTION METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
t”s 1106198 Contract No. 3348 Page 2 of 299 Pages
CITY OF CARLSBAD, CALIFORNIA
NOTICE INVITING BIDS
Sealed bids will be received at the Office of the Purchasing Officer, City Hall, 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad, California 920081989, until 4:00 P.M. on the 16’” day of July, 1998, at which time
they will be opened and read, for performing the work as follows:
POlNSElTlA PARK PHASE 1-A
CONTRACT NO. 3348
The work shall be performed in strict conformity with the specifications as approved by the City
Council of the City of Carlsbad on file with the Engineering Department. The specifications for the
work include the Standard Soedfications for Public Works Construction (1997 Edition. and the 1998 and suoolements thereto3 all hereinafter designated ‘SSPWC” as issued by the Southern
California Chapter of the American Public Works Association and as amended by the special
provisions sections of this contract. Reference is hereby made to the specifications for full
particulars and description of the work.
The Cii of Carlsbad encourages the participation of minority and women-owned businesses.
The City of Carlsbad encourages all bidders, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators and contractors
to utilize recyded and recydable materials when available, appropriate and approved by the
Engineer.
The City of Carlsbad may disqualify a contractor or subcontractor from participating in bidding when
a contractor or subcontractor has been debarred by the City of Carlsbad or another jurisdiction in
the State of California as an irresponsible bidder.
No bid will be received unless it is made on a proposal form furnished by the Purchasing
Department. Each bid must be accompanied by security in a form and amount required by law. The bidder’s security of the second and third next lowest responsive bidders may be withheld until
the Contract has been fully executed. The security submitted by all other unsuccessful bidders shall
be returned to them, or deemed void, within ten (10) days after the Contract is awarded. Pursuant
to the provisions of law (Public Contract Code section 10263), appropriate securities may be
substituted for any obligation required by this notice or for any monies withheld by the City to ensure
performance under this Contract. section 10263 of the Public Contract Code requires monies or
securities to be deposited with the City or a state or federally chartered bank in California as the
escrow agent. The escrow agent shall maintain insurance to cover negligent acts and omissions of
the agent in connection with the handling of retentions under this section in an amount not less than
$100,000 per contract.
The documents which comprise the Bidder’s proposal and that must be completed, properly
executed and notarized are:
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 3 of 299 Pages
1. Contractor’s Proposal
2. Bidder’s Bond
3. Non-Collusion Affidavit
4. Designation of Subcontractors and Amount
of Subcontractors Bid
5. Designation of Owner Operator/Lessors &
Amount of Owner Operator/Lessor Work
8. Certificate of insurance
9. Bidder’s Statement Re Debarment
10. Bidder’s Disclosure of Discipline Record
il. Purchasing Department Representation and
Certification
12. Escrow Agreement for Security Deposits -
(optional, must be completed if the Bidder
wishes to use the Escrow Agreement for
Security)
6. Bidder’s Statement of Financial
Responsibility
7. Bidder’s Statement of Technical Ability and
Experience
All bids will be compared on the basis of the Engineer’s Estimate. The estimated quantities are
approximate and serve solely as a basis for the wmparison of bids. The Engineer’s Estimate is
$860,000.
No bid shall be accepted from a contractor who is not licensed in accordance with the provisions of
California state law. The contractor shall state their license number, expiration date and
classification in the proposal, under penalty of perjury. The following dassifications are acceptable
for this contract: .A” in accordance with the provisions of state law.
If the Contractor intends to utilize the escrow agreement induded in the contract documents in lieu
of the usual 10% retention from each payment, these documents must be wmpleted and submitted
with the signed wntract. The escrow agreement may not be substituted at a later date.
Sets of plans, special provisions, and Contract documents may be obtained at the Purchasing
Department, City Hall, 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carisbad, California, for a non-refundable fee of
$35 per set. If plans and specifications are to be mailed, the cost for postage should be added.
Any prospective bidder who is in doubt as to the intended meaning of any part of the drawings,
specifications or other contract documents, or finds discrepancies in or omissions from the drawings
and specifications may submit to the Engineer a written request for darification or correction. Any response will be made only by a written addendum duly issued by the Engineer a coy of which’will
be mailed or delivered to each person receiving a set of the contract documents. No addition to, or
modification of or interpretation of any provision in the contract documents will be given orally nor
may any bidder rely on oral directions.
The City of Carlsbad reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any minor irregularity or
informality in such bids.
The general prevailing rate of wages for each craft or type of worker needed to execute the Contract
shall be those as determined by the Director of Industrial Relations pursuant to the sections 1770,
1773, and 1773.1 of the Labor Code. Pursuant to section 1773.2 of the Labor Code, a current copy
of applicable wage rates is on file in the Office of the City Engineer. The Contractor to whom the Contract is awarded shall not pay less than the said specified prevailing rates of wages to all
workers employed by him or her in the execution of the Contract.
#B Es l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 4 of 299 Pages
The Prime Contractor shall be responsible for insuring compliance with provisions of section 1777.5
of the Labor Code and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code, “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The City Engineer is the City’s “duly authorized officer” for the
purposes of section 4107 and 4107.5.
The provisions of Part 7, Chapter 1, of the Labor Code commencing with section 1720 shall apply to
the Contract for work.
A pre-bid meeting and tour of the project site will be held at 10 AM on July 2, 1998 at Poinsettia
Park in the existing ball field No. 1 parking lot.
All bids are to be computed on the basis of the given estimated quantities of work, as indicated in
this proposal, times the unit price as submitted by the bidder. In case of a discrepancy between words and figures, the words shall prevail. In case of an error in the extension of a unit price, the
corrected extension shall be calculated and the bids will be computed as indicated above and
compared on the basis of the corrected totals.
All prices must be in ink or typewritten. Changes or corrections may be crossed out and typed or
written in with ink and must be initialed in ink by a person authorized to sign for the Contractor.
Bidders are advised to verify the issuance of all addenda and receipt thereof one day prior to
bidding. Submission of bids without acknowledgment of addenda may be cause of rejection of bid.
Bonds to sewra faithful performance and warranty of the work and payment of laborers and
materials suppliers, in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) and f@ percent (50%), respectively, of the Contract price will be required for work on this project. These bonds shall be kept in full force and effect during the course of this project, and shall extend in full force and effect
and be retained by the Cii until they are released as stated in the Special Provisions section of this contract. All bonds are to be placed with a surety insurance carrier admitted and authorized to
transact the business of insurance in California and whose assets exceed their liabilities in an
amount equal to or in excess of the amount of the bond. The bonds are to contain the following
documents:
1) An original, or a certified copy, of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney, by laws, or
other instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so.
2) A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer issued by the insurance
commissioner.
If the bid is accepted, the City may require copies of the insurer’s most recent annual statement and quarterly statement filed with the Department of Insurance pursuant to Article 10 (commencing with
section 900) of Chapter 1 of Part 2 of Division 1 of the Insurance Code, within 10 calendar days of
the insurer’s receipt of a request to submit the statements.
Insurance is to be placed with insurers that have (1) a rating in the most recent Best’s Key Rating
Guide of at least A-:V, and (2) are admitted and authorized to transact the business of insurance in the State of California by the Insurance Commissioner. Auto policies offered to meet the specification of this contract must: (1) meet the conditions stated above for all insurance companies
and (2) cover anv vehide used in the performance of the contract, used onsite or offsite, whether
owned, non-owned or hired, and whether scheduled or non-scheduled. The auto insurance
certificate must state the coverage is for “any auto” and cannot be limited in any manner.
1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Paae 5 of 299 Pama
Workers’ compensation insurance required under this contract must be offered by a company
meeting the above standards with the exception that the Best’s rating condition is waived. The City
does accept policies issued by the State Compensation Fund meeting the requirement for workers’
compensation insurance.
The Contractor shall be required to maintain insurance as specified in the Contract. Any additional
cost of said insurance shall be induded in the bid price.
The award of the contract by the City Council is contingent upon the Contractor submitting the required bonds and insurance, as described in the contract, within twenty days of bid opening. If the
Contractor fails to comply with these requirements, the City may award the contract to the second or third lowest bidder and the bid security of the lowest bidder may be forfeited.
The prime contractor and all subcontractors are required to have and maintain a valid City of
Carlsbad Business License for the duration of the contract.
Approved by the Cii Council of the Cii of Carlsbad, California, by Resolution No. 98-146, adopted
on the 19’” day of May, 1998.
Q 1 I08198
Jz/
Aletha L. Rautenkranz, CiiClerl(
Contract No. 3348 Page 6 of 299 Pages
t
.
$
e City of Carlsbad
July 8, 1998
ADDENDUM NO. I
RE: POINSETTIA PARK PHASE I-A - CONTRACT NO. 3348
l
Please include the attached addendum in the Notice to Bidder/Request for
have for the above project.
This addendum--receipt acknowledged--must be attached to your Proposal
when your bid is submitted.
0 RUTH FLETCHER
Purchasing Officer
RF:jlk
Attachment
I ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDUM NO. 1
Bids you
Form/Bid
1200 Carlsbad Village Drive l Carlsbad, CA 92008-l 989 l (780) 434-2803 l FAX (780) 434-l 987 @
0 July 8, 1998 ADDENDUM NO. 1
POINSETTIA PARK PHASE I-A
CONTRACT NO. 3348
The following additions & clarifications have been made to the plans and specifications:
Plans: 0 On sheets L6.1 Plant legend: Add ground cover symbol “G4 Stolenized Turf-Tiway 419 @ IO bushels per 1000 square feet with
hydrosees overseed of Creeping Red Fescue @ 7 Ibs per 1000
square feet.
Specifications: l On page 16 : Add bid item No. 83 Hydroseed Creeping Red Fescue
overseed (over stolenized area).
l On page 13, change tree box size from 24” to 36
0 On page 91, omit section 212-1.3a
0 On page 92, add section 212-1.5.4 Tree Ties: Tree ties shall be 36 inch corded rubber as manufactured by Gro-Strait Products or equal. Wire and hose tie shall be Manufactured by Nune Turfgrass or equal.
0 On page 89 section 212-I .2.5 Mulch for Hydraulic Method Seed Lawn Planting, add the following: Mulch for all non turf and non hydroseeded areas shall be “medium grind bark” consisting of
fibrous, woody bark mixture with the following gradation: 90-100% passing 1 Inch sieve, 80-I 00% passing X inch sieve 20-60% passing % inch sieve
0 On page 97 section 3084.5 Tree and Shrub Planting, add the
following to table 308-4.5(A)
Planting Tabiets ? j 3 per 57 iiter container j 3 per 15 gai. container 1
0 On page 98 add the following section:
30848.4 Stolens: Stolens shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery
to the project site. The site must be Pre-Irrigated to a minimum depth of
8 inches. Stolen shall be depressed 0.5-l 5 inches into damp, friable soil using a hydraulic feed tractor mounted stolen planter and rolled immediately.
Green Book 0 Setion 212-1.4.5 Sod and Stolens(turf grss) add the following:
Stolens shall be “Tifway 419” variety. All materials are to be from the same growing ground and delivered fresh to the job site at a maximum rs prior to planting.
CITY OF, CARLSBAD
POINSETTIA PARK PHASE I-A
CONTRACT NO. 3348
CONTRACTOR’S PROPOSAL
City Council
City of Carlsbad
1200 Carlsbad Village Drive
Carlsbad, California 92008
The undersigned declares he/she has carefully examined the location of the work, read the
Inviting Bids, examined the Plans, Specifications, Special Provisions and addenda there
hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, and services req
do all the work to complete Contract No. 3348 in accordance with the Plans, Specifications,
Provisions and addenda thereto and that he/she will take in full payment therefor the follow
prices for each item complete, to wit:
Item No. Descriotion
1 Mobilization & preparatory work at LS
Fifteen Thousand and OO/lOO Dollars
Dollars (Lump Sum)
3 Rough & fine grading including earthen
Ol,L.htfLdI
Dollars (Lump Sum)
4 Infield subdrain system, including
grav I & filter fabrics at
c he4
Dollars (Lineal Feet)
5
\
J$nch,drTs at a?/rd
A@ vl // u Dollars (Lineal Feet)
Approximate
Quantity and Unit
LS
LS
4,950 LF
60 LF
Unit
Price
$15,000.00
Lump Sum
Lump Sum
Zao
To
$15,0
/
\;I OM 00
maa
35 (xiii. 00
93L? 00
t$ l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 7 of 299
Descriotion
Approximate
Quantity and Unit
Item
No.
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
4EA
Dollars (Q&h)
248 LF
Dollars (Lineal Feet)
Restroom building including all electrical and plumbing complete per LS
Dollars (Lump Sum)
Removal of existing concrete 210 SF ystroom plaza at
/ Ldo
Dollars (Square Feet)
Main pedestrian concrete walkway 600 SF (item la on Color & finish schedule); ding co trol joints at
c VL L&.iLLL/.c t!cYzd~%&O
(Dollars Square Feet)
Pedestrian concrete walkway (item 1 b
on Color & finish schedule); including
Old f --
fi-+-tV CbfLtJ- Dollars (Square Feet)
Plaza concrete paving field (item lc on Color & finish schedule); including
10,350 SF
2,250 SF
D:llars equare Feet)
~~ l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 8 of 299 Pages
Unit
p&g
&Oi 00
Lump Sum
Lump Sum
m
iq, /Jo. 013
3; 300.00
Approximate Item No,
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Descriotion
Plaza Concrete Band (item Id on Color
& finish schedule); including control
t?'vi ct&?Lcs Dollars (Sduare Feet)
Concrete .mow strip (item le on Color
&
finish schedule); including control
eepen#.footin s at tree wells a
/hoJM - I ‘vie/
34...dJed, Dollars (Lump Sum)
/
Dollars (Lineal Feet)
Dollars (Square Feet)
l%?uf SxjY - /L%y c&ntj Dollars (Lineal Feet)
21 asketp post & backbo rd at
/hoMJ&HB- t&M
L?Jf/613’_ - -h/‘n// Dollars (Each)
Dollars (Lineal Feet)
‘Quantity Unit
and Unit Price
220 SF ix a4-
260 LF
LS Lump Sum
160 LF
3,110 SF
90 LF
LS Lump Sum
4EA
970 LF
(3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 9 of 299 Pages
/: 9do. uu
.I, 5OQ.co
/+?~0.00
3~,/00* 00
1,679, +%’
66Lgz&&?Q
4; P3u.00
q3iG. t$?
Approximate
0
Item
No. Descriotion
23
&d tLLbfd/lk h%/ Dollars (Lump Sum)
24
25
Dollars (Lineal Feet)
26
27
Quantity Unit and Unit Price
LS Lump Sum
LS Lump Sum
1,750 LF
4EA
3EA
/Z
2u. 7s/
!ikuzLz
xt7~~,00
2?!bf22
a-9 fx?
&J 00
/,
28 les at /& (,y/ 2EA
old Liz& /
Doll&s (Each)
29 6EA
L
Dollars #ach)
30
31
32
Dollars (Each)
95 LF
, Dollars (Lineal Feet)
41,200 SF
2;/a.00
o?; 7~+!00
%?6.oo /j
4; z5-k 00
7I33k. a0
rl’, 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 10 of 299 Pages
AI Item No.
33
Descriotion
36
38
Dollars (Each)
Dollafs (Each)
pproximate
Quantity
and Unit
4 EA
4EA
2EA
18EA
4 EA
2EA
Dollars (Each)
41
d/t?/ +
\ Jl %ti/
Dollars (Each)0
42
4EA
2EA
4EA
1,450 SF
Unit pr&g Total
-
Lii3Lg2
Li2LlxL
p%.oo
144ao
L22!aDQ
J4
-LsbaQQ
9.A-f
~~ l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 11 of 299 Pages
. ,
Item
No. Descriotion
Dollars (Each)
44 Pot e service lin at
4FlfixT LI&iw&J
Approximate
Quantity gnd Unit
1 EA
1,270 LF
Dollars (Lineal Feet)
45 Backflow preventer, including all 1 EA
Dollars (Each)
46 Potable quick coupler valve, including
e
Dollars (Each)
47 Reclaimed water quick coupling valve,
48 Electric control valve, including all
49 Manual control valve, including all
Dollars (Each)
2EA
6EA
31 EA
2EA
41 EA
LS
Unit P&g
2;cTlxxxl
Lump Sum
Total
2;,5&7.i7~
3; b/Q*on
~;JOO.OO
cao- ULI
u&7 $92
443.00
3&I?. 00
/.
‘7 Em &7ff /
~~ l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 12 of 299 Pages
item
a
No.
52 Pop-up spray heads including all
t-f&A tdfx&fJ
Dollars (Each)
Approximate
Quantity Unit Unit and .p&g Total
53 Pop-up rotor heads, including all
I Dollars (Each)
54 Bubbler heads, including all
,
vi4
/ Dollars (Eadh)
56
56 15 gallon trees, including staking,
Dollars (Eati) Y
59 5 gallon trees, including staking,
Dollars (E&f)
60 5 gallon vines, including tying, b kfill & fertilizer at
??ihz& I : I
// Dollars (ES&) ”
42EA /i&o0 b72.00
122 EA
12EA
1,730 LF
11,000 LF
3 EA
57 EA
55 EA
9 EA
G ma198 Contract No. 3348 Page 13 of 299 Pages
Approximate
Item Quantity
NSL Descriotion Unit and
a 61 5 gallon shrubs, including backfill & 62 EA
62 Vinca major, including soil 17,300 SF
/I Dollars (S&r-e Feet)
63 Hydroseed turf, including soil \ 19,000 SF
64
/I Dollars (SC@ re Feet)
Stolonized turf, including soil 102,400 SF
Dollars (S&are Feet)
65 8,670 SF
Dollars (Square Feet)
66 8,670 SF
Dollars (Square Feet)
67
Relocate electrical panels to restroom building including new
feeders and branch circuits extended
from existing WP enclosure to new
Unit
p&g J8.ti
1 30
* 50
1. 00
~5790.00
.k.
cq G#K!t9~
67u.00 q
?, 670.00
Lump Sum &p72 .&
m 1; J3,/. 50
Contract No. 3348 Page 14 of 299 Pages
c
Approximate
..-
Item .&ant@
!!!QL Descrictiorl and
69 Removal of existing electrical LS
// A Dollars (l%ch)
LS
4EA
2EA
LS
1EA
72
Dollars @ach)
73
Dollars (Lump Sum)
0 . 74
Dollars (Eacli) Y
75
78
4EA
LS
LS
Unit
p&&
Lump Sum
Lump Sum
fmo
Lump Sum
/
Lump Sum
Lump Sum
Total
puk - 00
'UV 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 15 of 299 Pages
Item No. Descrbtion
80 Conskction Schedule
Ten Thousand and OOllOO Dollars
81
82
Approximate
Quantity and Unit
LS
LS
LS
LS
Unit
&jgg
Lump Sum
$10,000.00
Lump Sum
Lump Sum
$10,000.00
mount of bid in numbers:
0 Price(s).given above are firm for 90 days after date of bid opening.
Addendum(a) No(s). / has/have been received and is/are included in this
proposal.
The Undersigned has carefully checked all of the above figures and understands that the City will
not be responsible for any error or omission on the part of the Undersigned in preparing this bid.
The Undersigned agrees that in case of default in executing the required Contract with necessary bonds and insurance policies within twenty (20) days from the date of award of Contract by the City
Council of the City of Carlsbad, the City may administratively authorize award of the contract to the second or third lowest bidder and the bid security of the lowest bidder may be forfeited.
The Undersigned bidder declares, under penalty of perjury, that the undersigned is licensed to do
business or act within the State of Califor A/ ia, validly licensed under
which expires on
ement is true and correct and has
Contract No. 3348 Page 16 of 299 Pages
A bid submitted to the Ci& by a Contractor who is not licensed as a contractor pursuant to the
Business and Professions Code shall be considered nonresponsive and shall be rejected by the City
!j 7028.15(e). In all contracts where federal funds are involved, no bid submitted shall be
invalidated by the failure of the bidder to be licensed in accordance with California law. However, at
the time the contract is awarded, the contractor shall be properly licensed. Public Contract Code
§ 20104.
The Undersigned bidder hereby represents as follows:
1. That no Council member, officer agent, or employee of the City of Carlsbad is personally
interested, directly or indirectly, in this Contract, or the compensation to be paid hereunder; that no
representation, oral or in writing, of the City Council, its officers, agents, or employees has inducted
him/her to enter into this Contract, excepting only those contained in this form of Contract and the
papers made a part hereof by its terms; and
2. That this bid is made without connection with any person, firm, or corporation making a bid for
the same work, and is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud.
Accompanying this proposal is BOhlD or Cashier’s Check) for ten percent (10%) of the amount’bid.
(Cash, Certified Check, Bond
The Undersigned is aware of the provisions of section 3700 of the Labor Code which requires every
employer to be insured against liability for workers’ compensation or to undertake self-insurance in
accordance with the provisions of that code, and agrees to comply with such provisions before
commencing the performance of the work of this Contract and continue to comply until the contract
is complete.
The Undersigned is aware of the provisions of the Labor Code, Part 7, Chapter 1, Article 2, relative to the general prevailing rate of wages for each craft or type of worker needed to execute the
Contract and agrees to comply with its provisions.
rf’, l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 17 of 299 Pages
I
IF A SOLE OWNER OR SOLE CONTRACTOR SIGN HERE:
0 (1)
(2)
(3) Place of Business
Name under which business is conducted
Signature (given and surname) of proprietor
(Street and Number)
City and State
(4) Zip Code Telephone No.
IF A PARTNERSHIP. SIGN HERE:
(1) Name under which business is conducted
(2) Signature (given and surname and character of partner) (Note: Signature must be made
by a general partner) .
(3) Place of Business
(Street and Number)
City and State
(4) Zip Code Telephone No.
IF A CORPORATION. SIGN HERE:
(1) Name under which business is conducted .
(Title)
Impress Corporate Seal here
..*
. . .
. . .
tf’, l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 18 of 299 Pages
(3)
(4)
Incorporated under the laws of the State of cdLmw;p,
Place of Business 25801 01sPE~o KS!, $Ulfe- II
(Street and Number)
City and State vjzI55io~ Vlq-ii , CA.
(5) Zip Code 9269 f Telephone No. WCI- ssy-OS II
NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF EXECUTION BY ALL SIGNATORIES MUST BE ATTACHED
List below names of president, vice president, secretary and assistant secretary, if a corporation; if a
partnership, list names of all general partners, and managing partners:
Rodis LJ E- %i+h f+oL& d-l/L (O~~~fi&- +Jwe,
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 19 of 299 Pages
El personally k!lown to me - OR - 0 proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence
to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are
subscribed to the within instrument and ac-
knowledged to me that he/she/they executed
the same in his/her/their authorired
capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their
signature(s) on the instrument the person(s),
or the entity upon behalf of which the
person(s) acted, executed the inStrument.
COMM. N152028
NOTARY PUBLIC - CALIFORNIA
Though the data biow is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons dying on the document and Co&Y prevent
traudulent reattachment of this form.
CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER DESCRIPTION OF ATTACHED DOCUMENT
m INDIVIDUAL
D CORPORATE OFFlCER
-- TITLE OR TYPE OF DOCUMENT rmu51
0 PARTNER(S) 0 LIMITED
0 GENERAL
0 ATTORNEY-IN,FACT
a TRUSTEE(S)
0 GUARDIAfW3NSERVATOR
[3 OTHER: .-_
NUMBER OF PAGES
--- DATE OF WCUMENT
CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT No. 6m7
SlGNER IS REPi;,: BENRNG:
NAME Of PI33’3WS) Ofi EffflWGSI
--.-.. .-. .- ,-- SIGNER(S) OTHER THAN NAMED ABOVE
. . . ..-
‘CO-d
01993 ~TK)MLP(OTA~~AS~ATtON-~~mnYtAv~..9.0. Boa 7tB(*Cwtqa PucCCA91309-?194
SLZOt?st7t7IL a3ue4nsuI KaL6knb d9tr:Io 86-9I-Lnc
BID SECURITY FORM
(Check to Accompany Bid)
(NOTE: The following form shall be used if check accompanies bid.)
Accompanying this proposal is a *Certified *Cashiers check payable to the order of CITY OF
CARLSBAD, in the sum of
dollars ($ ),
this amount being ten percent (10%) of the total amount of the bid. The proceeds of this check shall
become the property of the City provided this proposal shall be accepted by the City through action
of its legally constituted contracting authorities and the undersigned shall fail to execute a contract
and furnish the required Performance, Warranty and Payment Bonds and proof of insurance
coverage within the stipulated time; otherwise, the check shall be returned to the undersigned. The
proceeds of this check shall also become the property of the City if the undersigned shall withdraw
his or her bid within the period of fifteen (15) days after the date set for the opening thereof, unless otherwise required by law, and notwithstanding the award of the contract to another bidder.
BIDDER
*Delete the inapplicable word.
(Note: If the Bidder desires to use a bond instead of check, the Bid Bond form on the following pages shall be executed--the sum of this bond shall be not less than ten percent (10%) of the total
amount of the bid.)
l
Contract No. 3348 Page 20 of 299 Pages
. ~ ‘I*I-ILL-IrYo L:3bJwl t KUFl 3E.11 It-l ULIYbLIUttKlI\1C1 , ICL 033 -3,
.*
. .
I. ., -
r. L
‘1
BIDDER’S BOND TO ACCOMPANY PROPOSAL l KNOW ALL PERSON$ BY THESE PRESENTS:
R. E. SMITH ENGINEERING WASHINGTON -INTERNATIONAL .~atwe,&.CONSTRUCTION, INC. , as Principal, and INSURANCE COMPANY as Surety are held and firmly bound unto the City of Carisbsd, California, in an amount as follows:’ (must be at lea& ten percent (10%) of the bid amount) TEN PERCENT OF BID for which
payment, well and truly made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators,
successors or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THE FOREGOiNG OBLIGATION .IS, SUCH that if the proposal of the above-bounden Principal for:
POINSETTIA PARK PHASE I-A,
CONTRACT NO. 3343
in the City of Carl&bad. is accepted by the City Council. and if the Principal shall duly enter into and execute a Contract including required bonds and. insurance policies within twenty (20) days from the date of award of Contract by the City Council of the City of Carlsbad. being duly notified of said
award, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force
and effect, and th,e amount specified herein shall be forfeited to the said City.
. .
L
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
..*a
.*..
Contract No. 3348 Page 21 of 299 Pages
. z - .__- -.--... , *.-a. 4slLtl. LL\“Lt--‘\*I”” ,1- -44 Vddl
. . 1
In the event Principal executed this bond as an individual, it is agreed that the death of Principal
shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this bond.
Executed by PRINCIPAL thii day of 919 *
‘. PRINCIPAL:
R. E. SMITH ENGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION, INC.
Executed by SURETY this 14TH day of JULY ,lQ 98.
SURETY
WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
(name of Surety)
300 PARK BLVD, 8500 ITASCA: IL 61043
(address of Surety)
By: (sign here)
I MICHAEL A. QUIGLEY
(printed name of Attorney-in-Fact)
(print name here) (Attach corporate resolution showing current power of attorney.)
(title and organization of signatory)
(Proper notarlal acknowledge of execution by PRINCIPAL and SUREkY must be attached.)
(President or vice-president and secietary or assistant secretary must sign for corporations. If only
one officer signs, the corporation mu& attach a resolution certified by the secretary. or assistant
secretary under corporate seal empowering that officer to bind the,
APPROVED AS TO FO’RM: RONALD R. BALL City Attorney
COMM. I1 I52028
NOTARY PUBLIC -CALIFORNIA
ORANOE C0UNl-Y
l m
ES l/O8198 Contract No. 3348 Page 22 of 299 Pages
CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT No. 5907
proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence
to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are
subscribed to the within instrument and ac-
knowledged to me that he/she/they executed
the same in his/her/their authorized
capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their
signature(s) on the instrument the person(s),
or the entity upon behalf of which the
person(s) acted, executed the instrument.
Though the data below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent
fraudulent reattachment of this form.
CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER
0 INDIVIDUAL
0 CORPORATE OFFICER
DESCRIPTION OF ATTACHED DOCUMENT
TITLE OR TYPE OF DOCUMENT
0 PARTNER(S) 0 LIMITED q GENERAL
E AlTOF-;N-FACT
0 TORUUARDIANK~NSERVATOR q OTHER:
NUMBER OF PAGES
DATE OF DOCUMENT
SIGNER IS REPRESENTING: NAME OF PERSON(S) OR ENTIT’fWS)
SIGNER(S) OTHER THAN NAMED ABOVE
01993 NATIONAL NOTARY ASSOCIATION l 8236 Remmet Ave., P.O. Box 7184 l Chuga Park, CA 91309-7184
WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
POWER OF ATTORNEY
BY THESE PRESENTS: That the Washington IntefnatiOnal Insurance Company, a corporation organized and &sting under the laws
tate of Arizona, and having its principal office in the Village of Itasca, Illinois does hereby constitute and appoint
JAMES BALDASSARE, JR. AND MICHAEL A. QUIGLEY
EACH IN THEIR SEPARATE CAPACITY
its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds and undertakings, reCOgnkanCeS. contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof. which are or may be allowed, required, or permitted by law, statute, rule,
regulation, contract or otherwise, and the execution of such instrument(s) in pursuance Of these presents, shall be as binding upon the said Washington
International Insurance Company as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if the same has been duly executed and acknowledged by .&
President and its principal offICe.
This Power of Attorney shall be limited in amount to $5,500,000.00 for any single ob!igation.
This Power of Attorney is issued pursuant to authority granted by the resolutions of the Board of Directors adopted March 22, 1978,
July 3, 1980 and October 21, 1986 which read, in part, as follows:
1. The Chairman of the Board, President, Vice President, Assistant Secretary, Treasurer and Secretary may designate Attorneys-in-Fad, and a&lo&e them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds, and undertakings, recognhanceq
Contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and to appoint Special Attorneys-in-Fact, who are hereby authorned to certify copies of any power-of-attorney issued in pursuant to this section and/or any of the By-Laws of the Company, and to remove, at any
time, any such Attorney-in-Fact or Special Attorney-in-Fact and revoke the authority given him.
2. The signatures of the Chainan of the Board, the President, Vice President, Assistant Secretary, Treasurer and Secretary, and the corporate seal of the Company, may be af9xed to any Power of Attorney, certificate, bond or undertaking relating thereto, by facsimile. Any such Power
of Attorney, ceri$cate bond or undertaking bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal affixed in the ordinary course of business shall
NAL INSURANCE COMPANY
COUNTY OF COOK)
On this 13th day of June, 1997, before me came the indiidual who executed the preceding instrument, to me personally known, and, being by me
duly sworn, said that he is the therein described and authorized officer of the Washington International Insurance Company; that the seal affixed to
said instrument is the Corporate. Seal of said Company;
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereu y and year first above written.
CERTIFI
STATE OF ILLINOIS)
COUNTY OF COOK)
I, the undersigned, Wee-President of WASHINGTON INTERNATlONAL INSURANCE COMPANY, an ARIZONA Corporation, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached POWER OF ATTORNEY remains in full force and has not been revoked, and furthermore that Article Ill, Section 5
of the By-Laws of the Corporation, and the Resolution of the Board of Directors, set forth in the Power of Attorney, are now in force.
Signed and sealed in the County of Cook Dated the 14TH day of JULY ,19 98 -
GUIDE FOR COMPLETING
THE “DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND
AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID”
AND
“DESIGNATION OF OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR AND
AMOUNT OF OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR WORK” FORMS
REFERENCES Prior to preparation of the following Subcontractor and Owner Operator/Lessor
disclosure forms Bidders are urged to review the definitions in section 1-2 of the SSPWC and of the
Special Provisions to this Contract especially, “Bid”, “Bidder”, “Contract”, “Contractor”, “Contract
Price”, “Contract Unit Price”, “Engineer”, “Subcontractor” and “Work” and the definitions in section l-2 of the Special Provisions especially “Own Organization” and “Owner Operator/Lessor.” Bidders are further urged to review sections 2-3 SUBCONTRACTS of the SSPWC and section 2-3.1 of
these Special Provisions.
CAUTIONS Bidders are cautioned that failure to provide complete and correct information may
result in rejection of the bid as non-responsive. Any bid that proposes performance of more than 50
percent of the work by other than the Contractor’s own organization will be rejected as non-
responsive.
INSTRUCTIONS Bidders shall use separate disclosure forms for each Subcontractor or Owner
Operator/Lessor (O+O) of manpower and equipment that is proposed to be used to complete the
Work.
All items of information must be completely filled out.
Where the bid item will be installed by more than one Subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor the
percentage of the bid item installed by the Subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor being listed in
the line of the form must be entered under the column “O/O of Item by Sub” or “O/O of Item by O+O”
as applicable. If a Subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor installs or constructs any portion of a
bid item the entire amount of the Contract Unit Price shall be multiplied by the Quantity of the bid
item that the Subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor installed.
Suppliers of materials from sources outside the limits of work are not subcontractors. The value of materials and transport for materials from sources outside the limits of work, as shown on the plans,
shall be assigned to the Contractor, the Subcontractor, or the Owner Operator/Lessor as the case
may be, installing them. The value of material incorporated in any Subcontracted or Owner
Operator/Lessor installed bid item that is supplied by the Contractor shall not be included as any
part of the portion of the work that the Contractor is required to perform with its own organization.
The item number from the “CONTRACTOR’S PROPOSAL” (Bid Sheets) shall be entered in the “Bid
Item No.” column.
When a Subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor has a Carlsbad business license the number must
be entered on the form. If the Subcontractor does not have a valid business license enter “NONE” in
the appropriate space.
Bidders shall make any additional copies of the disclosure forms as may be necessary to provide
the required information. The number of additional form pages shall be entered on the first form
page of each type so duplicated.
rf’, l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 23 of 299 Pages
Bidder may, at its option, combine bid items on a single row in the chart on the disclosure forms. If
using this option the Bidder must indicate the bid item numbers to which the information in the row pertains. This option may not be used where the subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessors
constructing or installing less than 100 percent of a bid item. The percentages and dollar amounts
may be the sums of the bid items listed in that row.
When the Bidder proposes using a subcontractor or owner operator/Lessor to construct or install
less than 100 percent of a bid item the Bidder must attach an explanation sheet to the designation
of subcontractor or designation of Owner Operator/Lessor forms as applicable. The explanation sheet must clearly apprise the Agency of the specific tasks, materials and/or equipment that are
proposed to be so supplied.
Determination of the subcontract and Owner Operator/Lessor amounts for purposes of award of the contract shall determined by the City Council in conformance with the provisions of the contract
documents and these Special Provisions. The decision of the City Council shall be final.
a 1/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 24 of 299 Pages
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND
AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS
The Bidder MUST complete each information field on this form for each subcontractor that it proposes to use. Additional copies of this form may be attached if required to accommodate the Contractor’s decision to use more than one subcontractor. This form must be submitted as a part of the Bidder’s sealed bid. Failure to provide complete and correct information may result in rejection of the bid as non-responsive.
The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractors in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractors will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency.
Full Company Name of Subcontractor:
Complete Address: 13Y65 bwa (&,dq ST., lo6-So6
at Street
zc anw 42021
City State Zip
Telephone Number plus Area Code: 6 14 - GA/ c Y 900
California State Contractors License No. & Classification: 7 37 3 c) 8
Carlsbad Business License No.:
OWNER OPERATORILESSOR BID ITEMS
Bid I/ I Item ‘Amount of Item Amount of Item by Overhead & Profit II No. 1 Subcontracted 47An l cl0 I 4 Contractor - I Amount II
6. ‘1
2
Exolanation: Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal, pages 7-16. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the subcontractor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the overhead and profit for the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal pages 7-16.
Page I of 6 pages of this form
~~ l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 25 of 299 Pages
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND
AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS
The Bidder MUST complete each information field on this form for each subcontractor that it proposes to use. Additional copies of this form may be attached if required to accommodate the Contractor’s decision to use more than one subcontractor. This form must be submitted as a part of the Bidder’s sealed bid. Failure to provide complete and correct information may result in rejection of the bid as non-responsive.
The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractors in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractors will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency.
Full Company Name of Subcontractor: cr:p tl*ect)-rcc
Complete Address: PM- D rJ* ?~PCWC 5+
Street ’
i?/ co9-
City State 9&g Zip
Telephone Number plus Area Code: 716 639 4787
California State Contractors License No. & Classification: 7qsolr3 C-P
Carlsbad Business License No.:
OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR BID ITEMS
Amount of Item
Subcontracted
Amount of Item by Overhead & Pro
Exolanation: Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal, pages 7-16. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the subcontractor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the overhead and profit for the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal pages 7-16.
Ww-.- - 2 of 6 pages of this form
4- l/08/98 Contract No. 3340 Page 25 of 299 Pages
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND
AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS
The Bidder MUST complete each information field on this form for each subcontractor that it proposes to use. Additional copies of this form may be attached if required to accommodate the Contractor’s decision to use more than one subcontractor. This form must be submitted as a part of the Bidder’s sealed bid. Failure to provide complete and correct information may result in rejection of the bid as non-responsive.
The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractors in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractors will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency. .
Full Company Name of Subcontractor: c; 77 LJA?muc
Complete Address: 64L/- D IJ* @pLalc 5-v
@tiNbe
Street CA- 9zlm
City State Zip
Telephone Number plus Area Code:
California State Contractors License No. & Classification: ‘7 v 5 0 83 c- 1 0
Carlsbad Business License No.:
OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR BID ITEMS
Bid II I Item Amount of Item Amount of Item by Overhead 8, Profit I/ No. Subcontracted Contractor - 73 ‘35-7~~ O0 W)*ZS 74 x IO0 800 ll<&O 75 $ 1259470 $ 7 /
76 $ YOOl j-N YLOO l 47 LO&O0 7% --$ ~~ -~poo i 882% f W5S
f I f c c a!
Exolanation: Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal, pages 7-16. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the subcontractor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the overhead and profit for the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the
0
item on bid proposal pages 7-16.
Page 3 pages of this form of k
@ l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 25 of 299 Pages
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND
AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS
The Bidder MUST complete each information field on this form for each subcontractor that it proposes to use. Additional copies of this form may be attached if required to accommodate the Contractor’s decision to use more than one subcontractor. This form must be submitted as a part of the Bidder’s sealed bid. Failure to provide complete and correct information may result in rejection of the bid as non-responsive.
The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractors in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractors will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency.
Full Company Name of Subcontractor: ~yoC1eESsrJc Cou\e*k , Llc .
Complete Address: zq I 8 v ijilg y&f,n j&/e.
EScorJDrOb (:A Street 9zo2? City State Zip
Telephone Number plus Area Code: 760- 7J7-di@J
California State Contractors License No. & Classification: LjlbPM 0, (23
Carlsbad Business License No.:
OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR BID ITEMS
II Item I Amount of Item Amount of Item by Overhead & Profit
ExDlanation: Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal, pages 7-16. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the subcontractor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the overhead and profit for the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal pages 7-16.
Page 4 of 6 pages of this form
G l/O8198 Contract No. 3348 Page 25 of 299 Pages
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND
AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS
The Bidder MUST complete each information field on this form for each subcontractor that it proposes to use. Additional copies of this form may be attached if required to accommodate the Contractor’s decision to use more than one subcontractor. This form must be submitted as a part of the Bidder’s sealed bid. Failure to provide complete and correct information may result in rejection of
the bid as non-responsive.
The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractors in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractors will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency.
Full Company Name of Subcontractor: lA&5~ eamr 7-ujw
Complete Address: P.o. 150% 4563
?wrbM i&w 4
Street
b+ qZZ6l
City State Zip
Telephone Number plus Area Code: 2rfm-~%-W6
California State Contractors License No. & Classification: 6 88687
Carlsbad Business License No.:
OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR BID ITEMS
Amount of Item Amount of Item by Overhead & Profit
Exnlanation: Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal, pages 7-16. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the subcontractor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the overhead and profit for the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal pages 7-16.
Page 5 pages of this form of 6
(3 1108/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 25 of 299 Pages
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND
AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS
The Bidder MUST complete each information field on this form for each subcontractor that it proposes to use. Additional copies of this form may be attached if required to accommodate the Contractor’s decision to use more than one subcontractor. This form must be submitted as a part of the Bidder’s sealed bid. Failure to provide complete and correct information may result in rejection of the bid as non-responsive.
The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractors in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractors will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency.
Full Company Name of Subcontractor: J. L. P/%/~D5OAa &J GC l
Complete Address: 2755 J&J+h Wl~~Qd Iwe
P/LoOWM+M
City u State 423rL Zip
Telephone Number plus Area Code: 409. fzo- 3555
California State Contractors License No. & Classification: 286 14z
Carlsbad Business License No.:
OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR BID ITEMS
Amount of Item Amount of Item by Overhead & Profit
Explanation: Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal, pages 7-16. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the subcontractor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the overhead and profit for the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal pages 7-16.
Page 6 of 6 pages of this form
~~ 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 25 of 299 Pages
DESIGNATION OF OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR AND
AMOUNT OF OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR WORK
The Bidder MUST complete each information field on this form for each owner operator/or Lessor
(O+O) that it proposes to use to perform any portion of the Work. Additional copies of this form may
be attached if required to accommodate the Contractor’s decision to use more than one
subcontractor. This form must be submitted as a part of the Bidder’s sealed bid. Failure to provide
complete and correct information may result in rejection of the bid as non-responsive. Except for the individuals listed below the Bidder certifies that no Owner Operator/Lessor will be allowed to perform
any portion of the Work. The Bidder further certifies that no changes in the Owner Operator/Lessor
listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Engineer. Provide a separate sheet for each Owner Operator/Lessor. See section l-2 of the Special Provisions for definition of Owner
Operator/Lessor.
Full Owner Operator/Lessor Name:
Complete Address:
Street
City State
Telephone Number plus Area Code:. ( 1 -
City of Carlsbad Business License No.:
OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR WORK ITEMS
Zip
Amount of Item Amount of Item by Overhead & Profit
ExPlanation:
Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal, pages 7-16.
Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the subcontractor.
Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the overhead and profit for the item.
Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the
item on bid proposal pages 7-16.
Page- - of pages of this form
rl’, l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 26 of 299 Pages
BIDDER’S STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL RESPONSIBILITY ’
(To Accompany Proposal)
Copies of the latest Annual Report, audited financial statements or Balance Sheets may be
submitted under separate cover marked CONFIDENTIAL.
4cc pc~l)ohcd
c’, 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 27 of 299 Pages
BIDDER’S STATEMENT OF
TECHNICAL ABILITY.AND EXPERIENCE
(To Accompany Proposal)
The Bidder is required to state what work of a similar character to that included in the proposed Contract he/she has successfully performed and give references, with telephone numbers, which
will enable the City to judge his/her responsibility, experience and skill. An attachment can be used.
Date
Contract Name and Address
Name and Phone
No. of Person 1 Typeof-
t? 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 28 of 299 Pages
lNSUBANCEBROKERS,LLC
4770 CAMPUS DRIVE
SUITE 100
NEWPORT BEACH
CALIFORNIA 92660
(949)660-3700 a
FACSIMILE (949) 660-3777
LICENSENO. OCO3912
SHERMAN PARENT INSURANCE BROKKERS LLC
4770 CAMPUS DR. SUITE 100
NEWPORT BEACH, CA. 92660
PHONE 714-660-3 700 FAX 7146-660-3 777
TO: City of Carlsbad July 15, I998
From: Bob Parent
RE: Bidder ‘s Certificate of Insurance for General Liability, Employer ‘s
Liability Automotive Liability and Workers Compensation.
Let it be known that R. E. Smith Engineering & Construction Inc. Currently
has in force Insurance policies complying with the requirements set forth in
the bidders specifications. Please find attached a current Evidence of
insurance confirming such. R. E. Smith Engineering & Construction Inc. is in
good standing with all in force insurance companies. ShouId higher limits of
insurance be necessary they are fully capable of procuring such limits.
If you have any questions please feel free to contact me at 714-660-3700 ext.
25.
Bob Parent
Managing Member
PRODUCER Cert# 18054 THls CERTIFICATE is ISSUED As A MATTER 0F INFORMATION ONLY AND
SHERMAN / PARENT INSURANCE BROKERS, LLC CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE
4770 CAMPUS DRIVE SUITE 100 DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE
*
NEWPORT BEACH, CA 92880 POLICIES BELOW.
(949) 660-3700 FAX (949) 660-3777 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
COMPANY
A RANGERINSURANCE @&
INSURED R.E. SMITH ENGINEERING COMPANY
B GENERAL SECURITY INSURANCE COMPANY &?
25801 OBRERO RD., #I 1 MISSION VIEJO, CA 92691
COMPANY
c CALIFORNIA COMPENSATION
COMPANY
D
THIS IS TO CERTlFY THAT THE POLlClES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PER100 INDICATED, NOlWlTHSTANDlNG
ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDmON OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WlTH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY SE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDmONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
co
LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE
GENERAL LIABILITY
x COMMERCIAL GENERAL LlABlLlTY
A, x OWNER’S 6 CONTRACTOR’S PROT. r
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
ANY AUTO
ALL OWNED AUTOS
SCHEDULED AUTOS
GARAGE LIABILITY
ANY AUTO
U(CESS LIABILIN
A x UMBRELLAFORM
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
WORKER’S COMPENSATION AND
_ EMPLOYERS LIABILITY
’ THE PROPRImR/ PARTNERSlMECUTlVE
Fl
INCL
OFFlCERS ARE: EXCL
POLICY NUMBER
CA 4010067
CUP1 12037
w97c149823
POLICY EFFECllVE POUCY EXPlRATlON
DATE (MMIDDIYY) DATE (MMIDDIYY)
DEC 197
JAN398
APR 9 98
DEC 197
DEC198
JAN399
DECII 198
DEC 198
DESCRIPTKIN OF OPERATlONS/LOCATlGNSIVEHlCLEySPEClAL lTEMS
CITY OF CARLSBAD, ITS PARTNERS,OFFICERS, AGENTS AND EMPLOYEES ARE NAMED AS ADDITIONAL INSURED
WITH PRIMARY WORDING PER THE ATTACHED ENDORSEMENT CG 20 10 1185 AS RESPECTS LIABILITY.
ONGOING MAINTENANCE. AUTO ENDORSEMENT FORM GSCA -001 (07 97) ATTACHED. WORKERS COMPENSATION
WAIVER OF SUBROGATION All-ACHED. RE: POINSETTIA PARK PHASE 1 A, BASEBALL FIELD RENOVATION AND
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACT NO. 3348
(
1
I
I
I
h
I
/
t
I
I
;
I
*
LlMlTS
;ENERAL AGGREGATE 6
‘RODUCTSCOMPIOP AGG. 5
‘ERSONAL 6 ADV INJURY 5
3CH OCCURRENCE 5
EIRE DAMAGE(Any OM Fire) S
IED. EXPENSE(Any One Person: $
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT 5
BODILY INJURY
(Par petson) S
I
AGGREGATE 1 S I
EACH OCCURRENCE IS l.ooo.ooa
AGGREGATE If 1 .ooo.ooo
CITY OF CARLSBAD SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
1200 CARLSBAD VILLAGE DRIVE EXPlRATlON DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL MAIL 30 DAYS WRlTlEN NOTlCE TO THE CERTlFiCATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT.
1CtDAY NOTICE OF CANC
.
- .vmc Qf7-n w c-0 c.- L!sld ’ LuEnfI of bd -oQa
CITY OF CARLSBAD, ITS PARTNERS, ' POINSETTIA PARK
OFFICERS, AGENTS, & EMPLOYEES 1200 CARLSBAD VILLAGE DRIVE 1 PHASE 1 A, BASEBALL
CARLSBAD, CA 92008-1989 , FIELD RENOVATION & BUILDING CONSTRUCTION ' CONTRACT NO. 3348
i
GsCA-001(0797)
. 7-e - -‘;-rvs ? -- 1 iLjl/Y i-Y8
3.2. z ‘A - -c e-s- -__ 3GITEs.ING .4ND C~NST3CCTXN, I‘JC. .
T:1JS ENCGRSEMENT CHANGESTHEPOLJCY.PL~'ASEREADiTCAREFULLy.
l ADDJTJONAL INSURED - OWNERS,LESSEES OR
CONTRACTORS (FORM B)
T;-.ls ;~rccr 2.7e.c; .r:c::Yes ,rscr~cc- --fI1eC x&r :.?e t0llCwlng: - C.”
Name of Ptncr, 3rSrzmizt:ion:
SCHE3ULE
CITY OF CARLSBAD, ITS PARTNERS, OFFICERS, AGENTS, & EMPLOYEES 1200 CARLSBAD VILLAGE DRIVE CARLSBAD, CA 92008-1989
(:f ~4 entry awesm ame. infor3aticn :equired ‘2 cczm@etc *is crdumems:~U 52 sh3m in 3e Gedaratkms as apoliaElc :o :ki mdcrserrt.)
'&%O !S AN lNSi’RE3 (Mm II) is amerded to irc!udc as an insured 22 penca w “~3niaion w Ir: t..
ScxCuie. tX-r cniy wit.‘: rusxz :o fiabiiity sting art of “pr WC&” fcr Es: inswed by cr fw you.
SC-i i?tSURANCE Xt iS AFXRDED BY TdI.5 POLICY FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE Xt30YE NWED PEXSON.5
i2R ORUHIZATZONS SMLL 3E ?RIWRY IlUHUfKE Xs RES?ECX ANY CL4I9.5, LOSSES, OR LIABILI7
ARISiN6 OiREt7L‘! CR I.‘dOIREfXY FROM THE CONlRACTOR'S OPEUT?ONS XHD ANY OTHER I!fSURAKE
jv TSE MOVE MJ?ED PZ?SOHS CR ORWlIZdTIONS SXUL s"E EXESS CR nOlY CO~IWTCR VW., -.c I.YZLRA'iCE ?!?3VIDE3 KERELINDER.
.
CG tOlC1185 Ccpyright. Insurance ~efvices Office. IX.. 1983
WWlVrr
E$TABLISHED IS33
wunnrn3 buwrctw3m8 IVIW
and
C~LIFbRNi~‘C~MPENSATlON
INSURANCE COMPANY EMPLOYERS LIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY
0 WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS
We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person(s) or organization(s) named in the Schedule. (This agreement applies only to the extent that you perform work under a written contract that requires you to obtain this agreement from us.)
You must maintain payroll records accurately segregating the remuneration of your employees while engaged in the work described in the Schedule.
The additional premium for this endorsement shall be 5% of the California Workers’ Compensation premium otherwise due on such remuneration.
Minimum Premium: $50
Schedule:
Person or Oraanization: Job Descrbtion:
ALL CPERATIONS
Period: 12/i/97-98
CITY OF CARLSBAD, ITS PARTNERS, OFFICERS; AGENTS & EMPLOYEES 1200 CARLSBAD VILLAGE DRIVE
CARLSBAD, CA 92008-1989
This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached and is effective on the date issued unless otherwise stated.
(The information below is required onty when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.)
Endorsement Effective Polk; No. W97c149823
SMITH, R.E. ENGINEERING Endorsement No. 12
CALCOMP INSURANCE COMPANY
Insured
?bdx
INSURED COPY President
BIDDER’S STATEMENT RE DEBARMENT
(To Accompany Proposal)
1. Have you.or any of your subcontractors ever been debarred as an irresponsible bidder by
another jurisdiction in the State of California?
yes
/
no
2. If yes, what was/were the name(s) of the agency(ies) and what was/were the period(s) of
debarment(s)? Attach additional copies of this page to accommodate more than two debarments.
party debarred party debarred
agency agency
period of debarment period of debarment
BY CONTRACTOR:
Pmld 6. J&fh / ?ks,~cbi+-
(print name/title) r
c? l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 30 of 299 Pages
BIDDER’S DISCLOSURE OF DISCIPLINE RECORD
(To Accompany Proposal)
Contractors are required by law to be licensed and regulated by the Contractors’ State License Board which has jurisdiction to investigate complaints against contractors if a complaint regarding a
patent act or omission is filed within four years of the date of the alleged violation. A complaint
regarding a latent act or omission pertaining to structural defects must be filed within 10 years of the
date of the alleged violation. Any questions concerning a contractor may be referred to the
Registrar, Contractors’ State License board, P-0. Box 26000, Sacramento, California 95826.
1. Have you ever had your contractor’s license suspended or revoked by the California
Contractors’ State license Board two or more times within an eight year period?
Yes no
2. Has the suspension or revocation of your contractors license ever been stayed?
yes no.
3. Have any subcontractors that you propose to perform any portion of the Work ever had their
contractor’s license suspended or revoked by the California Contractors’ State license Board two or
more times within’an eight year period?
yes
J
no
4. Has the suspension or revocation of the license of any subcontractor’s that you propose to
perform any portion of the Work ever been stayed?
I/
yes no
5. If the answer to either of 1. or 3. above is yes fully identify, in each and every case, the party disciplined, the date of and violation that the disciplinary action pertain to, describe the nature of the
violation and the disciplinary action taken therefor.
(Attach additional sheets if necessary)
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 31 of 299 Pages
BIDDER’S DISCLOSURE OF DISCIPLINE RECORD
(CONTINUED)
(To Accompany Proposal)
6. If the answer to either of 2. or 4. above is yes fully identify, in each and every case, the party
who’s discipline was stayed, the date of the violation that the disciplinary action pertains to, describe
the nature of the violation and the condition (if any) upon which the disciplinary action was stayed.
(Attach additional sheets if necessary)
BY CONTRACTOR:
loud 6,.S~r=tk / fiq;pcQls
(print name/title)
rl’) l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 32 of 299 Pages
(NOTARY SEAL)
WENDY SUECAMARENA
COMM. I1 152028
ORANOE COUNTY 5
17.
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT TO BE EXECUTED
BY BIDDER AND SUBMITTED WITH BID
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 7106
State of California 1 ) ss.
County of 1
Rmtk4 i5 5wri+G\ , being first duly sworn, deposes (Name of Bidder)
and says that he or she is ? rcs Iparr (Title)
of R.G. $d-h Ei+kinwin~ ; (+msr~JCf~o~, XK.
(Name of Firt$
the party making the foregoing bid that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any
undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is
genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited
any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired,
connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain
from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement,
communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to
fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure
any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed
contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the bidder has not,
directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents
thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any
corporation, partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or
agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid.
f perjury that the foregoi g is
k~~r$? ii%: penaly&
ue and correct and that this affidavit was , 19s day of a?!.
Subscribed and sworn to before me on the /$-?’ dayof &/&!$,& , 19 -?$!?
@ 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 33 of 299 Pages
CONTRACT
PUBLIC WORKS
This agreement is made this d& /bG day of
d , & %?&/(hereinafter
City and Contractor agree as follows:
1. Description of Work. Contractor shall perform all work specified in the Contract documents
for:
POINSETTIA PARK PHASE I-A
CONTRACT NO. 3348
(hereinafter called “project”)
2. Provisions of Labor and Materials. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and personnel to perform the work specified by the Contract Documents.
3. Contract Documents. The Contract Documents consist of this Contract, Notice Inviting
Bids, Contractor’s Proposal, Bidder’s Bond, Designation of Subcontractors, Designation of Owner Operator/Lessors, Bidder’s Statements of Financial Responsibility, Technical Ability and Experience,
Re Debarment, Non-collusion Affidavit, Escrow Agreement, Release Form, the Plans and
Specifications, the Special Provisions, addendum(s) to said Plans and Specifications and Special
Provisions, and all proper amendments and changes made thereto in accordance with this Contract
or the Plans and Specifications, and all bonds for the project; all of which are incorporated herein by this reference.
Contractor, her/his subcontractors, and materials suppliers shall provide and install the work as
indicated, specified, and implied by the Contract Documents. Any items of work not indicated or
specified, but which are essential to the completion of the work, shall be provided at the Contractor’s expense to fulfil1 the intent of said documents. In all instances through the life of the Contract, the
City will be the interpreter of the intent of the Contract Documents, and the City’s decision relative to said intent will be final and binding. Failure of the Contractor to apprise subcontractors and
materials suppliers of this condition of the Contract will not relieve responsibility of compliance.
4. Payment. For all compensation for Contractor’s performance of work under this Contract, City
shall make payment to the Contractor per section 9-3 PAYMENT of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (SSPWC) 1997 Edition, and the 1998 supplement thereto, hereinafter
designated “SSPWC”, as issued by the Southern California Chapter of the American Public Works Association, and as amended by the Special Provisions section of this contract. The Engineer will close the estimate of work completed for progress payments on the last working day of each month.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 34 of 299 Pages
-
5. Independent Investigation. Contractor has made an independent investigation of the
jobsite, the soil conditions at the jobsite, and all other conditions that might affect the progress of
the work, and is aware of those conditions. The Contract price includes payment for all work that may be done by Contractor, whether anticipated or not, in order to overcome underground
conditions. Any information that may have been furnished to Contractor by City about underground
conditions or other job conditions is for Contractor’s convenience only, and City does not warrant
that the conditions are as thus indicated. Contractor is satisfied with all job conditions, including
underground conditions and has not relied on information furnished by City.
6. Hazardous Waste or Other Unusual. Conditions. If the contract involves digging
trenches or other excavations that extend deeper than four feet below the surface Contractor shall promptly, and before the following conditions are disturbed, notify City, in writing, of any:
A. Hazardous Waste. Material that Contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste,
as defined in section 25117 of the Health and Safety Code, that is required to be removed to a
Class I, Class II, or Class Ill disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law.
B. Differing Conditions. Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those
indicated.
C. Unknown Physical Conditions. Unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature, different materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally rewgnized as inherent
in work of the character provided for in the contract.
City shall promptly investigate the conditions, and if it finds that the conditions do materially so differ,
or do involve hazardous waste, and cause a decrease or increase in contractor’s costs of, or the
time required for, performance of any part of the work shall issue a change order under the
procedures described in this contract.
In the event that a dispute arises between City and Contractor whether the conditions materially
differ, or involve hazardous waste, or cause a decrease or increase in the contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the work, contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date provided for by the contract, but shall proceed with all work to be
performed under the contract. Contractor shall retain any and all rights provided either by contract
or by law which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests between the contracting parties.
7. Immigration Reform and Control Act. Contractor certifies it is aware of the requirements
of the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 (8 USC sections 1101-l 525) and has complied
and will comply with these requirements, including, but not limited to, verifying the eligibility for
employment of all agents, employees, subcontractors, and consultants that are included in this
Contract.
8. Prevailing Wage. Pursuant to the California Labor Code, the director of the Department of Industrial Relations has determined the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in accordance
with California Labor Code, section 1773 and a copy of a schedule of said general prevailing wage
rates is on file in the office of the City Engineer, and is incorporated by reference herein. Pursuant
to California Labor Code, section 1775, Contractor shall pay prevailing wages. Contractor shall post copies of all applicable prevailing wages on the job site.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 35 of 299 Pages
9. Indemnification. Contractor shall assume the defense of, pay all expenses of defense, and
indemnify and hold harmless the City, and its officers and employees, from all claims, loss, damage,
injury and liability of every kind, nature and description, directly or indirectly arising from or in
connection with the performance of the Contract or work; or from any failure or alleged failure of
Contractor to comply with any applicable law, rules or regulations including those relating to safety and health; and from any and all claims, loss, damages, injury and liability, howsoever the same
may be caused, resulting directly or indirectly from the nature of the work covered by the Contract,
except for loss or damage caused by the sole or active negligence or willful misconduct of the City.
The expenses of defense include all costs and expenses including attorneys’ fees for litigation,
arbitration, or other dispute resolution method.
Contractor shall also defend and indemnify the City against any challenges to the award of the
contract to Contractor, and Contractor will pay all costs, including defense costs for the City.
Defense costs include the cost of separate counsel for City, if City requests separate counsel.
10. Insurance. Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the contract insurance
against claims for injuries to persons or damage to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, his or her agents, representatives,
employees or subcontractors. Said insurance shall meet the City’s policy for insurance as stated in
Resolution No. 91-403.
(A) Coverages And Limits Contractor shall maintain the types of wverages and minimum limits
indicted herein:
a. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance: $l,OOO,OOO combined single limit per
occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. If the policy has an aggregate limit, a separate aggregate in the amounts specified shall be established for the risks for which the City or its agents,
officers or employees are additional insured.
b. Automobile Liability Insurance: $l,OOO,OOO combined single limit per accident for bodily
injury and property damage. In addition, the auto policy must cover any vehicle used in the
performance of the contract, used onsite or offsite, whether owned, non-owned or hired, and
whether scheduled or non-scheduled. The auto insurance certiftcate must state the coverage is for “any auto” and cannot be limited in any manner.
c. Workers’ Compensation and Employers’ Liability Insurance: Workers’ compensation limits
as required by the Labor Code of the State of California and Employers’ Liability limits of $1 ,OOO,OOO
per incident. Workers’ compensation offered by the State Compensation Insurance Fund is
acceptable to the City.
(B) Additional Provisions. Contractor shall ensure that the policies of insurance required under
this agreement contain, or are endorsed to contain, the following provisions. General Liability,
Employers’ Liability and Automobile Liability Coverages:
a. The City, its officials, employees and volunteers are to be covered as additional insured as
respects: liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of the Contractor; products and
completed operations of the contractor, premises owned, leased, hired or borrowed by the
contractor. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the City, its officials, employees or volunteers. All additional insured endorsements must be
evidenced using separate documents attached to the certificate of insurance; one for each company
affording general liability, employers’ liability and auto liability coverage.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 36 of 299 Pages
b. The Contractor’s insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respects the City, its
officials, employees and volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the City, its
officials, employees or volunteers shall be in excess of the contractor’s insurance and shall not
contribute with it.
C. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage provided
to the City, its officials, employees or volunteers.
d. Coverage shall state that the contractor’s insurance shall apply separately to each insured
against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer’s
liability.
(C) “Claims Made” Policies. If the insurance is provided on a “claims made” basis, coverage
shall be maintained for a period of three years following the date of completion of the work.
(D) Notice Of Cancellation. Each insurance policy required by this agreement shall be endorsed
to state that coverage shall not be nonrenewed, suspended, voided, canceled, or reduced jn
coverage or limits except after thirty (30) days’ prior written notice has been given to the City by
certified mail, return receipt requested.
(E) Deductibles And Self-Insured Retention (S.I.R.) Levels. Any deductibles or self-insured
retention levels must be declared to and approved by the City. At the option of the City, either: the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retention levels as respects the
City, its officials and employees; or the contractor shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of
losses and related investigation, claim administration and defense expenses.
(F) Waiver Of Subrogation. All policies of insurance required under this agreement shall contain
a waiver of all rights of subrogation the insurer may have or may acquire against the City or any of
its officials or employees.
(G) Subcontractors. Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insured under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. Coverages for
subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein.
(H) Acceptability Of Insurers. insurance is to be placed with insurers that have a rating in Best’s
Key Rating Guide of at least A-:V. Insurers must also be authorized to transact the business of
insurance by the State of California Insurance Commissioner as admitted carriers as evidenced by a
listing in the official publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California and/or
under the standards specified by the City Council in Resolution No. 91-403.
(I) Verification Of Coverage. Contractor shall furnish the City with certiicates of insurance and original endorsements affecting coverage required by this clause. The certificates and endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to
bind coverage on its behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to be in forms approved by the
City and are to be received and approved by the City before the Contract is executed by the City.
(J) Cost Of Insurance. The Cost of all insurance required under this agreement shall be included
in the Contractor’s bid.
11. Claims and Lawsuits. All claims by contractor for $375,000 or less shall be resolved in
accordance with the provisions in the Public Contract Code, Division 2, Part 3, Chapter 1, Article 1.5
(commencing with section 20104) which are incorporated by reference. A copy of Article 1.5 is
included in the Special Provisions I section. The contractor shall initially submit all claims over $375,000 to the City using the informal dispute resolution process described in Public Contract
Code subsections 20104.2(a), (c), (d). Notwithstanding the provisions of this section of the contract, all claims shall comply with the Government Tort Claim Act (section 900 et seq., of the California
Government Code) for any claim or cause of action for money or damages prior to filing any lawsuit
for breach of this agreement.
(A) Assertion of Claims. Contractor hereby agrees that any contract claim submitted to the City
must be asserted as part of the contract process as set forth in this agreement and not in anticipation of litigation or in conjunction with litigation.
(B) False Claims. Contractor acknowledges that if a false claim is submitted to the City, it may be
considered fraud and the Contractor may be subject to criminal prosecution.
(C) Government Code. Contractor acknowledges that California Government Code sections
12650 et seq., the False Claims Act, provides for civil penalties where a person knowingly submits a
false claim to a public entity. These provisions include false claims made with deliberate ignorance
of the false information or in reckless disregard of the truth or falsity of the information.
(D) Penalty Recovery. If the City of Carlsbad seeks to rewver penalties pursuant to the False
Claims Act, it is entitled to rewver its litigation costs, including attorney’s fees.
(E) Debarment for False Claims. Contractor hereby acknowledges that the filing of a false claim
may subject the Contractor to an administrative debarment proceeding wherein the Contractor may
be prevented from further bidding on public contracts for a period of up to five years.
(F) Carlsbad Municipal Code. The provisions of Carlsbad Municipal Code sections 3.32.025,
3.32.026, 3.32.027 and 3.32.028 pertaining to false claims are incorporated herein by reference.
(G) Debarment from Other Jurisdictions. Contractor hereby acknowledges that debarment by another jurisdiction is grounds for the City of Carlsbad to disqualify the Contractor or subcontractor
from participating in future contract bidding.
I have read and understand ail provisions of Section 11 above. --42-
12. Maintenance of Records. Contractor shall maintain and make available at no cost to the
City, upon request, records in accordance with sections 1776 and 1812 of Part 7, Chapter 1, Article
2, of the Labor Code. If the Contractor does not maintain the records at Contractor’s, principal place of business as specified above, Contractor shall so inform. the City by certified letter accompanying
the return of this Contract. Contractor shall notify the City by certified mail of any change of address
of such records.
13. Labor Code Provisions. The provisions of Part 7, Chapter 1, commencing with section
1720 of the Labor Code are incorporated herein by reference.
14. Security. Securities in the form of cash, cashier’s check, or certified check may be substituted
for any monies withheld by the City to secure performance of this contract for any obligation established by this contract. Any other security that is mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the
City may be substituted for monies withheld to ensure performance under this Contract.
‘3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 38 of 299 Pages
15. Provisions Required by Law Deemed inserted. Each and every provision of law and
1)
clause required by law to be Anserted in this Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and
included herein, and if, through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or is not
correctly inserted, then upon application of either party, the Contract shall forthwith be physically
amended to make such insertion or correction.
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . . a . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
*..
. . .
. . .
. . .
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 39 of 299 Pages
16. Additional Provisions. Any additional provisions of this agreement are set forth in the
“General Provisions” or “Special Provisions” attached hereto and made a part hereof.
GMENT OF EXECUTION BY ALL SIGNATORIES MUST BE ATTACHED
pal corporation of
ATTEST:,
President or vice-president and secretary or assistant secretary must sign for corporations. If only
one ,officer signs, the corporation must attach a resolution certified by the secretary or assistant
secretary under the corporate seal empowering that officer to bind the corporation.
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
RONALD R. BALL
City Attorney
By:
JANE MOBALDI Deputy City Attorney
vrp l/08/98 bJ C ntract No. 3348 Page 40 of 299 Pages
CORPORATE RESOLUTIOlV
THIS DOCUMENTISTORESOLVETHATTHEINDIVIDUALSLISTEDBELOWA~ELE~DTOTHEOFFICESSET
FORTEOPPOSITETEEIRRESPECTIVENAMESANDAUTHORIZEDTOBINDTHECORPORATIONOF R.E.SMITH
ENGINEERINGANDCONSTRUCTION~INC.
NAME OFFICE
RONALD E. SMITH PRESIDENT
RONALD E. SMITH SECRETARY
RONALD E. SMITH VICE PRESIDENT
RONALD E. SMITH CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
0 THIS LETTERSERYESASCERTIFICATIONTRATRONALD E.SMITH HOLDS
ALLEXECUTIVETITLESANDOFFICESFORTIIECORPORATIONOF
R.E.SMITH ENGINEERINGANDCONSTRUCTION,INCORPORATED
ANDISSOLELYAUTIIORIZEDTOBINDTEIsCORPORATION.
RONALD E.Sm, PRESIDENT, V.P., SECRETARY, C.F.O.
PRINTNAMEANDTITLE
CORPORATESEALAFFIXEDHERE
0 25801 OBRERO ROAD, SUITE 11 kbSSIONyIEJO,CA9269I &ONE: (949)859-0%1 FAX: (949)859-0551
LICENSE: 358613
CORPORATE RESOLUTION
THIS DOCUMENTISTORESOLVETHATTHEINDMDUALSLISTEDBELOWAREELECTEDTOTHEOFFICESSET
FORTEIOPPOSITETHEIRRESPECTIvENAMESANDAUTIIORIZ~DTOBINDTIIECORPORATIONOF R.E.SMITE
ENGINEERINGANDCONSTRUCTION,INC.
NAME OFFICE
RONALD E. SMITH PRESIDENT
RONALD E. SMITH SECRETARY
RONALD E. SMITH VICE PRESIDENT
RONALD E. SMITH CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
0 THIS LETTERSERVESASCERTIFICATIONTIIATRONALD E. SMITHHOLDS
ALLEXECUTIvETITLESANDOFFICESFORTIIECORPOk%TIONOF
R.E.SMITH ENGINEERINGANDCONSTRUCTION,INCORPORATED
ANDISSOLELYA RIZEDTOBINDTHISCORPORATION.
RONALD E.SMITH, PRESIDENT, V.P., SECRETARY, C.F.O.
FRINTNA~~ANDTITLE
CORPORATESEALAFFI~EDHERE
0 25801 OBFtERO ROAD, Sm 11 b%SSIONvIFXO,CA92691 PHONE: (949)859-0511 FAX: (949)859-0551
IdCENSE: 358613
CORPORATE RESOLUTION
THIS DOCUMENTISTORESOLVETHATTHEINDMDUALSLISTEDBELOWAREELECTEDTOTHEOFFICESSET
FORTHOPPOSITETI3EIRRESPECI-IVENAMESANDAUTHORIZEDTOBINDTEIECORPORATIONOF R.E.SMITH
ENGINEERINGANDCONSTRUCTION,INC.
NAME OFFICE
RONALD E. SMITH PRESIDENT
RONALD E. SMITH SECRETARY
RONALD E. SMITH VICE PRESIDENT
RONALD E. SMITH CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
0 THIS LETTERSERYESASCERTIFICATIONTIIATR~NALD E. SMITH HOLDS
ALLExECUTIVETITLESANDOFFICESFORTIIECORPORATIONOF
R.E.SMITH ENGINEERINGANDCONSTRUCTION,INCORPORATED
ANDISSOLELYAUTHORIZEDTOBINDTHIsCORPORATION.
AI~IIORIZEDSIGNATURE '
RONALD E. SMITH, PRESIDENT, V.P., SECRETARY, C.F.O.
FRINTNAMEANDTITLE
CORPORATESEALAFFIXEDIIERE
0 25801 ~BRERO Ram, SUITE 11 MISSIONVIELJo, bTJ3NSE: CA92691 3586 13 PHONE: (949) 859-0511 FAX: (949) 859-0551
Contractor’s State License Board - License Detail http://www2.cslb.ca.gov/iXpress/CSLB_Library/CSLB+Booknicense.DML
STATE OF CALIFORNIA
CONTRACTOR’S STATE LICENSE
I? 0. B0x26000
SACMEA7T0, CA 95826
PHONE: I-80th321 -2 752
BOARD
* * * DISCLAIMER * * *
‘I’hc lictme status information shown below rtTresents information taken from the CSIB licensing data base at the time of your
inqtlirq-. It will not r&ct pending updates which are being reviewed for subsequent data base updating. The available information may not &lect auy civil or crinlinal judgtuents or actions that have not been reported to the CSlB. [fthere are
disclosable complaints (legal actions) on the contractor’s license, that information will be provid&. If you intend to pursue any
kiud of legal action. insure you get a “Verified Certificate” which is a certified license histoT wvering :I specific time period prior to t&king my action.
Extract Date: October 01,1998
THE RESULTS OF YOUR INQUIRY FOR CONTRACTOR LICENSE NUMBER 358613 IS:
* * * BUSINESS INFORMATION * * *
R E SMITH ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTlON INC
0 25801 OBRERO RD #11
MISSION VIEJO, CA 92691
Entity: Corporation
I.ssue Date: 06/05/1978 Reissue Date: 09/l 711998 Expire Date: 09/30/2000
* * * LICENSE STATUS * * *
This license is current and active.
* * * C~LASSIFICATIONS * Jc *
A GENERAL ENGINEERING CONTRACTOR
* * * CONTRACTOR BONDING INFORMATION * * *
This license has bond number GC%1192473 in the amount of $7,500 with the bonding company
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS AND MERCANTILE REASSURANCE COMPANY.
Effective Date: 07/28/l 998
* * * WORKERS COMPENSATION INFORMATION * * *
This license has workers compensation insurance with the CALIFORNIA COMPENSATION
INSURANCE COMPANY
0
Policy Number: W97Cl49823 Efrective Date: 12/01/1997 Expire Date: 12/01/1998
1 of2 10/l/98 10:30 AM
Contractor’s State License Board - Personnel List http://www2.cslb.ca.gov/iXpress/CSLB_Libr...B+BwWPersoImel+List.DML?LicNum=tt358613
Personnel List
for License Number 3S8613
Click on t-he person’s name ta see a more detaiied pase of infbrmation on that person.
.I... .i :_ .!
I SMTTH. RONALD
Rewest ( License Reauest or go to the
CSLB HOME Pape.
10/l/98 10131 AM
;;; lxi
ifi w w z.5 m ZP -a -
w WCn ua
28 LL oa 0 W
25
Efl era JfJ
tJ3z
iW 2a HZ ma . 3x2 mu0
*SE LO< -*a I- w OIL& ZUO
c
..____ ,. .- -’
9-27- 1998 9 : 32PM FROM SMITH ENGINEERING 714 859 0551 P. 2
c BOND #.S-700 2582 PREMIUM INCLUDED ON PERFORMANCE BOND
EXECUTED IN DUPLICATE . .
UBOR AND MATERIALS .BOND
WHEREpSro~ city Council of the Cii of C&bad. State of Caf&mia, by Resolution No. - -PM SEPTEMBER 8, 1998
R. E. SMITH ENGINEEiING & CONSTRUCTION, INC. , has awarded to
(hereinafter designated as the “Principal”), a Contractfw:
POlNSETllA PARK PHASE J-A CONTRACT NO. 3348
in thi City of Carl&ad. in strict conformity witt; the draw@gs and specifications, and other Contract Doa~ments now on file in the Offi of the City Clerk of the City of Carlsbad and all of which are incorporated herein by this reference.
f”
0
WHEREAS, PriMpal has executed or is about to execute said Contract and the terms thereof require the furnishing of a bond, prov*iding that if Principal or any of their oubwntractors shall fail to pay for any materials, provisions, provender or other supplies or teams used in, upon or about the
performance of the work agreed to be dons, or for any work or labor done thereon of any kind, the
Surety on.this bond wii pay the same to the extent hereinafter set forth.
NOW, THEREFORE, WE, 8. E. SMITH ENGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION, INC. 4 WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL
as Principal. (hereinafter designated as the “Contractof), and INSURANCE coMPANY
as Surety, am held firmly bound unto the City of Carl&ad hthe sum of
FOUR HUNDRED FORTY THOUSAND NINE HUNDRED FOUR h SO/lOO------------ DoHars
(s 440,904.80----- ), said suni being fifty percent (50%) of the g~timated amount payable by the City of Car&bad under the terms of the Contract, for which payment well and truly to be made
we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators. sucCessors, or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if the person or bier subcontractors fail to pay for any materials, prcwisiis, provender, supplies, or teams used in. upon, for, or about the performance of the work czontracted to be done, or for any other work or labor thereon of any kind. or for amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Cods with respect to such work or labor, or for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the Employment Development Department from the wages of employees of the contractor and subcorrtract ors pursuant to section 13020 of the Unemptoyment Insurance Code with respect to such work and labor that Ihe Surety will pay for the seme, not to exceed the sum spec%d in the bond, and, also, in case suit is brwght upon the bond, costs and reasonable expenses and fees. including reasonable attomey’s&es, to be fixed by the court. as required by the provisions of section 3248 of the C&f&ii civil Code.
This bond shaH inure to the benefit of any and all persons, compani8s and awporations entitled to file claims under Tii 15 of Part 4 of Division 3 of the civil Code (commencing with section 3082).
Surety stiplilates and agrees that no change, extension of time. alteration or addition to the terms of
thocOn~,0rbo~worktobeperfomredttwreunderorthespecificatiorrc accompanying the Sam8 shall affect its oMitions on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any change,
8xtefISion Of timt3. 8hed0fl~ or addition t0 the t6?mrS Of the COtItr8Ct or t0 th8 work or to th8 specifications.
l/08/96 Contract No. 3340’ Page41 of299Pag8s
9-27-1998 9:32PM FROM SEiITH ENGINEERING 716 859 8551 P. 3
fn the event that Contractor is an individual, it is agreed that the death of any such Contractor shall not exonerate the +e~ty from its obligations under this bond.
Executed by CONTRACTOR this i?0 Executed& SURETY thii 28’rH day ,lQ%.
R. E. SMITH ENGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION, INC.
- - 2 of-d L. 4 i! 4-vlAm
(print n&e here)
(titleandorganizationofsignatofy) :
(sign here)
(pfifcnama here)-
(title and organization of signatory)
of 'SEPTEMBER ,lQ g8 .
SUREW
WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMFAN
(name of Surety)
300 PARK BLVD, 5500, ITASCA, IL 61043
(address of Surety)
MICHAEL A. QUIGLEY
(printed name of Attorney-in-Fact)
(ithch cqmmte resolution showing current
powerofatt#ney)
(Proper nobrial adcnowiedge of execution by CONTRACTOR and SURETY must be attached.)
(President Of vice-president and secretary or assistant secfetafy must sign for awpomtions. If only one ofiicer signs, the corporation must attach a resolution certified by the secretary or assistant Secretay under corporate seal empowering that officer to bind the corporation.)
&‘PROVED j4S TO FORM:
# lIO&SM ConirmotNo. 3340 Page42of2QQPages
.
STATE OF CALIFORNIA
b I ss.
COUNTYOF ORANGE J
on SEPTEMBER 28, 1998 , before me, M. TREDINNICK, NOTARY PUBLIC
PERSONALLY APPEARED MICHAEL A. QUIGLEY
I
personally known to me (or proved to me on the basis of
satistactory evidence) to be the person(s) whose name(s)
is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowl-
edged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/
her/their authorized capacity&s), and that by his/her/
theix signature(s) on the instzument the person(s), or the
entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed
the instrument.
WITNESS my hand and official seal.
Signature &&O&q This area for O@ial Notarial Seal
OPTIONAL
Though the data below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent
fraudulent reattachment of this form.
CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER DESCRIPTION OF AllACHED DOCUMENT
Cl INDIVIDUAL
0 CORPORATE OFFICER
TITLE OR TYPE OF DOCUMENT
0 PARTNER(S) 17 LIMITED
0 GENERAL q ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
0 TRUSTEE(S)
4 ~U$lAN/CONSERVATOR
NUMBER OF PAGES
DATE OF DOCUMENT
SIGNER IS REPRESENTING: NAME of PERsoN OR ENnlYiIE.s)
SIGNER(S) OTHER THAN NAMED ABOVE
10-081 Rev. 6194 ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
, WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL /NSURANCE COMPANY
POWER OF ATTORNEY
ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: That the Washington International InWanCe Company, a cOrporation organized and existing under the laws
of Arizona, and having its principal office in the Village of Itasca, Illinois does hereby constitute and appoint
JAMES BALDASSARE, JR. AND MICHAEL A. QUIGLEY
EACH IN THEIR SEPARATE CAPACITY
s true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds and undertakings, recognizances,
:ontracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof. which are or may be allowed, required, or permitted by law, statute, rule,
,eguiation, contract or otherwise. and the execution of such instrument(s) in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon the said Washington
nternational Insurance Company as fully and amply, to ail intents and purposes, as if the same has been duly executed and acknowledged by its
‘resident and its principal office.
This Power of Attorney shall be limited in amount to 55,500,000.00 for any single obligation.
This Power of Attorney is issued pursuant to authority granted by the resolutions of the Board of Dire&o= adopted March 22, 1978,
July 3, 1980 and October 21, 1986 which read, in part, as follows:
1. The Chairman of the Board, President, Vice President, Assistant Secretary, Treasurer and Secretary may designate Attorney&n-Fact, and
authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds, and undertakings, recognizances.
contracts of indemnity and other wr’itjngs obligatory in the nature thereof, and to appoint Special Attorneys-in-Fact, who are hereby authorned
to certify copies of any power-of-attorney issued in pursuant to this section and/or any of the By-Laws of the Company, and to remove, at any
time, any such Attorney-in-Fact or Special Attorney-in-Fact and revoke the authority given him.
2. The signatures of the Chairman of the Board, the President, Vice President, Assistant Secretary, Treasurer and Secretary, and the corporate
seal of the Company, may be tied to any Power of Attorney, certificate. bond or undertaking relating thereto, by facsimile. Any such Power
of Attorney, certjficate bond or undertaking bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal affixed in the ordinary course of business shalt
be valiQ~d,@;~,Jing upon the Company. ,,\O‘ .-;::-;<a, * IN TESj@$&H&?E$$e Washington International Insurance Company has caused this instrument to be signed and its corporate seal to be
affixe~~~~~.~uthorize~‘~~~~~~~is 13th day of June, 1997. 2 .$. : ” .-j * c, : :: L
*
t; : -c .
9 5 *i
: ~~~*~
= yy -. =. $2 *. *# .$a *. *. -* . . ..**..... --
+h,,,4gjzor:h ,\++
~~yf$$&9J~~~~-M~~~y *
STATE OF &tUJDIHs)~“”
COUNTY OF COOK)
On this 13th day of June, 1997, before me came the individual who executed the preceding instrument to me personally known, and, being by me
duly sworn, said that he is the therein described and authorized officer of the Washington International Insurance Company; that the seal aftixed to
said instrument is the Corporate. Seal of said Company;
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereu y and year first above written.
CERTIFI
STATE OF ILLINOIS)
COUNTY OF COOK) .
I, the undersigned, Vice-President of WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY, an ARIZONA Corporation, DO HEREBY CERTIFY
that the foregoing and attached POWER OF ATTORNEY remains in full force and has not been revoked, and furthermore that Article III, Section 5
of the By-Laws of the Corporation, and the Resolution of the Board of Directors, set forth in the Power of Attorney, are now in force.
Signed and sealed in the County of Cook. Dated the 28TH” day of SEPTEMBER ,19 g8 -
* CALlFORNlA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNCWLEDGMEm
personalJy known to me - OR - 0 proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence
to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are
subscribed to the within instrument and ac-
knowledged to me that he/she/they executed
the same in his/her/their authorized
capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their
signature(s) on the instrument the person(s),
or the entity upon behalf of which the
person(s) acted, executed the instrument.
it may prove vatuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent
traudulent reattachment of this form.
CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER DESCRIPTION OF ATTACHED DOCUMENT
0 INDMDUAL
0 CORPORATE OFFICER
. . TITLE OR TYPE OF DOCUMENT TamI
0 PAPTNER(S) cl UMlTEO
0 GENERAL
0 ATTORNEY-IN.FAC;f
a TRUSTEE(S)
0 GUARDIAN/CONSERVATOR
0 OTHER:.
NUMBER OF PAGES
-.. DATE OF DOCUMENT
BIGNER IS REPRESENTING: N&ME OT mPSWSl W EMTIPVESI
. . . .- -- SIGNER(S) OTHER THAN NAMED ABOVE
.--_. -. . ,-
f
10-d
01993 NATIoNAL NorARv ASSOCIATION l 5236 F4omma Ave., P.O. Born 7194 l cianoga PML cA91309-7194
9-27- 1998 9 : 33PM FROM semi EffiIM33tI~~ 714 859 8551
‘) BOND # S-700 2582 t PREMIUM: $10,245.00
. 1 EXECUTED IN DUPLICATE
r”
0
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCEMIARRANTY BOND
P. 4
WHEREAS, the City Council of the City of Caflsbad, State of California. by Resaruti~ No; 98-304 &p&d SEPTEMBER 8, 1998
R. E. SMITH EiGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION, INC. , has awarded to . (hereinafter
designated as the Trincipar), a Contract for:
PO1NSEI-M PARK PHASE I-A CONTRACT NO. 3348
in the ~ii of Carl&ad, in strict conformii with the contract, the drawings and specifications. and other Contract Documents now on file in the CJ5ca of the CXy Clerk of the city of Carlsbad. all of which am incorporated herein by this reference.
WHEREAS, Principal has executed or is about to execute said Contract and the terms tharaof require the furnishing of a bond for the faithful performance and warranty of said Contract;
N&,J/JHE~~~REJfE R. E. SMITH'ENGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION, INC. I , as Principal.
(hereinafter designated as the “Contractof), and WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
EIGHT HU- EIGkTY ONE FL , are held and f TY HOUSAND EIGHT bound unto tha city of Cartsbad, UNDRED as Sure
in&sumof NINE AND 60/100----- DOlIarS ($ 881 s80g l 6o--- ) said sum being squat to OIW hundred percent (1009’6) of ths estimated amount of the Contract, bo be paid to City or tb certain attorney, its successors-and assigns; for which payment, well and truly to be made, & bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors or assigns, jointly and sevealfy,
firmly by these pmsents.
THE CONDITION OF THlS OBLIQATION IS SUCH that if the above bounden Contracts, their heirs, executors, administrators, suc@ssors or assigns, shall in all things stand to and abide by, and well and truly keep and perform ths.cnvenants, conditions, and agreements in the Contract and any
alteration thereof made as therein provided on their part, to be kept and performeM at the time and in the manner therein specRed. and in all respects according to their true intent and meaning, and shalt indemnify and ‘save harmless the City of Cartsbad, its officers, employees and agents, as
therein Stipulated, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full foraz and effed
As a part Of the obligation secured hen&y and in addition to the face amount speciiied therefor, there shall be included CWS and reasonable expenses and fees, including reasonable attorney’s fees, incurred by the Ci in successfully enforcing such obligation, all to be taxed as costs and
included in any judgment fenWed.
Surety stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the tears of the Contract, or to the work tc? be perfomred thereunder or the specifi&ons accompanying the same shall affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any change, extension of time, alterations or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the SpsCificationS.
I)’
w 1/0i3m Contract No. 3348 Page 43 of 299 Pages
9-27- 1998 9 : 33PM f=l?ClM SMITH ENGIIEERING 716 859 8551
. P. 5
in the event that Contractor is an individual, it is agreed that the death of any such Contractor shari not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this bond.
coluTRAcToR
R. E.SMITH.ENGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION, INC.
(Title and Organizatiun of Signatwy)
8y: (sign hem)
(print name. here)
Executed bys~~TRf3YRthii 28TH day of ,19 98
SUREW
WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
(WJ~ of swty)
300 PARK BLVD, #SOO, 1TASCA;IL 61043
Address of Surety)
ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
(printed name of Attomey-bf-ad)
(Attach corporate resdutlon showing current
poweraf~omey.)
(Tiie and OrganiWon of signatory)
(Proper notarial acknowkd ge of execution by CONTRACTOR and SURETY must be attached.)
. (President w vke+resident and secretary or assistant secretary must sign for corporations. If only one officer signs, the corporation must attach a resolution cw?il%d by the secretary or assistant
secretary under wfporate seal empowering that offwr to bind the wrporation.)
APPROVED AS TO FORM: RONALD R. BALl
Wf--Y
43 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 PapA4ofi9QPaQes
STATE OF CALIFORNIA
D ss. COUNTYOF ORANGE
on SEPTEMBER 28, 1998 , before me, M. TREDINNICK, NOTARY PUBLIC
PERSONALLY APPEARED MICHAEL A. QUIGLEX
personally known to me (or proved to me on the basis of
satisfactory evidence) to be the person(s) whose name(s)
is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowl-
edged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/
her/their author&d capacity(ies), and that by his/her/
their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the
entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed
the instrument.
WI’INSS my hand and official seal.
Signature 7X.5 amfor Official Notarial Seal
OPTIONAL
Though the data below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent
fraudulent reattachment of this form.
CAPAClTY CLAIMED 8Y SIGNER DESCRIPTION OF AITACHED DOCUMENT
u INDIVIDUAL
0 CORPORATE OFFICER
TITLE OR P/PE OF DOCUMENT
0 PARTNER(S) 0 LIMITED
0 GENERAL
0 ATTORNEY-IN-FACT NUMBER OF PAGES
0 TRUSTEE(S)
; ~;U~lANlCONSERVATOR
DATE OF DOCUMENT
SIGNER IS REPRESENTING:
NAME OF PERSON(S) OR ENlllY(IE.9)
SIGNER(S) OTHER THAN NAMED ABOVE
tO-081 Rev. 6/94 ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
.
WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
POWER OF AmORNEY
ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: That the Washington International Insurance Company, a corporation organized and &sting under the laws
of Arizona, and having its principal office in the Village of Itasca, Illinois does hereby constitute and appoint
JAMES BALDASSARE, JR. AND MICHAEL A. QUIGLEY
EACH IN THEIR SEPARATE CAPACITY
&true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds and undertakings, recognizances,
contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, which are or may be allowed, required, or permitted by law, statute, rule,
reguiation, contract or otherwise, and the eXecUtiOn of such instrument(s) in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon the said Washington
International Insurance Company as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if the same has been duty executed and acknob$&dged by its
President and its principal office.
This Power of Attorney shall be limited in amount to 35,500,000.00 for any single obligation.
This Power of Attorney is issued pursuant to authority granted by the resolutions of the Board of Directors adopted March 22, 1978,
JUIY 3, 1980 and October 21, 1986 which read, in part, as follows:
1. The Chairman of the Board, President, Vice President, Assistant Secretary, Treasurer and Secretary may designate Attorneys-in-Fact, and
author&e them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds, and undertakings, recognhancq
contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof. and to appoint Special Attorneys-in-Fact, who are hereby authorned
to certify copies of any power-of-attorney issued in pursuant to this section and/or any of the By-Laws of the Company, and to remove, at any
time, any such Attorney-in-Fact or Special Attorney-in-Fact and revoke the authority given him.
2. The signatures of the Chairman of the Board, the President, Vice President, Assistant Secretary, Treasurer and Secretary, and the corporate
seal of the Company, may be afkxed to any Power of Attorney, certificate, bond or undertaking relating thereto, by facsimile. Any such power
of Attorney, certificate bond or undertaking bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal affixed in the ordinary course of business shall
be val&apd,jjinting upon the Company. ,,\\\’ . ..:.--; -
IN TES~&+!$&i&~&$a~ Washington International Insurance Company has caused this instrument to be signed and its corporate seal to be
affixe~~~~~.~ut~~~~~~:&~~~~~~is 13th day of June, 1997. 2‘ .+ : *.y nr. .s 2 LY : d.Jr5. ..j ,.:-ye: :.t.* : y;, c;
cz z.
*
!2 i~.a,Y-.> “..,Y . . . fly c S : -, - NAL INSURANCE COMPANY
-: :5= ” . = 5:s
i-y ‘: T$ R 1;
-. 5
. . z$IjLjib.?_b jz:j r-‘. *
5, 2 -$ ‘.*. *a.. : 2’ 4 s
-3. .- - . . . . . . . .- ’ 8 ‘5, 9
“O/, 4~~~~N~ ++
STATE OF &~~olSj@O
COUNTY OF COOK)
On this 13th day of June, 1997, before me came the individual who executed the preceding instrument, to me personally known, and, being by me
duly sworn, said that he is the therein described and authorized officer of the Washington International Insurance Company; that the seal affixed to
said instrument is the Corporate. Seal of said Company;
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereu y and year first above written.
MICHELLE HOb’i%TON
Notary Fubiic, State of I~tki&
STATE OF ILLINOIS)
COUNTY OF COOK) .
I, the undersigned, Vice-President of WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY, an ARIZONA Corporation, DO HEREBY CERTIFY
that the foregoing and attached POWER OF ATTORNEY remains in full force and has not been revoked. and furthermore that Article Ill, Section 5
of the By-Laws of the Corporation, and the Resolution of the Board of Directors, set forth in the Power of Attorney, are now in force.
Signed and sealed in the County of Cook. Dated the ?8TH” Jay of SEPTEMBER ,19 98 -
KNOWLeDGMENt NC. IDO?
,
luAUEm Of SGNWS)
personally known to me - OR - 17 proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence
DY SUE CAMARENA
COMM. Xl 152028 z NOTARY PUBLIC - CALIFORNIA 3
ORANGE COlJNfY
Mv Commlrrhm Exph Augur 17.2001
to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are
subscribed to the within instrument and ac-
knowledged to me that he/she/they executed
the same in his/her/their authorized
capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their
signature(s) on the instrument the person(s),
or the entity upon behalf of which the
person(s) acted, executed the instrument.
Though the data below is not required by law, it nwy prove valuable to person6 r8tyiq on the doCIment and cwld pf@veN
traudulent feaiiachment of this fOrIn
CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER DESCRIPTION OF ATTACHED DOCUMENT u fNDIWOUAL
0 CORPORATE OFFICER
TITLE OR TYPE OF DOCUMENT
fl PARTNER(S) c] LWTED -
u GENERAL q AlY0ANEY-WFACt - NUMBER OF PAGES
u TRUSTEE(S)
0 GUARDtANKtONSERVATOR
0 OTHER:-
’ -- DATE OF DOCUMENT
SIGNER IS REPRE$~NTMG: NAME OT wYtsuw OA ErmnFESl
. . .__ Y- SIGNER(S) OTHER THAN NAMED ABOVE
---.. -. . I-
10-d
01893 luAT6NALNOTAffr ASSOCIATION-~~~~ Rernmm AW., P.O. 80* ~~tU”~PukCAS~~WM
CITY OF CARLSBAD Purchasing Department 1200 Carlsbad Villa Carlsbad CA 9 008 s e Drive
REPRESENTATION AND CERTIFICATION
The following representation and certification shall be completed, signed and returned to City of Carlsbad as a part of the bid package.
REPRESENTATIONS: Mark all applicable blanks. This offeror represents as part of this offer that the ownership, operation and control of the business, in accordance with the specific definitions listed below is:
MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISe “Minority Business” is defined as a business, at least 51 percent of which is owned, operated and controlled by minority group members, or in the case of publicly owned businesses, at least 51 percent of which is omvnnL$perated and controlled by minority group The Small Busrness Administration defines the socially and economically disadvantaged (minorities) as Black American, Hispanic American, Native Americans (i.e. American Indian, Eskimos, Aleuts and Native Hawaiians), and Asian-Pacific Americans (i.e., U.S. Citiiens whose origins are from Japan, China, the Philippines, Vietnam, Korea, Samoa, Guam, the U.S. Trust Territories of the Pacific, Northern Martanas, Laos, Cambodia and Taiwan).
Ar&you
Certification #:
J?iERTlFlCATlON OF BUSINESS J?EPRESENTATIONISk.
Mark all applicable blanks. This offeror represents as a part of this offer that:
This firm is-, is not a minority business. This firm is-, 4 is not a woman-owned business.
WOMAN-OWNED BUSINESS: A woman-owned business is a business of which at least 51 percent is owned, controlled and operated by a woman or women. Controlled is defined as exercising the power to make policy decisions. Operation is defined as actually involved in the day-to-day management.
FIRM’S PRIMARY PRODUCTS OR SERVICE;
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR;
CLASSIFICATION(S):
LICENSE NUMBER: 35867 13
TAXPAYERS I.D. NO. z 33 fl 0 7qgb 8 a
CERTIFICATION: The information furnished is certified to be factual and correct as of the date submitted.
Page 45 of 299 Pages ‘3 1108198
OPTIONAL ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR
SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION
This Escrow Agreement is made and entered into by and between the City of Carlsbad whose
address is 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad, California, 92008, hereinafter called “City” and
whose address is
hereinafter called
“Contractor” and whose address is
called “Escrow Agent.”
hereinafter
For the consideration hereinafter set forth, the City, Contractor and Escrow Agent agree as follows:
1. Pursuant to sections 22300 and 10263 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, the
contractor has the option to deposit securities with the Escrow Agent as a substitute for retention
earnings required to be withheld by the City pursuant to the Construction Contract entered into
between the City and Contractor for Poinsettia Park Phase I-A, Contract No. 3348 in the amount of
dated (hereinafter referred to as the
“Contract”). Alternatively, on written request of the contractor, the City shall make payments of the retention earnings directly to the escrow agent. When the Contractor deposits the securities as a
substitute for Contract earnings, the Escrow Agent shall notii the City within 10 days of the deposit. The Escrow Agent shall maintain insurance to cover negligent acts and omissions of the escrow agent in connection with the handling of retentions under these sections in an amount not less than
$100,000 per contract. The market value of, the securities at the time of the substitution shall be a least equal to the cash amount then required to be withheld as retention under the terms of the
contract between the City and Contractor. Securities shall be held in the name of the
I and shall designate the Contractor as the beneficial
owner.
2. The City shall make progress payments to the Contractor for such funds which otherwise would
be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the Contract provisions, provided that the Escrow
Agent holds securities in the form and amount specified above.
3. When the City makes payment of retentions earned directly to the escrow agent, the escrow
agent shall hold them for the benefit of the contractor until such time as the escrow created under this contract is terminated. The contractor may direct the investment of the payments into
securities. All terms and conditions of this agreement and the rights and responsibilities of the
parties shall be equally applicable and binding when the City pays the escrow agent directly.
4. The contractor shall be responsible for paying all fees for the expenses incurred by the Escrow Agent in administering the Escrow Account and all expenses of the City. These expenses and
payment terms shall be determined by the City, Contractor and Escrow Agent.
5. The interest earned on the securities or the money market accounts held in escrow and all interest earned on that interest shall be for the sole account of Contractor and shall be subject to
withdrawal by Contractor at any time and from time to time without notice to the City.
‘3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 46 of 299 Pages
6. Contractor shall have the right to withdraw all or any part of the principal in the Escrow Account
only by written notice to Escrow Agent accompanied by written authorization from City to the Escrow Agent that City consents to the withdrawal of the amount sought to be withdrawn by Contractor.
7. The City shall have a right to draw upon the securities in the event of default by the Contractor. Upon seven days’ written notice to the Escrow Agent from the City of the default, the Escrow Agent
shall immediately convert the securities to cash and shall distribute the cash as instructed by the
City.
8. Upon receipt of written notification from the City certifying that the Contract is final and complete
and that the Contractor has complied with all requirements and procedures applicable to the
Contract, the Escrow Agent shall release to Contractor all securities and interest on deposit less
escrow fees and charges of the Escrow Account. The escrow shall be closed immediately upon
disbursement of all moneys and securities on deposit and payments of fees and charges.
9. The Escrow Agent shall rely on the written notifications from the City and the contractor pursuant to sections (1) to (8), inclusive, of this agreement and the City and Contractor shall hold
Escrow Agent hamrless from Escrow Agent’s release, conversion and disbursement of the securities and interest as set forth above.
10. The names of the persons who are authorized to give written notices or to receive written notice
on behalf of the City and on behalf of Contractor in connection with the foregoing, and exemplars of their respective signatures are as follows:
For Contractor:
For Escrow Agent:
Title
Name
Signature
Address
Name
Signature
Address
Title
Name
Signature
Address
At the time the Escrow Account is opened, the City and Contractor shall deliver to the Escrow Agent
a fully executed counterpart of this Agreement.
1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 47 of 299 Pages
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement by their proper officers on the
date first set forth above.
For City:
For Contractor:
For Escrow Agent:
‘3 1108198
Title
Name
Signature
Address
Title
Name
Signature
Address
Title
Name
Signature
Address
Contract No. 3348 Page 48 of 299 Pages
SPECIAL PRhlONS
FOR
POINSETTIA PARK PHASE I-A
CONTRACT NO. 3348
SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS TO
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION
. PART 1, GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 1 --TERMS, DEFINITIONS ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
I-I TERMS
Add the following section: I -I .I Reference to Drawings. Where words “shown “, “indicated”, “detailed”, “noted”, “scheduled”,
or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that reference is made to the plans accompanying these provisions, unless stated otherwise.
Add the following section:
I -I .2 Directions. Where words “directed”, “designated ” “selected”, or words of similar import are ,
used, it shall be understood that the direction, designation or selection of the Engineer is intended, unless stated otherwise. The word “required” and words of similar import shall be understood to mean “as required to properly complete the work as required and as approved by the Engineer,”
unlessstated otherwise.
Add the following section:
I-I.3 Equals and Approvals. Where the words “equal”, “approved equal”, “equivalent”, and such
words of similar import are used, it shall be understood such words are followed by the expression
“in the opinion of the Engineer”, unless otherwise stated. Where the words “approved”, “approval”,
“acceptance”, or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the approval,
acceptance, or similar import of the Engineer is intended.
Add the following section:
I-I .4 Perform. The word “perform” shall be understood to mean that the Contractor, at its expense, shall perform all operations, labor, tools and equipment, and further, including the
furnishing and installing of materials that are indicated, specified or required to mean that the Contractor, at its expense, shall furnish and install the work, complete in place and ready to use,
including furnishing of necessary labor, materials, tools, equipment, and transportation.
‘3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 49 of 299 Pages
Id DEFINITIONS. Modify as follows: The following words, or groups of words, shall be exclusively
defined by the definitions assigned to them herein.
Agency - the City of Carlsbad, California.
City Council - the City Council of the City of Carlsbad.
City Manager - the City Manager of the City of Carlsbad or his/her approved representative.
Dispute Board - persons designated by the City Manager to hear and advise the City Manager on
claims submitted by the Contractor. The City Manager is the last appeal level for informal dispute
resolution.
Engineer - the City Engineer of the City of Carlsbad or his/her approved representative. The City
Engineer is the third level of appeal for informal dispute resolution.
Minor Bid Item - a single contract item constituting less than 10 percent (10%) of the original
Contract Price bid.
Own Organization - When used in Section 2-3.1 - Employees of the Contractor who are hired, directed, supenrised and paid by the Contractor to accomplish the completion of the Work. Further,
such employees have their employment taxes, State disability insurance payments, State and Federal income taxes paid and administered, as applicable, by the Contractor. When used in
Section 2-3.1 “own organization” means construction equipment that the Contractor owns or leases
and uses to accomplish the Work. Equipment that is owner operated or leased equipment with an
operator is not part of the Contractor’s Own Organization and will not be included for the purpose of
compliance with section 2-3.1 of the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions.
Owner Operator/Lessor - An9 person who provides equipment or toob with an operator provided
who is employed by neither the Contractor nor a subcontractor and is neither an agent or employee
of the Agency or a public utility.
Principal Inspector - The Senior Inspector’s immediate supervisor and second level of appeal for informal dispute resolution.
Project Inspector - the Engineer’s designated representative for inspection, contract administration and first level for informal dispute resolution.
Senior Inspector-the Project Inspector’s immediate supenrisor and first level of appeal for informal
dispute resolution.
Architect - all references in the plans and specifications to Architect or Landscape Architect shall
mean Engineer.
P?# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 50 of 299 Pages
SECTION 2 -- SCOPE AND CONTROL OF THE WORK
2-3 SUBCONTRACTS.
2-3.1 General, add the following: Should the Contractor fail to adhere to the provisions requiring
the Contractor to complete 50 percent of the contract price with its own organization, the Agency
may at its sole discretion elect to cancel the contract or to deduct an amount equal to 10 percent of
the value of the work performed in excess of 50 percent of the contract price by other than the
Contractor’s own organization. The City Council shall be the sole body for determination of a violation of these provisions. In any proceedings under this section, the prime contractor shall be
entitled to a public hearing before the City Council and shall be notified ten (10) days in advance of
the time and location of said hearing. The determination of the City Council shall be final.
24 CONTRACT BONDS, modify as follows: Delete the third sentence of the first paragraph
having to do with a surety being listed in the latest revision of U.S. Department of Treasury Circular
570.
Modify Paragraphs three and four to read: The Contractor shall provide a faithful
performance/warranty bond and payment bond (labor and materials bond) for this contract. The faithful performance/warranty bond shall be in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price and
the payment bond shall be in the amount of 50 percent of the contract price. Both bonds shall extend in full force and effect and be retained by the Agency during this project until they are
released according to the provisions of this section.
The faithful performance/warranty bond will be reduced to 25 percent of the original amount 30 days
after rewrdation of the Notice of Completion and will remain in full force and effect for the one year
warranty period and until all warranty repairs are completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The payment bond shall be released six months plus 30 days after rewrdation of the Notice of
Completion if all claims have been paid.
Add the following: All bonds are to be placed with a surety insurance carrier admitted and
authorized to transact the business of insurance in California and whose assets exceed their liabilities in an amount equal to or in excess of the amount of the bond. The bonds are to contain the following documents:
1) An original, or a certified copy, of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney, by laws, or other instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so.
2) A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer issued by the insurance
commissioner.
If the bid is accepted, the Agency may require a financial statement of the assets and liabilities of the insurer at the end of the quarter calendar year prior to 30 days next preceding the date of the
execution of the bond. The financial statement shall be made by an officer’s certificate as defined in Section 173 of the Corporations Code. In the case of a foreign insurer, the financial statement may
be verified by the oath of the principal officer or manager residing within the United States.
‘3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 51 of 299 Pages
2-5 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS.
2-5.1 Plans and Specifications, the construction plans consist of 44 sheets designated as City of
Carlsbad Drawing No. 3348-1A.
2-5.2 Precedence of Contract Document, add the following: Where architect specifications
Division OZDivision 18 are used to modify the SSPWC or added to the SSPWC by any of the contract documents, the architect’s specifications shall have precedence only to the structural sections of the contract, including restroom facilities and storage building. Parts 1, 2, and 3 shall have precedence over the architect’s specifications for all other items of work.
2-5.3.3 Submittals, add the following: When submitted for the Engineer’s review, Shop Drawings shall bear the Contractor’s certification that he has reviewed, checked, and approved the Shop
Drawings and that they are in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The
Contractor shall subscribe to and shall place the following certification on all submittals:
“I hereby certify that the (equipment, material) shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed
to be incorporated into this Project, is in compliance with the Contract Documents, can be installed
in the allocated spaces, and is submitted for approval.
By: Title:
Date:
Company Name:
Add the following: 2-5.4 Record Drawings, The Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date a complete “as-built” record set of blue-line prints, which shall be corrected in red daily and show every change from the original drawings and specifications and the exact “as-built” locations, sizes and kinds of equipment, underground piping, valves, and all other work not visible at surface grade. Prints for this purpose may be obtained from the Agency at cost. This set of drawings shall be kept on the job and shall be used only as a record set and shall be delivered to the Engineer upon completion of the work. Payment for perfoming the work required by section 2-5.4 shall be included in various bid items and no additional payment will be made therefor.
28 SURVEYING.
2-9.1 Permanent Survey Markers, substitute the following: The Contractor shall not disturb permanent survey monuments or benchmarks without the consent of the Engineer. Where the Engineer concurs, in writing, with the Contractor that protecting an existing monument in place is impractical, the Contractor shall employ a licensed land surveyor to establish the location of the monument before it is disturbed. The Contractor shall have the monument replaced by a licensed land surveyor no later than thirty (30) days after construction at the site of the replacement is
completed. The Licensed Land Surveyor shall file wmer record(s) as required by §Q 8772 and
8773, et seq. of the California Business and Professions Code.
When a change is made in the finished elevation of the pavement of any roadway in which a permanent survey monument is located, the Contractor shall adjust the monument frame and wver to the new grade. Monument frames and wvers shall be protected during street sealing or painting
projects or be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 52 of 299 Pages
2-9.3 Survey Service, substitute the following: The Contractor shall hire and pay for the services
of a land surveyor licensed in the State of California, hereinafter Surveyor, to perform all work necessary for establishing control, construction staking, records research and all other surveying work necessary to construct the work, provide surveying services as required herein and provide surveying, drafting and other professional services required to satisfy the requirements of the Land Surveyors Act. Surveyor shall be resident on the site during all surveying operations and shall personally supervise and certify the surveying work.
Add the following section:
2-9.3.1 Submittal of Surveying Data, All surveying data submittals shall conform to the requirements of section 2-5.3.3, “Submittals”, herein. The Contractor shall submit grade sheets to the Engineer before commencing work in the area affected by the grade sheets. The Contractor shall submit field notes for all surveying required herein to the Engineer within ten days of performing the survey. All surveying field notes, grade sheets and survey calculations shall be submitted in bound form on 81/2n by 11” paper. The field notes, calculations and data shall be clear and complete with name of field party chief, field crew members, preparer, date of observation or calculation, consecutive page numbers and shall be readable without resort to any electronic aid, computer program or documentation for any computer program. The field notes shall be prepared in conformance with the CALTRANS “Surveys Manual”. The Contractor shall have a Record of Survey prepared and filed in conformance with §Q 8700 - 8805 of the State of California Business and Professions Code showing all SDRS M-10 monuments set. The record of survey-shall show the location and justification of location of all permanent monuments set and their relation to the street right-of-way. Record(s) of Survey(s) shall be submitted for the Engineer’s review and approval before submittal to the County Surveyor and before submittal to the County Recorder.
Add the following section: 2-9.3.2 Survey Requirements, Stakes shall be set at offsets approved by the Engineer at 50 foot
intervals as measured along the project stationing unless a lesser interval is specified herein. Rough sub-grade stakes on slopes shall be set at top of cuts, toe of fills, or slope catch points and street crown lines where no median exists. Large slopes shall have line point set to aid in construction of the slope. Rough sub-grade stakes for roadway section shall be set at edge of pavement and top of curbs. Finish sub-grade stakes shall be set prior to placing subbase or aggregate base for the roadway section. The stakes shall be set at edge of pavement and top of
curbs. Finish subgrade stakes for the aggregate base for the roadway section shall be at 25-foot
intervals at edge of pavement and top of curbs and crown line where no median exists.
Intermediate stakes between edge of pavement and top of curb shall be set at 15-foot intervals by the surveyor. Finish aggregate subbase and aggregate base grade stakes shall be at 25-foot intervals at top of curb, edge of pavement, and all crown lines and grade breaks. Intermediate stakes between edge of pavement and top of curb shall be set at 15-foot intervals. Storm drain staking shall be done at 25-foot intervals. Catch basins shall be staked at centerline and each end
of the local depression. Curbs/curbs and gutter shall be staked at 25-foot intervals, center line of
driveways, and l/4, l/2, 3/4 delta on returns. Fills to finish grade at 25-foot intervals by the paving pass width shall be painted on the pavement prior to placing each lift of asphalt on variable thickness pavement overlays requiring leveling courses. Intersections showing specific finished asphalt grids shall be painted per the grid. Stakes shall be set to show the location and grade of future curbs adjacent to traffic signal locations where the curb is not being built as a part of this contract. Surveyor shall mark the removal limits and limits of work line shown on the plans. The markings shall consist of continuous painted lines on asphalt and concrete surfaces and red flagged or painted laths spaced on centers no more than twenty-five feet on unimproved areas. The markings shall be completed by Surveyor and inspected and approved by the Engineer before the start of construction in the area marked. Centerline monuments shall be laid out, their disk
‘r# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 53 of 299 Pages
stamped, and a Record of Survey satisfactory to the Engineer filed with the County in accordance with the Professional Land Surveyors Act. Water and sewer line stakes shall be set at 25-foot intervals with offsets referencing the top and centerline of pipe on main line and laterals. For all
pipeline work the pipe and each access hole, pipe material change, lateral connection, fitting,
appurtenance, or hydrant location with elevations shall be staked and provided with grade stakes designating the offset of the reference point, station, elevation of reference point, cut (or fill) and feature of pipe that is referenced. Habitat mitigation sites and other areas to be preserved that are shown on the plans shall be staked and flagged at 25 foot intervals prior to the start of any other
activities within the limits of the work.
Add the following section: 2-9.3.3 Payment for Survey, Payment for work performed to satisfy the requirements of Sections 2-9.1 through 2-9.3.2 shall be included in the actual bid items requiring the survey work and no additional payment will be made. Extension of unit prices for extra work shall include full compensation for attendant survey work and no additional payment will be made therefor. Payment for the replacement of disturbed monuments and the filing of wmer records shall be incidental to the work necessitating the disturbance of said monuments and no additional payment will be made therefor.
2-10 AUTHORITY OF BOARD AND ENGINEER
Add the following section: 240.1 Availability of Records, The Contractor shall provide copies of all records in the Contractor’s or subcontractor’s possession pertaining to the work that the Engineer may request.
Add the following section:
240.2 Audit And inspection, Contractor agrees to maintain and/or make available, to the Engineer, within San Diego County, accurate books and accounting records relative to all its activities. The Engineer shall have the right to monitor, assess, and evaluate Contractor’s performance pursuant to this Agreement, said monitoring, assessments, and evaluations to include, but not be limited to, audits, inspection of premises, reports, contracts, subcontracts and interviews of Contractor’s staff. At any time during normal business hours and as often as the Engineer may deem necessary, upon reasonable advance notice, Contractor shall make available to the Engineer for examination, all of its records with respect to all matters covered by this Contract and will permit
the Engineer to audit, examine, copy and make excerpts or transcripts from such data and records, and to make audits of all invoices, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, and other data relating to all matters covered by this Contract. However, any such activities shall be carried out in a manner so as to not unreasonably interfere with Contractor’s ongoing business operations. Contractor shall maintain such data and records for as long as may be required by applicable laws and regulations.
SECTION 3 -- CHANGES IN WORK
39 EXTRA WORK.
3-2.2.1 Contract Unit prices, add the following: In the case of an increase or decrease in a minor Bid Item, the use of this basis for the adjustment of payment will be limited to that portion of the change, which together will all previous changes to that item is not in excess of 25 percent of the
total cost of such item based on the original quantity and Contract Unit Price. Adjustments in excess of 25 percent may, at the option of the Engineer, be paid pursuant to section 3-3, Extra work.
vg 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 54 of 299 Pages
3-3.2.2 ( c ) Tool and Equipment Rental, second paragraph, modify as follows: Regardless of
ownership, the rates and right-of-way delay factors to be used in determining rental and delay costs shall be the edition of the, “Labor Surcharge & Equipment Rental Rates” published by CALTRANS, current at the time of the actual use of the tool or equipment. The right-of-way delay factors therein shall be used as multipliers of the rental rates for determining the value of costs for delay to the Contractor and subcontractors, if any, The labor rates published therein are not a part of this
contract.
3-3.2.3 Markup, Delete section 3-3.2.3 from the 1997 and the 1998 Supplements to the SSPWC
and replace with the following:
(4 Work by Contractor. The following percentages shall be added to the Contractor’s costs and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profits:
1)
2)
3) 4)
Labor ................................... 20
Materials ............................. 15 Equipment Rental ................... 15 Other Items and Expenditures . . 15
To the sum of the costs and markups provided for in this section, 1 percent shall be added as compensation for bonding.
ON Work by Subcontractor. When all or any part of the extra work is performed by a Subcontractor, the markup established in 3-3.2.3(a) shall be applied to the Subcontractor’s actual cost of such work. A markup of 10 percent on the first $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work and a markup of 5 percent on work added in excess of $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work may be added by the Contractor.
3-3.3 Daily Reports by Contractor, add the following after the second sentence: Payment for extra work will not be made until such time that the Contractor submits completed daily reports and all supporting documents to the Engineer.
3-4 CHANGED CONDITIONS. delete the second sentence of paragraph three, delete paragraph five (5), and add the following: The Contractor shall not be entitled to the payment of any additional compensation for any act, or failure to act, by the Engineer, including failure or refusal to issue a change order, or for the happening of any event, thing, occurrence, or other cause, unless he shall have first given the Engineer due written notice of potential claim as hereinafter specified. Compliance with this section shall not be required as a prerequisite to notice provisions in Section 8-7.3 Contract Time Accounting, nor to any claim that is based on differences in measurement or errors of computation as to contract quantities. The written notice of potential claim for changed conditions shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer upon their discovery and prior to the time that the Contractor performs the work giving rise to the potential claim. The Contractor’s failure
to give written notice of potential claim for changed conditions to the agency upon their discovery
and before they are disturbed shall constitute a waiver of all claims in connection therewith.
The Contractor shall provide the City with a written document containing a description of the particular circumstances giving rise to the potential claim, the reasons for which the Contractor believes additional compensation may be due and nature of any and all costs involved within
20 working days of the date of service of the written notice of potential claim for changed conditions. Verbal notifications are disallowed.
The potential claim shall include the following certification relative to the California False Claims Act, Government Code Sections 12850-l 2655.
vq 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 55 of 299 Pages
“The undersigned certifies that the above statements are made in full cognizance of the California False Claims Act, Government Code sections 12650-12655. The undersigned further understands and agrees that this potential claim, unless resolved, must be restated as a claim in response to the
City’s proposed final estimate in order for it to be further considered.” 0
The Contractor’s estimate of costs may be updated when actual costs are known. The Contractor
shall submit substantiation of its actual costs to the Engineer within 20 working days after the
affected work is completed. Failure to do so shall be sufficient cause for denial of any claim
subsequently filed on the basis of said notice of potential claim.
,
It is the intention of this section that differences between the parties arising under and by virtue of the contract be brought to the attention of the Engineer at the earliest possible time in order that
such matters be settled, if possible, or other appropriate action promptly taken..
3-5 DISPUTED WORK. Add the following: The Contractor shall give the agency written notice of
potential claim prior to commencing any disputed work. Failure to give said notice shall constitute a
waiver of all claims in connection therewith.
Delete second sentence of paragraph one and add the following: Prior to proceeding with dispute resolution pursuant to Public Contract Code (PCC) provisions specified hereinafter, the contractor
shall attempt to resolve all disputes informally through the following dispute resolution chain of command:
1. Project Inspector 2. Senior Inspector 3. Principal Inspector
4. City Engineer
5. City Manager
The Contractor shall submit a complete report within 20 working days after completion of the disputed work stating its position on the claim, the contractual basis for the claim, along with all documentation supporting the costs and all other evidentiary materials. At each level of claim or appeal of claim the City will, within 10 working days of receipt of said claim or appeal of claim,
review the Contractors report and respond with a position, request additional information or request
that the Contractor meet and present its report. When additional information or a meeting is
requested the City will provide its position within 10 working days of receipt of said additional information or Contractor’s presentation of its report. The Contractor may appeal each level’s position up to the City Manager after which he may proceed under the provisions of the Public Contract Code.
The authority within the dispute resolution chain of command is limited to recommending a resolution to a claim to the City Manager. Actual approval of the claim is subject to the change order
provisions in the contract.
All claims by the contractor for $375,000 or less shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures .in the Public Contract Code, Division 2, Part 3, Chapter 1, Article 1.5 (commencing with Section 20104) which is set forth below:
ARTICLE 1.5 RESOLUTION OF CONSTRUCTION CLAIMS
20104. (a)(l) This article applies to all public works claims of three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000) or less which arise between a contractor and a local agency. (2) This article shall not apply to any claims resulting from a contract between a contractor and a public agency when the public agency has elected to resolve any disputes pursuant to Article 7.1 (commencing with Section 10240) of Chapter 1 of Part 2.
?a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 56 of 299 Pages
a -
(b)(l) “Public work” has the same meaning as in Sections 3100 and 3106 of the Civil Code, except
that “public work” does not include any work or improvement contracted for by the state or the
Regents of the University of California.
(2) “Claim” means a separate demand by the contractor for (A) a time extension, (8) payment of money or damages arising from work done by, or on behalf of, the contractor pursuant to the
contract for a public work and payment of which is not otherwise expressly provided for or the
claimant is not otherwise entitled to, or (C) an amount the payment of which is disputed by the local agency. (c) The provisions of this article or a summary thereof shall be set forth in the plans or specifications for any work which may give rise to a claim under this article. (d) This article applies only to contracts entered into on or after January 1, 1991. 20104.2. For any claim subject to this article, the following requirements apply: (a) The claim shall be in writing and include the documents necessary to substantiate the claim. Claims must be filed on or before the date of final payment. Nothing in this subdivision is intended to
extend the time limit or supersede notice requirements othenvise provided by contract for the filing
of claims. (b)(l) For claims of less than fifty thousand dollars ($50,000), the local agency shall respond in
writing to any written claim within 45 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claim the local agency may have against the claimant. (2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the claimant. (3) The local agency’s written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the claimant within 15 days after receipt of the further documentation or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information, whichever is greater.
(c)(l) For claims of over fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) and less than or equal to three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000), the local agency shall respond in writing to all written claims within 60 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claim the local agency may have against the claimant. (2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the claimant. (3) The local agency’s written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the further documentation, or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information or requested documentation, whichever is greater. (d) If the claimant disputes the local agency’s written response, or the local agency fails to respond within the time prescribed, the claimant may so notify the local agency, in writing, either within 15 days of receipt of the local agency’s response or within 15 days of the local agency’s failure to respond within the time prescribed, respectively, and demand an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon a demand, the local agency shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute. (e) Following the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion remains in dispute, the claimant may file a claim as provided in Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code. For purposes of those provisions, the running of the period of time within which a claim must be filed shall be tolled from the time the claimant submits his or her written claim pursuant to subdivision (a) until the time that claim is denied as a result of the meet and confer process, including any period of time utilized by the meet and confer process. (f) This article does not apply to tort claims and nothing in this article is intended nor shall be construed to change the time periods for filing tort claims or actions specified by Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 57 of 299 Pages
20104.4. The following procedures are established for all civil actions filed to resolve claims subject
to this article: (a) Within 60 days, but no earlier than 30 days, following the filing or responsive pleadings, the court
shall submit the matter to nonbinding mediation unless waived by mutual stipulation of both parties.
The mediation process shall provide for the selection within 15 days by both parties of a disinterested third person as mediator, shall be commenced within 30 days of the submittal, and shall be concluded within 15 days from the commencement of the mediation unless a time requirement is extended upon a good cause showing to the court or by stipulation of both parties. If the parties fail to select a mediator within the 15-day period, any party may petition the court to appoint the mediator. (b)(l) If the matter remains in dispute, the case shall be submitted to judicial arbitration pursuant to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 114.1 .lO) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure,
notwithstanding Section 1141 .l 1 of that code. The Civil Discovery Act of 1986 (Article 3
(commencing with Section 2016) of Chapter 3 of Title 3 of Part 4 of the Code of Civil procedure) shall apply to any proceeding brought under the subdivision consistent with the rules pertaining to judicial arbitration. (2) Notwithstanding any other provision of law, upon stipulation of the parties, arbitrators appointed for purposes of this article shall be experienced in construction law, and, upon stipulation of the parties, mediators and arbitrators shall be paid necessary and reasonable hourly rates of pay not to exceed their customary rate, and such fees and expenses shall be paid equally by the parties, except in the case of arbitration where the arbitrator, for good cause, determines a different division. In no event shall these fees or expenses be paid by state or county funds. (3) In addition to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of
Civil Procedure, any party who after receiving an arbitration award requests a trial de novo but does
not obtain a more favorable judgment shall, in addition to payment of costs and fees under that
chapter, pay the attorney’s fees of the other party arising out of the trial de novo. (c) The court may, upon request by any party, order any witnesses to participate in the mediation or arbitration process.
20104.6. (a) No local agency shall fail to pay money as to any portion of a claim which is undisputed except as otherwise provided in the contract. (b) In any suit filed under Section 20104.4, the local agency shall pay interest at the legal rate on any arbitration award or judgment. The interest shall begin to accrue on the date the suit is filed in a wurt of law.
SECTION 4 - CONTROL OF MATERIALS
4-l MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP.
4-1.3.1 General, add the following: The Contractor shall provide the Engineer free and safe
access to any and all parts of work at any time. Contractor shall furnish Engineer with such
information as may be necessary to keep the Engineer fully informed regarding progress and
manner of work and character of materials. Inspection or testing of the whole or any portion of the work or materials incorporated in the work shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation to fulfil1 this Contract.
4-1.4 Test of Materials, add the following: Except as specified in these Special Provisions, the Agency will bear the cost of testing materials and/or workmanship where the results of such tests meet or exceed the requirements indicated in the Standard Specifications and the Special Provisions. The cost of all other tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
At the option of the Engineer, the source of supply of each of the materials shall be approved by him
before the delivery is started. All materials proposed for use may be inspected or tested at any time during their preparation and use. If, after incorporating such materials into the Work, it is found that
sources of supply that have been approved do not furnish a uniform product, or if the product from any source proves unacceptable at any time, the Contractor shall furnish approved material from other approved sources. If any product proves unacceptable after improper storage, handling or for any other reason it shall be rejected, not incorporated into the work and shall be removed from the
project site all at the Contractor’s expense.
Compaction tests may be made by the Engineer and all costs for tests that meet or exceed the
requirements of the specifications shall be borne by the Agency. Said tests may be made at any
place along the work as deemed necessary by the Engineer. The costs of any retests made
necessary by noncompliance with the specifications shall be borne by the Contractor.
4-1.6 Trade names or Equals, add the following: The Contractor is responsible for the satisfactory performance of substituted items. If, in the sole opinion of the Engineer, the substitution is determined to be unsatisfactory in performance, durability, compatibility with associated items, availability of repair parts and suitability of application the Contractor shall remove the substituted item and replace it with the originally specified item at no cost to the Agency.
SECTION 5 - UTILITIES
5-l LOCATION. Add the following: The Agency and affected utility companies have, by a search of known records, endeavored to locate and indicate on the Plans, all utilities which exist within the limits of the work. However, the accuracy and/or completeness of the nature, size and/or location of
utilities indicated on the Plans is not guaranteed.
a 54 RELOCATION. Add the following: In order to minimize delays to the Contractor caused by the failure of other parties to relocate utilities that interfere with the construction, the Contractor, upon request to the Engineer, may be permitted to temporarily omit the portion of work affected by the utility. Such omission shall be for the Contractor’s convenience and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. The portion thus omitted shall be constructed by the Contractor immediately
following the relocation of the utility involved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
SECTION 6 -- PROSECUTION, PROGRESS AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK
6-l CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. Delete subsection 6-l and substitute the following: The Contractor shall begin work within 5 calendar days after receipt of the “Notice to Proceed”.
Add the.following section: 6-1.1 Pre-Construction Meeting. After, or upon, notification of contract award, the Engineer will set the time and location for the Preconstruction Meeting. Attendance of the Contractor’s management personnel responsible for the management, administration, and execution of the project is mandatory for the meeting to be convened. Failure of the Contractor to have the Contractor’s responsible project personnel attend the Preconstruction Meeting will be grounds for default by Contractor per section 6-4. No separate payment will be made for the Contractor’s attendance at the meeting. The notice to proceed will only be issued on or after the completion of the preconstruction meeting.
‘3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 59 of 299 Pages
Add the following section: 6-1.1.1 Baseline Construction Schedule Submittal. The Contractor shall submit the Baseline Construction Schedule per the submittal requirements of section 2-5.3. The submittal of the Baseline Construction Schedule shall include each item and element of sections 6-1.2 through 6-1.2.9 and shall be on hard (paper) copy and electronic media conforming to section 6-l .3.3 Electronic Media.
Add the following section: 6-1.2 Preparation and Review of the Baseline Construction Schedule. The Contractor shall prepare the Baseline Construction Schedule as a Critical Path. Method (CPM) Schedule in the precedence diagram method (activity-on-node) format. The Baseline Construction Schedule shall
depict a workable plan showing the sequence, duration, and interdependence of all activities
required to represent the complete performance of all project work. The Baseline Construction
Schedule shall begin with the projected date of issuance of the notice to proceed and conclude with
the date of final completion per the contract duration. The Baseline Construction Schedule shall include detail of all project phasing, staging, and sequencing, including all milestones necessary to define beginning and ending of each phase or stage. Add the following section:
6-1.2.1 Time-Scaled Network Diagram: As a part of the Baseline Construction Schedule the
Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a complete time-scaled network diagram
showing all of the activities, logic relationships, and milestones comprising the schedule.
Add the following section:
6-1.2.2 Tabular Listing. As a part of the Baseline Construction Schedule the Contractor shall
prepare and submit to the Engineer a tabular listing of all of the activities, showing for each activity
the identification number, the description, the duration, the early start, the early finish, the late start, the late finish, the total float, and all predecessor and successor activities for the activity described.
Add the following section: 6-1.2.3 Bar Chart. As a part of the Baseline Construction Schedule the Contractor shall prepare
and submit to the Engineer a chart showing individual tasks and their durations arranged with the tasks on the vertical axis and duration on the horizontal axis. The bar chart shall use differing texture patterns or distinctive line types to show the critical path.
Add the following section: 6-1.2.4 Schedule Software. The Contractor shall use commercially available software equal to
the Windows 95 compatible Suretrak program by Primavera to prepare the Baseline Construction Schedule and all updates thereto. The Contractor shall submit to the Agency a 3.5” data disk with all network information contained thereon, in a format readable by a Microsoft Windows 95 system.
The Agency will use a Suretrak or equal software program for review of the Contractor’s schedule. Should the Contractor elect to use a scheduling program other than the Suretrak program by Primavera the Contractor shall provide the Engineer three copies of the substituted program that are fully licensed to the Agency and 32 class hours of on-site training by the program publisher for up to eight Agency staff members. The on-site training shall be held at 2075 Las Palmas Drive, Cansbad, California.
Add the following section: 6-1.2.5 Schedule Activities. Except for submittal activities, activity durations shall not be shorter than 1 working day nor longer than 15 working days, unless specifically and individually allowed by the Engineer. The Baseline Construction Schedule shall include between 100 and 500 activities,
TtJ l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 60 of 299 Pages
including submittals, interfaces between utility companies and other agencies, project milestones and equipment and material deliveries. The number of activities will be sufficient, in the judgment of the Engineer, to communicate the Contractor’s plan for project execution, to accurately describe the project work, and to allow monitoring and evaluation of progress and of time impacts. Each activity’s description shall accurately define the work planned for the activity and each activity shall
have recognizable beginning and end points.
Add the following section: 6-1.2.6 Float. Float or slack time within the schedule is available without charge or compensation
to whatever party or contingency first exhausts it.
Add the following section:
6-l .2.7 Restraints to Activities. Any submittals, util-ity interfaces, or any furnishing of Agency supplied materials, equipment, or services, which may impact any activity’s construction shall be shown as a restraint to those activities. Time periods to accommodate the review and correction of
submittals shall be included in the schedule.
Add the following section: 6-l .2.6 Late Completion. A Baseline Construction Schedule showing a project duration longer than the specified contract duration will not be acceptable and will be grounds for default by Contractor, per section 6-4.
Add the following section: 6-1.2.9 Early Completion. The Baseline Construction Schedule will show the Contractor’s plan to support and maintain the project for the entire contractual timespan of the project. Should the
Contractor propose a project duration shorter than contract duration, a complete Baseline
Construction Schedule must be submitted, reflecting the shorter duration, in complete accordance
with all schedule requirements of section 6-l. The Engineer may choose to accept the Contractor’s
proposal of a project duration shorter than the duration specified; provided the Agency is satisfied the shortened Baseline Construction Schedule is reasonable and the Agency and all other entities, public and private, which interface with the project are able to support the provisions of the shortened Baseline Construction Schedule. The Agency’s acceptance of a shortened duration project will be confirmed through the execution of a contract change order revising the project
duration and implementing all contractual requirements including liquidated damages in accordance with the revised duration.
Add the following section: 6-1.2.10 Engineer’s Review. The Construction Schedule is subject to the review of the Engineer. The Engineer’s determination that the Baseline Construction Schedule proposed by the Contractor complies with the requirements of these special provisions shall be a condition precedent to issuance of the Notice to Proceed by the Engineer. If the Engineer determines that the Construction Schedule does not meet the requirements of these specifications the Contractor shall correct the Construction Schedule to meet these specifications and resubmit it to the Engineer. Failure of the
Contractor to obtain the Engineer’s determination that the initial Construction Schedule proposed by
the Contractor complies with the requirements of these special provisions within thirty (30) working days after the date of the preconstruction meeting shall be grounds for termination of the contract per section 6-4. Days used by the Engineer to review the initial Construction Schedule will not be
included in the 30 working days.
The Engineer will review and return to the Contractor, with any comments, the Baseline Construction Schedule within 15 working days of submittal. The Baseline Construction Schedule will be returned marked as per sections 6-l .2.10.1 through 6-1.2.10.3.
vg l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 61 of 299 Pages
Add the following section: 6-l .2.10.1 “Accepted.” The Contractor may proceed with the project work upon issuance of the Notice to Proceed, and will receive payment for the schedule in accordance with section 6-l .8.1.
Add the following section: 6-l .2.10.2 “Accepted with Comments.” The Contractor may proceed with the project work upon issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor must resubmit the schedule incorporating the
comments prior to receipt of payment per section 6-l .8.1.
Add the following section:
6-1.2.10.3 “Not Accepted.” The Contractor must resubmit the schedule incorporating the
corrections and changes of the comments prior to receipt of payment per section 6-l .8.1. The
Notice to Proceed will not be issued by the Engineer if the changes of the comments are not submitted as required hereinbefore and marked “Accepted” or “Accepted with Comments” by the Engineer. The Contractor, at the sole option of the Engineer, may be considered as having defaulted the contract under the provisions of section 6-4 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR if the changes of the comments are not submitted as required hereinbefore and marked “Accepted” by the Engineer.
Add the following section: 6-1.3 Preparation of Schedule Updates and Revisions. The Contractor shall meet with the
Engineer during the last week of each month to agree upon each activity’s schedule status and shall
submit monthly updates of the Baseline Construction Schedule confirming the agreements no later
than the fifth working day of the following month. The monthly update will be submitted on hard (paper) copy and electronic media conforming to section 6-l .3.3 Electronic Media per the submittal requirements of section 2-5.3 and will include each item and element of sections 6-1.2 through 6-1.2.9 and 6-1.3.1 through 6-1.3.7.
Add the following section: 6-1.3.1 Actual Activity Dates. The actual dates each activity was started and/or completed during the month. After first reporting an actual date, the Contractor shall not change that actual date in later updates without specific notification to the Engineer with the update.
Add the following section: 6-1.3.2 Activity Percent Complete. For each activity underway at the end of the month, the Contractor shall report the percentage determined by the Engineer as complete for the activity.
Add the following section: 61.3.3 Electronic Media. The schedule data disk shall be a 3’4. high density diskette, labelled with the project name and number, the Contractor’s name and the date of preparation of the schedule data disk. The schedule data disk shall be readable by the software specified in section 6-1.2.2 Schedule Software and shall be free of file locking, encryption or any other protocol that would impede full access of all data stored on it.
Add the following section: 6-1.3.4 List of Changes. A list of all changes made to the activities or to the interconnecting logic, with an explanation for each change.
Add the following section: 6-1.3.5 Change Orders, Each monthly update will include the addition of the network revisions reflecting the change orders approved in the previous month. The network revisions will be as agreed upon during the review and acceptance of the Contractor’s change orders.
1 lO8i98 Contract No. 3348 Page 62 of 299 Pages
Add the following section: 6-1.3.6 Bar Chart. Each monthly update will include a chart showing individual tasks and their durations arranged with the tasks on the vertical axis and duration on the horizontal axis. The bar chart shall use differing texture patterns or distinctive line types to show the critical path.
l
o-
Add the following section: 6-l. 4 Engineer’s Review of Updated Construction Schedule. The Engineer will review and
return the Updated Construction Schedule to the Contractor, with any comments, within 5 working
days of submittal. The Updated Construction Schedule will be returned marked as per sections
6-1.4.1 through 6-1.4.3. Any Updated Construction Schedule marked “Accepted with Comments” or
“Not Accepted” by the Engineer will be returned to the Contractor for correction. Upon resubmittal
the Engineer will review and return the resubmitted Updated Construction Schedule to the
Contractor, with any comments, within 5 working days. Failure of the Contractor to submit a
monthly updated construction schedule will invoke the same consequences as the Engineer
returning a monthly updated construction schedule marked “Not Accepted”.
Add the following section: 6-1.4.1 “Accepted.” The Contractor may proceed with the project work, and will receive payment for the schedule in accordance with section 6-1.8.2.
Add the following section: 6-l .4.2 “Accepted with Comments.” The Contractor may proceed with the project work. The Contractor must resubmit the Updated Construction Schedule to the Engineer incorporating the corrections and changes noted in the Engineer’s comments prior to receipt of payment per section 6-l .8.2.
Add the following section: 6-1.4.3 “Not Accepted.” The Contractor must resubmit the Updated Construction Schedule to the Engineer incorporating the corrections and changes noted in the Engineer’s comments prior to receipt of payment per section 6-1.8.2. The Contractor, at the sole option of the Engineer, may be considered as having defaulted the contract under the provisions of section 6-4 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR if the changes of the comments are not submitted and marked “Accepted” by the Engineer before the last day of the month in which the Updated Construction Schedule is due. If the Contractor fails to submit the corrected Updated Construction Schedule as required herein the Contractor may elect to proceed with the project at its own risk. Should the Contractor elect not to proceed with the project, any resulting delay, impact, or disruption to the project will be the Contractor’s responsibility.
Add the following section: 6-1.5 Late Completion or Milestone Dates. Should the Schedule Update indicate a completion or contractually required milestone date later than the properly adjusted contract or milestone duration, the Agency may withhold Liquidated Damages for the number of days late. Should a subsequent “Accepted” Schedule Update remove all or a portion of the delay, all or the allocated portion of the previously held Liquidated Damages shall be released in the monthly payment to the Contractor immediately following the ‘Accepted” schedule.
Add the following section: 6-1.6 interim Revisions. Should the actual or projected progress of the work become substantially
different from that depicted in the Project Schedule, independently of and prior to the next monthly update, the Contractor will submit a revised Baseline Construction Schedule, with a list and explanation of each change made to the schedule. The Revised Construction Schedule will be submitted per the submittal requirements of section 2-5.3 and per the schedule review and
acceptance requirements of section 6-1, including but not limited to the acceptance and payment provisions.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 63 of 299 Pages
Add the following section: 6-I. 7 Final Schedule Update. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a final schedule update
when one hundred percent of the construction work is completed. The Contractor’s Final Schedule Update must accurately represent the actual dates for all activities. The final schedule update shall be prepared and reviewed per sections 6-1.3 Preparation of Schedule Updates and Revisions and
6-l. 4 Engineer’s Review of Updated Construction Schedule. Acceptance of the final schedule
update is required for completion of the project and release of any and all funds retained per section
9-3.2.
Add the following section: 64.6 Measurement and Payment. Construction Schedule will be paid for at the stipulated lump
sum price of Ten Thousand dollars ($10,000). The stipulated lump sum price paid for Construction
Schedule shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials including, but not iimited
to, the computer hardware and software, tools, equipment, and incidentals; and for doing all the work involved in attending meetings, preparing, furnishing, updating, revising the tabular, bar and flow chart Construction Schedules and narrative reports required by these special provisions and as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer’s determination that each and any construction schedule proposed by the Contractor complies with the requirements of these special provisions shall be precedent to each and any payment for the Construction Schedule. Payments for Construction Schedule will be made as per sections 6-l .8.1 through 6-l .8.3.
Add the following section:
6-1.6.1 Initial Payment. Three Thousand dollars ($3,000) of the stipulated lump sum bid for the Construction Schedule will be made when the Engineer has accepted a Construction Schedule for
this project
Add the following section: 6-l .6.2 Monthly Updated Construction Schedule Payments. Monthly Updated Construction Schedule Payments of fourteen hundred dollars ($1400) will be made subsequent to the initial payment for the Construction Schedule for each monthly Construction Schedule, updated as required herein, that the Engineer has accepted as sufficient within the month that the monthly progress payment pertains. No payment shall be made, nor shall any payment accrue, for any monthly updated construction schedule that is not marked “Accepted” by the Engineer on or before the twentieth working day of the month such monthly updated construction schedule is due per section 6-l .3 Preparation of Schedule Updates and Revisions. The sum of the amounts paid for Construction Schedule during the initial and subsequent payment periods, or extensions to the _ contract, shall not exceed the stipulated lump sum price for Construction Schedule.
Add the following section: 64.1 Measurement And Payment Of Construction Schedule. The Contractor’s preparation, revision and maintenance of the Construction Schedule are incidental to the work and no separate payment will be made therefor.
6-2 PROSECUTION OF WORK.
Add the following section: 6-2.1 Order of Work. The work to be done shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials, and performing all operations necessary to complete the Project Work as shown on the Project Plans and as specified in the Specifications.
Add the following section:
6-2.3 Project Meetings. The Engineer will establish the time and location of bi-weekly Project Meetings. Each Project Meeting shall be attended by the Contractor’s Representative. The Project Representative shall be the individual determined under section 7-6, “The Contractor’s Representative”, SSPWC. No separate payment for these meetings will be made.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 64 of 299 Pages
6-6 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME.
6-6.4 Written Notice and Report. Modify as follows: The Contractor shall provide written notice
to the Engineer within two hours of the beginning of any period that the Contractor has placed any
workers or equipment on standby for any reason that the Contractor has determined to be caused
by the Agency or by any organization that the Agency may otherwise be obligated by. The
Contractor shall provide continuing daily written notice to the Engineer, each working day, throughout the duration of such period of delay. The initial and continuing written notices shall include the classification of each workman and supervisor and the make and model of each piece of equipment placed on standby, the cumulative duration of the standby, the Contractor’s opinion of the cause of the delay and a cogent explanation of why the Contractor could not avoid the delay by
reasonable means. Should the Contractor fail to provide the notice(s) required by this section the
Contractor agrees that no delay has occurred and that it will not submit any claim(s) therefor.
,6-7 TIME OF COMPLETION. Add the following: The Contractor shall diligently prosecute the work to completion within 120 working days after the starting date specified in the Notice to Proceed.
6-7.2 Working Day. Add the following: Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, the hours of work shall be between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. on Mondays through Fridays, excluding Agency holidays. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer if the Contractor desires to work outside said hours or at any time during weekends and/or holidays. This written permission must be obtained at least 48 hours prior to such work The Engineer may approve work outside the hours and/or days stated herein when, in his/her sole opinion, such work conducted by the Contractor is beneficial to the best interests of the Agency. The Contractor shall pay the inspection costs of such work.
6-8 COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE. Add the following: All work shall be warranted for one
(1) year after recordation of a “Notice of Completion” and any faulty work or materials discovered
during the warranty period shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor, at its expense. Twenty-five percent of the faithful performance bond shall be retained as a warranty bond for the
one year warranty period.
6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. Modify the last sentence of the first paragraph and the first sentence of the second paragraph and add the following: For each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time specified for completion of Work, as adjusted in accordance with 6-6, the Contractor shall pay the Agency, or have withheld monies due it, the sum of Thousand Dollars ($1000).
Execution of the Contract shall constitute agreement by the Agency and Contractor that $1000 per day is the minimum value of costs and actual damages caused by the Contractor to complete the
Work within the allotted time. Any progress payments made after the specified completion date shall
not constitute a waiver of this paragraph or of any damages.
SECTION 7 -- RESPONSIBILITIES of the CONTRACTOR
7-3 LIABILITY INSURANCE. Add the following: All insurance is to be placed with insurers that have a rating in Best’s Key Rating Guide of at least A-:V and are admitted and authorized to
conduct business in the state of California and are listed in the official publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California.
7-4 WORKERS’ COMPENSATION INSURANCE. Add the following: All insurance is to be placed
with insurers that are admitted and authorized to conduct business in the state of California and are listed in the official publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California. Policies issued by the State Compensation Fund meet the requirement for workers’ compensation insurance.
?a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 65 of 299 Pages
7-5 PERMITS. Modify the first sentence to read: Except as specified herein the agency will obtain,
at no cost to the Contractor, all encroachment, right-of-way, grading, and building permits necessary to perform work for this contract on Agency property, in streets, highways (except State highway
right-of-way), railways or other rights-of-way. Contractor shall not begin work until all permits incidental to the work are obtained. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits for the disposal of all materials removed from the project. The cost of said permit(s) shall be included in the price bid for the appropriate bid item and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor.
7-7 COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK.
Add the following section: 7-7.1 Coordinatidn. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with all the utility companies during the relocation or construction of their lines. The Contractor may be granted a time extension if, in the opinion .of the Engineer, a delay is caused by the utility company. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for any such delay.
7-6 PROJECT SITE MAINTENANCE.
7-8.1 Cleanup and Dust Control. Add the following: Cleanup and dust control required herein
shall also be executed on weekends and other non-working days when needed to preserve the
health safety or welfare of the public. The Contractor shall conduct effective cleanup and dust
control throughout the duration of the Contract. The Engineer may require increased levels of
cleanup and dust control that, in his/her sole discretion, are necessary to preserve the health, safety
and welfare of the public. Cleanup and dust control shall be considered incidental to the items of work that they are associated with and no additional payment will be made therafor.
7-8.5 Temporary Light, Power and Water. Add the following: The Contractor shall obtain a construction meter for water used for the construction, plant establishment, maintenance, cleanup,
testing and all other work requiring water related to this contract. The Contractor shall contact the
appropriate water agency for requirements.
The Contractor shall pay all costs of temporary light, power and water including hookup, service,
meter and any, and all, other charges, deposits and/or fees therefor. Said costs shall be
considered incidental to the items of work that they are associated with and no additional payment
will be made therefor.
Add the following section: 7-8.8 Noise Control. All internal combustion engines used in the construction shall be equipped with mufflers in good repair when in use on the project with special attention to the City Noise Control Ordinance, Carlsbad Municipal Code Chapter 8.48.
7-10 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY.
7-l 0.3 Street Closures, Detours, Barricades. Add the following: Traffic controls shall be in accordance with the plans, Chapter 5 of the California Department of Transportation “Manual of Traffic Controls,” 1996 edition and these Special Provisions. If any component in the traffic control
system is displaced, or ceases to operate or function as specified, from any cause, during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall immediately repair said component to its original condition or replace said component and shall restore the component to its original location. In the event that the Contractor fails to install and/or maintain barricades or such other traffic signs, markings, delineation or devices as may be required herein, the Engineer may, at his/her sole option, install the traffic signs, markings, delineation or devices and charge the Contractor twenty dollars ($20.00) per day per traffic sign or device, or the actual cost of providing such traffic control facility, whichever is the greater.
‘3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 66 of 299 Pages
Add the following section: 7-10.3.1 Construction Area Signs. Warning and advisory signs, lights and devices installed or placed to provide traffic control, direction and/or warning shall be furnished, installed, maintained
and removed by the Contractor when no longer required. Care shall be used in performing excavation for signs in order to protect underground facilities. Warning and advisory signs that
remain in place overnight shall be stationary mounted signs. Stationary signs that warn of
non-existent conditions shall be removed from the travelled way or shielded from the view of the
travelling public during such periods that their message does not pertain to existing conditions. All excavation required to install stationary construction area signs shall be performed by hand methods without the use of power equipment. Warning and advisory signs that are used only during working hours may be portable signs. Portable signs shall be removed from the travelled way and shielded from the view of the travelling public during non-working hours.
During the hours of darkness, as defined in Division I, Section 280, of the California Vehicle Code, portable signs shall be illuminated or, at the option of the Contractor, shall be in conformance with the provisions in Section 12-3.068, “Portable Signs”, of the CALTRANS Standard Specifications; or Reflexite vinyl microprism reflective sheeting signs; or 3M high intensity reflectorized sheeting on aluminum substrate signs of Seibulite Brand Ultralite Grade Series, encapsulated lens retroreflective
sheeting signs; or equal.
Stationary mounted signs used for traffic control during construction of the Work shall be installed on break-away sign posts as shown on SDRS drawing M-45 or on wood posts in the same manner shown on CALTRANS Standard Plans RS 1, RS 2, RS 3 and RS 4 for installation of roadside signs, except as follows: (a) Back braces and blocks for sign panels will not be required. (b) The height to the bottom of the sign panel above the edge of traveled way shall be at least 2.1 m. (c) Construction area sign posts may be installed on above ground temporary platform. sign supports as approved by the Engineer, or the signs may be installed on existing lighting standards
or other supports as approved by the Engineer.
(d) When construction area signs are installed on existing lighting standards, holes shall not be
made in the standards to support the sign. (e) The post embedment shall be 0.8-m if post holes are backfilled around the posts with 500-C-2500 concrete. (f) When break-away sign posts (SDRS M-45) are used one post shall be provided for each 0.48
square meters of sign area.
For wood posts post size and number of posts shall be as shown on CALTRANS Standard Plan RS
2. Lumber for wood posts shall be as for sight posts.
Sign panels for stationary mounted signs shall conform to the requirements of Section 206-7, “Reflective Sheeting Aluminum Signs”, and the following: (a) All rectangular sheet aluminum signs over 1375 mm measured along the horizontal axis, and all diamond-shaped sheet aluminum signs 1500 mm and larger shall be framed unless otherwise
specified.
(b) Frames shall be constructed in accordance with “Framing Details for Sheet Aluminum Signs,”
Sheets 1 through 4 and Table 1 on Sheet 5, as published by CALTRANS. (c) Sign panel fastening hardware shall be commercial quality.
Each portable sign shall consist of a base, standard or framework and a sign panel. The units shall
be capable of being delivered to the site of use and placed in immediate operation. Sign panels for portable signs shall conform to the requirements of sign panels for stationary mounted signs in 206-7, “Reflective Sheeting Aluminum Signs”, or shall be Type IV reflective sheeting, cotton drill fabric, flexible industrial nylon fabric, or other approved fabric. Fabric signs shall not be used during
‘r# l/06/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 67 of 299 Pages
the hours of darkness. Size, wlor, and legend requirements for portable signs shall be as described for stationary mounted sign panels in Section 206-7, “Reflective Sheeting Aluminum
Signs”. The height to the bottom of the sign panel above the edge of traveled way shall be at least
0.3 m. All parts of the sign standard or framework shall be finished with 2 applications of an orange 0
enamel which will match the color of the sign panel background. Testing of paint will not be required. If portable signs are displaced or overturned, from any cause, during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall immediately replace the signs in their original locations.
Add the following section: 7-10.3.2 Maintaining Traffic. Attention is directed to Sections 7-10 SSPWC “Public Convenience and Safety.” Nothing in these Special Provisions shall be construed as relieving the Contractor from its responsibility as provided in said Section 7-10. If illuminated traffic wnes rather than post-type delineators are used during the hours of darkness, they shall be affixed or covered with reflective wne sleeves as specified in CALTRANS “Standard Specifications”, except the sleeves shall be seven (7) inches long.
The Contractor’s personnel shall not work closer than six (6) feet, nor operate equipment within two
(2) feet from any traffic lane occupied by traffic. For equipment the two (2) feet shall be measured from the closest approach of any part of the equipment as it is operated and/or maneuvered in performing the work. This requirement may be waived when the Engineer has given written authorization to the reduction in clearance that is specific to the time, duration and location of such waiver or for the work of installing, maintaining and removing traffic control devices. As a condition
of such waiver the Engineer may require the Contractor to detour traffic, adjust the width of, or
realign the adjacent traffic lane, close the adjacent traffic lane or provide barriers.
Personal vehicles of the Contractor’s employees shall not be parked within the traveled way, including any section closed to public traffic. Whenever vehicles or equipment are parked on the shoulder within six (6) feet of a traffic lane, the shoulder area shall be closed with fluorescent traffic wnes or portable delineators placed on a taper in advance of the parked vehicles or equipment and along the edge of the pavement at 25-foot intervals to a point not less than 25 feet past the last vehicle or piece of equipment. A minimum of nine (9) wnes or portable delineators shall be used for the taper. A C23 (Road Work Ahead) or C24 (Shoulder Work Ahead) sign shall be mounted on
a telescoping flag tree with flags. The flag tree shall be placed where directed by the Engineer. All construction traffic control devices shall be maintained in good order and according to the plan throughout the duration of work. During the entire construction, a minimum of two paved traffic lanes, not less than twelve (12) feet wide, shall be open for use by public traffic in each direction of travel.
Add the following section:
7-10.4.4 Safety and Protection of Workers and Public. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees on the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions
of Federal, State and Municipal safety laws and building codes to prevent ,accidents or injury to
persons on, about, or adjacent to the premises where the work is being performed. ‘The Contractor
shall erect and properly maintain at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the
work, all necessary safeguards for the protection of workers and public, and shall use danger signs warning against hazards created by such features of construction as protruding nails, hoists, well holes, and falling materials.
7-13 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED. Add the following: Municipal ordinances that affect this work include Chapter 11.06. Excavation and Grading. If this notice specifies locations or possible materials, such as borrow pits or gravel beds, for use in the proposed construction project which would be subject to Section 1601 or Section 1603 of the Fish and Game Code, the conditions established pursuant to Section 1601 et seq. of the Fish and Game Code shall become conditions of the contract.
I/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 68 of 299 Pages
SECTION 9 -- MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT a 9-3 PAYMENT.
9-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. Modify the second paragraph as follows: Each month, the
Engineer will make an approximate measurement of the work performed to the closure date as
basis for making monthly progress payments. The estimated value will be based on contract unit
prices, completed change order work and as provided for in Section 9-2 of the Standard Specifications (SSPWC). Progress payments shall be made no later than thirty (30) calendar days
after the closure date. Five (5) working days following the closure date, the Engineer shall complete the detailed progress pay estimate and submit it to the Contractor for his information. Should the Contractor assert that additional payment is due, the Contractor shall within ten (10)
days of receipt of the progress estimate, submit a supplemental payment request to the Engineer
with adequate justification supporting the amount of supplemental payment request. Upon receipt of the supplemental payment request, the Engineer shall, as soon as practicable after receipt, determine whether the supplemental payment request is a proper payment request. If the Engineer determines that the supplemental payment request is not proper, then the request shall be returned to the Contractor as soon as practicable, but not later than seven (7) days after receipt. The returned request shall be accompanied by a document setting forth in writing the reasons why the supplemental payment request was not proper. In conformance with Public Contract Code Section 20104.50, the City shall make payments within thirty (30) days after receipt of an undisputed and property submitted supplemental payment request from the Contractor. If payment of the undisputed supplemental payment request is not made within thirty (30) days after receipt by
the Engineer, then the City shall pay interest to the Contractor equivalent to the legal rate set forth in subdivision (a) of Section 685.010 of the Code of Civil Procedure.
9-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. Modify the third paragraph as follows: The Agency shall retain 10 percent of such estimated value of the work done and 10 percent of the value of materials so estimated to have been furnished and delivered and unused or furnished and stored as aforesaid
as part security for the fulfillment of the contract by the Contractor, except that at any time after
20 percent of the work has been completed, if the Engineer finds that satisfactory progress is being
made, the Agency may reduce the total amount being retained from payment pursuant to the above requirements to 5 percent of the total estimated value of said work and materials and may also reduce the amount retained from any of the remaining partial payments to 5 percent of the estimated value of such work and materials. In addition, on any partial payment made after 95 percent of the work has been completed, the Agency may reduce the amount withheld from
payment pursuant to the requirements of this Section to such lesser amounts as the Engineer determines is adequate security for the fulfillment of the balance of the work and other
requirements of the contract, but in no event will said amount be reduced to less than 125 percent of the estimated value of the work yet to be completed as determined by the Engineer. Such reduction will only be made upon the written request of the Contractor and shall be approved in writing by the surety on the Performance Bond and by the surety on the Payment Bond. The approval of the surety shall be submitted to the Engineer; the signature of the person executing the approval for the surety shall be property acknowledged and the power of attorney authorizing him to give such consent must either accompany the document or be on file with the Agency.
9-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. Add paragraph 6 et seq. as follows: After final inspection, the Engineer will make a Final Payment Estimate and process a corresponding payment. This estimate will be in writing and shall be for the total amount owed the Contractor as determined by the Engineer and shall be itemized by the contract bid item and change order item with quantities and payment amounts and shall show all deductions made or to be made for prior payments and amounts to be deducted under provisions of the contract. All prior estimates and progress payments shall be subiect to correction in the Final Pavment Estimate.
1 to8198 Contract No. 3348 Page 69 of 299 Pages
The Contractor shall have 30 calendar days from receipt of the Final Payment Estimate to make
written statement disputing any bid item or change order item quantity or payment amount. The
Contractor shall provide all documentation at the time of submitting the statement supporting its position. Should the Contractor fail to submit the statement and supporting documentation within the time specified, the Contractor acknowledges that full and final payment has been made for all
contract bid items and change order items.
If the Contractor submits a written statement with documentation in the aforementioned time, the Engineer will review the disputed item within 30 calendar days and make any appropriate adjustments on the Final Payment. Remaining disputed quantities or amounts not approved by the Engineer will be subject to resolution as specified in subsection 3-5, Disputed Work.
The claims filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of said claims. The Engineer will consider and determine the Contractors claims and it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying the claims.
9-3.2.1 Payment for Claims. Add the following: Written statement shall be submitted to the
Agency within 30 calendar days of receipt of Final Payment for all claims for the entire project. No
claim will be considered that was not included in this written statement, nor will any claim be allowed for which written notice or protest is required under any provision of this contract including sections 3-4 Changed Conditions, 3-5 Disputed Work, 6-6.3 Payment for Delays to Contractor, 6-6.4 Written Notice and Report, or 6-7.3 Contract Time Accounting, unless the Contractor has complied with notice or protest requirements.
The claims filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of said claims. The Engineer will consider and determine the Contractor’s claims and it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying the claims.
Payment for claims shall be processed within 30 calendar days of receipt of the written statement or
further information, whichever is longer, for those claims approved by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall proceed with informal dispute resolution under subsection 3-5, Disputed Work, for those claims
remaining in dispute.
Add the following section:
g-3.3.1 Delivered Materials. The cost of materials and equipment delivered but not incorporated
into the work will not be included in the progress estimate.
Add the following section:
9-3.4.1 Mobilization and Preparatory Work. Payment for mobilization and preparatory Work will be made at the stipulated lump-sum price bid therefor in the bid schedule. The Contract lump-sum price paid for mobilization shall not exceed Fifteen Thousand dollars ($15,000), and includes full
compensation for furnishing all insurance, bonds, licenses, labor, materials, utilities, tools, equipment and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in mobilization and preparatory work and operations, including, but not limited to, those necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidental to preparing to conduct work on and off the project site and other offsite facilities necessary for work on the project; for all other facilities, sureties, work and operations which must be performed or costs incurred prior to beginning work on various contract
‘3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 70 of 299 Pages
items on or off the project site, excepting those specifically paid for under separate sections of these
specifications. The Contractor hereby agrees that the stipulated lump sum amount is sufficient for
Mobilization and Preparatory Work, as described in this section, and that the Contractor shall have
no right to additional compensation for Mobilization and Preparatory Work.
Progress payments for Mobilization and Preparatory Work will be made as follows:
For the first progress payment (after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed), forty percent (40%) of
the amount bid for Mobilization And Preparatory Work will be allowed. For the second progress payment; an additional sixty percent (60%) of the amount bid for mobilization and preparatory work will be allowed therefor.
‘3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 71 of 299 Pages
SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS
TO
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS
CONSTRUCTION
PART 2, CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
Add the following section:
207-25 UNDERGROUND UTILITY MARKING TAPE.
Add the following section:
20795.1 Detectable Underground Utility Marking Tape: Detectable Underground Utility
Marking Tape shall have a minimum 0.13 mm (O.OOS) overall thickness, with no less than a 35
gauge (AWG), 0.14 mm aluminum foil core. The foil must be visible from both sides. The layers shall be laminated together with the extrusion lamination process, not adhesives. No inks or printing
shall extend to the edges of the tape. All printing shall be encased to avoid ink rub-off. Detectable
Underground Utility Marking Tape shall conform to the properties listed in Tables 207-25(A) and
207-25 (B).
TABLE 207125.1 (A)
DETECTABLE UNDE RGROUND UTiLiTY MbkKiNG i TAPE PROPERTIES
Property Method Value
Thickness ASTM D2103 0114 mm (0.0056”)
Tensile strength AS TM D882 4500g/cm (25 Ibs/inch) (5,500 PSI)
Elongation AS TM D8 ‘82-88 *50 percent at break
1578 ~50 dynes/square centimeter
._.- . .._ _ .
S I iv . .lanufacturing specifications Heat-set Mylex
Message repeat I Manufacturing specifications Every 500 mm(20”)
Foil 1 Manufacturina sbecifications 1 Dead soft/annealed
Top layer
Bottom layer
Manufacturing specifications
Manufacturing specifications
Virgin PET
Virgin LI
J@ l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 72 of 299 Pages
DETECTABLE UNDERGI
TABLE 207-25.1(B)
ROUND UTILITY MARKING TAPE COLORS
Coior Utility Marked
Red Electric power, distribution, transmission, and municipal electric systems.
Yellow Gas and oil distribution and transmission, dangerous materials, product and steam.
Orange Telephone and telegraph systems, police and fire communications, and cable television.
Blu le I Water svstems.
1..
.I
Green
Brown
Purple
Sanitary and storm sewer systems, nonpotable.
Force mains.
Reclaimed water lines.
Add the following section: _.
207-25.2 Materials Approvals. Detectable Underground Utility Marking Tape shall meet the
requirements of each of the following agency/association publications.
A. Department of Transportation, Materials Transportation Bureau, Office of Pipeline Safety.
USAS code for pressure piping B31.8, paragraph 192.321 (e). B. National Transportation Safety Board, Washington, DC, Special Study Prevention of
Damage to Pipelines. Adopted June 7, 1974. Report NTSB-PSS-73-l.
C. American Petroleum Institute (API). Recommended practice for marking buried liquid petroleum pipelines - APR RP 1109.
D. General Services Administration, Washington, DC, Public Buildings Service Guide
Specification for Mechanical and Electrical Equipment - PBS 4-1501, Amendment 2, Page
501-14, Paragraph 18, Subparagraph 18.1, Clause 18.1.1. E. Rural Electrification Authority (REA), U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, .DC, ‘,
National Electrical Safety Code for Underground Construction for remote and immediate hazards.
SECTION 209 - ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
209 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS. Modify as follows: Section 209, “Lighting and Electrical ’
Systems”, herein, shall. replace Section 209, “Electrical Components”, of the SSPWC in all matters
pertaining to the specifications for measurement, payment, warranty, and materials and methods of
construction for ail elements of lighting. For electrical components provided and installed in systems
not including street lighting section 209 SSPWC is unmodified except as specified in sections other
than section 209, ‘Signals, Lighting and Electrical Systems”, herein. For section 209, “Lighting and
Electrical Systems”, both construction materials and construction methods have been combined into a single section.
2094 GENERAL
2094 .Ol Description. Electrical work shall consist of furnishing and installing, modifying or
lighting systems, electrical equipment in structures, provisions for future systems, or combinations
thereof, all as shown on the plans, and as specified in these special provisions.
2094.02 Regulations and Code. All electrical equipment shall conform to the standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), the Underwriters’ Laboratories inc. (UL), the
Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL), the National Electrical Testing Association, Inc. (NETA), or the Electronic industries Association (EIA), wherever applicable. In addition to the requirements of the
plans, these special ,provisions, all materials and workmanship shall conform to the requirements of
the National Electrical Code 1998 edition, hereinafter referred to as the Code; California Code of
Regulations, .Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 5, Electrical Safety Orders; Rules for Overhead
Electrical Line Construction, General Order No. 95 of the Public Utilities Commission; Standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM); American National Standards Institute
G l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 73 of 299 Pages
(ANSI); and any local ordinances which may apply. Wherever reference is made to any of the
standards mentioned above, the reference shall be construed to mean the code, order, or standard
that is in effect on the day the Notice to Contractors for the work is dated.
2094.03 Equipment List and Drawings. Unless otherwise pemtitted in writing by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall, within 15 days following award of the contract, submit to the Engineer for
review a list of equipment and materials which the Contractor proposes to install as specified in
Section 2-5.3, “Shop Drawings and Submittals.” The list shall be complete as to name of
manufacturer, size and identifying number of each item. The list shall be supplemented by such other data as may be required, including schematic wiring diagrams and scale drawings of cabinets
showing location and spacing of shelves, terminal blocks and equipment, including dimensioning. All of the above data shall be submitted, install as specified in Section 2-5.3, ‘Shop Drawings and
Submittals”, for review. Where electrical equipment is constructed as detailed on the plans, the
submission of detailed drawings and diagrams will not be required.
209-l 44 Warranties, Guaranties and lnstructlon Sheets. Manufacturers’ warranties and
guaranties furnished for materials used in the work and instruction sheets and parts lists supplied
with materials shall be delivered to the Engineer prior to acceptance of the project.
209-2 MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION
2099.01 Excavating and Backfilling. The excavations required for the installation of conduit,
foundations, and other appurtenances shall be performed in such a manner as to avoid any unnecessary damage to sidewalks, landscaping, and other improvements. The trenches shall not
be excavated wider than necessary for the proper installation of the electrical appurtenances and foundations. Excavation shall not be performed until immediately before installation of conduit and
other appurtenances. The material from the excavation shall be placed in a position that will not
cause damage or obstruction to vehicular and pedestrian traffic nor interfere with surface drainage.
Unless otherwise permitted in writing by the Engineer, all surplus excavated material shall be
removed and disposed of, within 48 hours, outside the park in accordance with the provisions in
Sections 7-8.1, “Cleanup and Dust Control”, 300-1.3, “Removal and Disposal of Materials” and 302-6, ‘Surplus Material”, depending on the origin and nature of the materials to be removed and
disposed.
The excavations shall be backfilled in conformance with the provisions in Sections 300-3.5,
. “Structure Backfill” or 306-1.3, ‘Backftll and Densification,” depending on the nature of the structure
or conduit that the excavation being backfilled accommodates. Excavations after backfilling shall be
kept well filled and maintained in a smooth and welldrained condition until permanent repairs are made. All excavations shall be filled, and sidewalks, pavement, and landscaping restored at each
area prior to excavating at any other area, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Excavations
in the street or highway shall be performed in such a manner that not more than one traffic lane is
restricted at any time, unless otheNvise approved by the Engineer.
209-2.02 Removing and Replacing Improvements. In addition to the requirements of sections
7-9, “Protection and Restoration of Existing Improvements” and 306-1.5, “Trench Resurfacing” Improvements such as sidewalks, curbs, gutters, portland cement concrete and asphalt concrete
pavement, underlying material, lawns and plants, and any other improvements removed, broken or
damaged by the Contractor’s operations, shall be replaced or reconstructed with the same kind of
material as found on the work or with materials of equal quality. The new work shall be left in a serviceable condition.
1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 74 of 299 Pages
Whenever a part of a square or slab of existing concrete sidewalk, curb, gutter, or driveway is
broken or damaged, the entire square, section or slab shall be removed and the concrete
reconstructed as above specified. The outline. of all areas to be removed in portland cement
concrete sidewalks and driveways and in pavements shall be cut to a minimum depth of 50 mm (2”)
with an abrasive type saw prior to removing the sidewalk, driveways and pavement material. Cuts
shall be neat and true along score lines, with no shatter outside the removal area.
2099.03 Foundations. Portland cement materials and construction methods shall conform to
Section 201, ‘Concrete, Mortar and Related concrete Materials,” for Materials and Section 303,
“Concrete and Masonry Construction,” for construction methods. Concrete foundations shall rest on
firm ground.
Reinforced cast-in-drilled-hole concrete pile foundations for lighting standards shall conform to the provisions in Section 205-3.3, “Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles,” except that material resulting from
drilling holes shall be disposed of as provided in Section 209-2.01, ‘Excavating and Backfilling.” The exposed portions of the foundation shall be formed to present a neat appearance. Forms shall
be true to line and grade. Tops of foundations for posts and standards, except special foundations,
shall be finished to curb or sidewalk grade or as directed by the Engineer. Forms shall be rigid and securely braced in place. Conduit ends and anchor bolts shall be placed in proper position and to
proper height, and shall be held in place by means of a template until the concrete sets.
Anchor bars or studs and nuts, except for Type 30 and Type 31 lighting standards, shall conform to
ASTM Designation: A 307. Headed anchor bolts for foundations shall confomf to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 307, Grade B with St supplementary requirements. At the option of the
Contractor, nonheaded anchor bolts for foundations shall conform either to the specifications of ‘,
ASTM Designation: A 307, Grade C or to the provisions in AASHTO Designation: M 314, Grade 36
4D
or 55 with Sl supplementary requirements. When nonheaded anchor bolts conforming to the
specifications of ASTM Designation: A 307, Grade C are furnished, the end of each fabricated
anchor bolt shall be either coded by end stamping as required in ASTM Designation: A 307 or the
end that projects from the concrete shall be permanently coded with a green color by the I
manufacturer. High strength anchor bolts, bars, or studs for Type 30 and Type 31 lighting
standards shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 325, A 325M or A 449 and shall comply with the
mechanical requirements of ASTM Designation: A 325 or A 325M after galvanizing. Nuts and
washers for high strength anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM Designations: A 563 or A 563M, and
F 476 or F 476M, respectively. In addition to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A 449, studs
shall be marked on either end as required for bolt heads. All steel parts shall be galvanized in i+
accordance with the provisions in Section 2103.6, “Galvanizing for Traffic Signal Facilities.” T
The upper threaded portion of all anchor bolts shall be provided with 2 nuts and 2 washers each.
Anchor bars or studs shall be provided with 3 nuts and washers each. Welding shall not be
performed on any portion of the body of high-strength anchor bolts, anchor bars, or studs.
Plumbing of the standards shall be accomplished by adjusting the leveling nuts before placing mortar or before the foundation is finished to final grade. Shims, or other similar devices shall not be used for plumbing or raking of posts, standards or pedestals.
Contract No. 3348 Page 75 of 299 Pages
Both forms and ground which will be in contact with the concrete shall be thoroughly moistened
before placing concrete. Forms shall not be removed until the concrete has thoroughly set.
Ordinary surface finish, as specified in Section 303-l .9.2, ‘Ordinary Surface Finish,” shall be applied
to exposed surfaces of concrete. Where obstructions prevent the construction of a planned
foundation, the Contractor shall construct an effective foundation as directed by the Engineer. The
foundations shown on the plans shall be extended if conditions require additional depth, and the
additional work, if ordered by the Engineer. will be paid for as extra work as provided in Section 3-2,
“Changes Initiated By The Agency.
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the plans, foundations not to be reused shall be removed.
When a foundation is shown on the plans to be abandoned, the top of foundation, anchor bolts, and
conduits shall be removed to a depth of not less than 1.0 m (3’) below surface of sidewalk or unimproved ground. The resulting hole shall be backfilled with material equivalent to the
surrounding material. Unless othen&e shown on the plans, all standards to be relocated shall be
provided with new foundations and anchor bolts of the proper type and size. Posts, poles,
standards, pedestals, and cabinets shall not be erected until the foundation has set at least 7 days,
and shall be plumbed or raked, as directed by the Engineer. In unpaved areas, a 1 .O m (3’) square,
100 mm (4’) thick or of the size shown on the plans, whichever is the larger, raised pad of portland cement concrete shall be placed in front of each controller cabinet.
209-2.05 Conduit. All conductors shall be run in conduit, except overhead and temporary
installations, and where conductors are run inside poles. Conduit shall be of the sizes shown on the
plans and as specified in this Section 2092.05. In addition, the Contractor may, as an option at the
Contractor’s expense, use conduit of a larger size than that shown or specified, provided the larger size is used for the entire length of the run from outlet to outlet. Reducing couplings will not be permitted. New conduit shall not pass through foundations for standards.
209-2.05A Material. Conduit and conduit fittings shall be UL or ETL listed and shall conform to
the following: Type 1. Hot-dip galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to the requirements in UL
Publication UL 6 for Rigid Metallic Conduit. The zinc coating will be tested in accordance with
ASTM Designation: A 239. 2) Type 2. Hot-dip galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to Type 1 above and coated with
polyvinyl chloride or polyethylene. The exterior thermoplastic coating shall have a minimum
thickness of 0.9 mm (35 mils). 3) Type 3. Rigid nonmetallic conduit conforming to the requirements in the UL Standard for Rigid
Non-Metallic Conduit (Publication UL 651). Type 3 conduit shalt be installed at all underground
locations.
4) Type 4. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall consist of conduit with a liquid tight, non-metallic,
sunlight-resistant jacket over an inner flexible metal core. Type 4 conduit shall be UL listed for use
as the grounding conductor. 5) Type 5. Intermediate steel conduit (IMC) conforming to the requirements in UL Publication 1242
for Intermediate Metallic Conduit. Type 5 conduit shall only be used when specified.
Bonding bushings to be installed on metal conduit shall be insulated and shall be the galvanized or
zinc alloy type. All conduit installed underground shall be Type 3, rigid non-metallic conduit. Type 3
conduit shall be installed at underground locations only.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 78 of 299 Pages
209-2.058 Use. Exposed conduit installed on a painted structure shall be painted the same color
as the structure. Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum metric trade size of conduit:
1) From an electrolier to the adjacent pull box shall be Size 41 (1’12” dia). 2) From a pedestrian push button post to the adjacent pull box shall be Size 27 (1” dia).
3) From a signal standard to the adjacent pull box shall be Size 53 (Tdia). 4) From a controller cabinet to the adjacent pull box shall be Size 78 (3” dia).
5) For detector runs shall be Size 41 (1’1: dia). 6) Not otherwise specified shall be Size 41 (I’/; dia).
209-2.0s Installation. Conduit shall be installed in conformance with the codes and regulations
listed in Section 209-1.02, ‘Regulations and Code.” Conduit runs shown on the plans may be
changed to avoid underground obstructions with written approval by the Engineer. The ends of al
conduits, whether shop or field cut, shaft be reamed to remove burrs and rough edges. Cuts shall
be made square and true. Slip joints or running threads will not be permitted for coupling conduit. When a standard coupling cannot be used for coupling metal type conduit, a UL or ETL listed
threaded union coupling shall be used. All couplings for metal type conduit shall be tightened to
provide a good electrical wnnection throughout the entire length of the conduit run. Conduit shall be
tightened into couplings or fittings using strap wrenches or approved groove joint pliers. Conduit
threads and damaged surfaces on metal conduit shall be painted with 2 applications of approved
unthinned zinc-rich primer (organic vehicle type) conforming to tie requirements in Section 210-3.6,
“Galvanizing for Traffic Signal Facilities.” Aerosol cans shall not be used.
The ends of conduit shall be threaded and shall be capped with standard pipe caps or ‘pennies” to protect the raceway against dirt and concrete until wiring is started. When caps or ‘pennies” are
removed, the ends of conduit and conduit fittings shall be provided with conduit bushings. Conduit
terminating in pull boxes or foundations shall be provided with insulated bonding bushings
Conduit bends, except factory bends, shall have a radius of not less than 6 times the inside diameter of the conduit. Where factory bends are not used, conduit shall be bent, without crimping
or flattening, using the longest radius practicable.
A No. 12 copper pull wire or a pull rope shall be installed in all conduits which are to receive future
conductors. The puil rope shall be nylon of polypropylene with a minimum tensile strength of
2225 N (500 pounds). At least 0.6 m (2’) of pull wire or rope shall be doubled back into the conduit
at each termination. Existing underground conduit to be incorporated into a new system shall be
cleaned with a mandret or cylindrical wire brush and blown out with compressed air.
Conduit shall be laid to a depth of not tess than 460 mm (18”) below grade in portland cement
concrete sidewalk areas and curbed paved median areas, and not less than 750 mm (30”) below
finished grade in all other areas. Conduit may be laid on top of the existing pavement within new curbed medians being constructed on top of the existing pavement. Conduit couplings shall be
located at least 150 mm (6“) from face of foundation.
Unless “Trenching In Pavement Method” is specifically allowed or required on the plans or in these special provisions, conduit shall be placed under existing pavement by jacking or drilling methods.
Pavement shall not be disturbed without permission from the Engineer. In the event obstructions are encountered, upon approval of the Engineer, small holes may be cut in the pavement to locate or remove obstructions. Jacking or drilling pits shall be kept 0.6 m (2’) clear of the edge of any type
of pavement wherever possible. Excessive use of water, such that pavement might be undermined
or subgrade softened, will not be permitted. Conduit to be placed as part of the completed work shall not be used for drilling or jacking. When Trenching in Pavement Method” is specifically
allowed or required on the plans or in these special provisions, installation of conduit under pave-
ment shall wnforrn to the following: .~
1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 77 of 299 Pages
1) Conduit shall be placed under existing pavement in a trench approximately 50 mm (2”) wider
than the outside diameter of the conduit to be installed.
2) Trench shall not exceed 150 mm (6=) in width. 3) Trench depth shall not exceed 300 mm (12’) or conduit metric trade size plus 250 mm (lo”),
whichever is greater, except that at pull boxes the trench may be hand dug to required depth. 4) The top of the installed conduit shall be a minimum of 230 mm (9“) below finished grade. In
areas where additional pavement is to be placed, trenching installation shall be completed prior t:
placing the final pavement layer. 5) The outline of all areas of pavement to be removed shall be cut to a minimum depth of 75 mm
(3“) with a rock cutting excavator specifically designed for this purpose.
6) Cuts shall be neat and true with no shatter outside the removal area.
7) The conduit shall be placed in the bottom of the trench and the trench shall be backfilfed with
trench backfill slurry concrete.
8) Concrete backfill shall be placed to the pavement surface except, when the trench is in asphalt
concrete pavement and additional pavement is not being placed, the top 30 mm (0.10’) of the trench
shafl be backfilled with asphalt concrete produced from commercial quality paving asphalt and
aggregates.
Prior to spreading asphalt concrete, paint binder (tack coat) shall be applied as specified in Section
302-5.4, ‘Tack Coat.” Spreading and wmpacting of asphalt concrete shall be performed by any
method which will produce an asphalt concrete surfacing of uniform smoothness, texture, and
density.
All excavated areas in the pavement shall be backfilled, except for the top 30 mm (O.lO’), by the end
of each work period. The top 30 mm (0.10’) shall be placed within 3 calendar days after trenching.
Conduit to be placed beneath ratlroad tracks shall wmply with the foflowing: 1) The conduit shall be Size 41 (l’/,l dia.) minimum, and shall be placed to a minimum depth of 900
mm (3’) below bottom of tie. The near side of each conduit jacking pit shall be constructed not less
than 4 m (12’) from the centerline of track. When the jacking pit is to be left overnight, it shall be covered with substantial planking. 2) Conduit terminating in pedestals shall extend not more than 50 mm (2’) vertically above the
foundation and shall be sloped towards the handhole opening. 3) Conduit entering through the side of non-metallic pull boxes shall terminate not more than 50 mm
(2“) inside the box wall and not less than 50 mm (r) above the bottom, and shall be sloped toward
top of box to facilitate pulling of conductors. Conduit entering through the bottom of a pull box shall
terminate 50 mm (Z) above the bottom and shall be located near the end wafls to leave the major
portion of the box clear.
4) At all outlets, conduits shall enter from the direction of the run.
Conduit runs from underground, including under sidewalks, which are adjacent to .gasoline service
stations or other installations of underground gasoline or diesel storage, piping, or pumps, and
which lead to a controller cabinet, circuit breaker panel, service, or any enclosure where an arc may
occur during normal operations, shall be seated if the conduit is within the limits specified in the
National Electrical Code for Cfass 1, Diision 1, Hazardous Locations. Type 1 or Type 2 conduit shall be used for these runs.
Conduit for future use in structures shalt be threaded and capped. Conduit leading to soffit, wall or
other lights or fixtures below the grade of the pull box shall be sealed by means of a sealing ftiing
and sealing compound, except that sealing fitting and sealing wmpound will not be required where
conduit terminates in a No. 9 or No. 9A pull box.
Conduits in or on walls or bridge superstructures shall be supported as shown on the plans, in
conformance with the following:
1) Steel hangers, steel brackets, and other fittings shall conform to the materials and wnsrtruction
methods provisions in Sections 206-l‘ “Structural Steel, Rivets, Bolts, pins and Anchor Bolts”, for
materials and 304-1, *Structural Steel” for cons-n methods.
rnntrae Nn !2RAR Pnnn 7R flf 7QQ Pnrws
2) Cast-in-place metal inserts for hangers or brackets shall be capable of developing 135 Mpa (20,000 pounds per square inch) in tension on the net section of the bolt or threaded rod.
3) Precast concrete conduit cradles shall conform to the dimensions shown on the plans and shall
be constructed of commercial quality concrete containing not less than 350 kg of portiand cement per cubic meter (564 Ibs. per cubic yard) and commercial quality welded wire fabric. The cradles
shall be moist cured for not less than 3 days.
4) Precast concrete cradles shall be bonded to the structure with epoxy adhesive conforming to the
provisions in Section 214-6.2.2, ‘Standard Set Epoxy Adhesive for Pavement Markers,” or Section 214-6.2.1, ‘Rapid Set Epoxy Adhesive for Pavement Markers” or cohforming to State of California
specification 8040-21M-08, Type I when cure temperatures are above 15°C (59°F) or to State of
California specification 8040-2lM-08, Type I when cure temperatures are below 15°C (59°F).
5) Openings for conduits through bridge superstructure concrete shall be formed or may consist of
pipe sleeves. 6) Where conduits pass through the abutment concrete, the conduits shall be wrapped with 2 layers
of asphalt-felt building paper, securely taped or wired in place.
7) The space around conduits through bridge abutment walls shall be filled with portland cement
mortar conforming to the provisions in Sectiin 201-5, “Cement Mortar,” except that the proportion of
cement to sand shall be one to 3.
8) When the bridge superstructure is to be prestressed, the space around conduits through
abutments shall not be filled until the prestressing has been completed.
9) Conduit which is surface mounted shall be run straight and true, horizontal or vertical on the walls
and parallel to walls on ceilings or other similar surfaces. Conduit shall be supported at intervals of
not more than 1.5 m (5’). and closer where necessary to prevent vibration or unsightly deflection.
The supports shall consist of galvanized malleable iron conduit damps and clamp backs secured with expansion anchorage devices conforming to the requirements for concrete anchorage devices
in Sections 206-l. ‘Structural Steel, Rivets, Bolts, pins and Anchor Bolts”, for materials and 304-l) “Structural Steel” for construction methods. Threaded studs shall be galvanized and shall be of the
largest diameter that will pass through the mounting hole in conduit clamp.
Attention is directed to Section 209-2.10, ‘Bonding and Grounding.” Where pull boxes are plaod in
conduit runs, the conduit shall be fitted with threaded bushings and bonded. The location of ends of
all conduits in structures, or terminating at curbs, shall be marked by a ‘Y” at least 75 mm (3”) high
cut into the face of curb, gutter, or wall, directly above the conduit and above grade line.
209-2.05D Expansion Fittings. Expansion fittings shall be installed where the conduit crosses any expansion joint in the structure. Each expansion fitting for metal conduit shall be provided with
a copper bonding jumper having the ampacity required by the Code. Each expansion-deflection
fitting for expansion joints of 38 mm (1 i/Z“) movement rating shall be watertight and shall consist of a molded neoprene sleeve, a bonding jumper and 2 silicon bronze or zinc-plated iron hubs. Each
fitting shall permit a minimum of 19 mm (?,“) expansion and contraction and a minimum of 19 mm
(3/,‘) lateral deflection. Details of expansion-deflection fittings for joints of movement rating of more
than 38 mm (l’/,‘) shall be as shown on the plans and specified in these special provisions.
209-2.06 Pull Boxes. Pull boxes shall be installed at the locations shown on the plans or as
specified. The Contractor may, as an option, at the Contractor’s expense, use pull boxes of a larger standard size than that shown or specified.
209-2.06A Materials. Pull boxes, covers and extensions for installation in the ground or in
sidewalk areas shall be of the sizes and details shown on the plans and shall be precast of
reinforced portland cement concrete (PCC) or of non-PCC material. Non-PCC material shalt be fire
4B
resistant and shall not bum at a rate greater than 8 mm (0.3”) per minute per 2.5 mm (0.1’) of
thickness when tested in accordance with ASTM Designation: D 635. The non-PCC material shall
show no appreciable change in physical properties with exposure to the weather. Non-PCC
‘3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 79 of 299 Pages
material shalt be dense and free of voids or porosity, and shall be a gray or brown color. Top
dimensions of non-PCC pull boxes shall not exceed the bottom dimensions by more than 25 mm
(1”). Extensions for non-PCC pull boxes shail be of the same material as the pull boxes, and shall
be attached to the pull boxes in a manner that will maintain the minimum combined depths shown 0
on the plans. Non-PCC pull boxes shall be of sufficient rigidity that when a designated concentrated
force is applied perpendicularly to the midpoint of one of the long sides at the top while the opposite
long side is supported by a rigid surface, it shall be possible to remove the cover without the use of tools. The designated concentrated force shall be 650 N (150 tbs.) for a No. 3112 pull box and shall
be 450 N (100 ibs.) for a No. 5 or No. 6 pull box. When a vertical force of 6500 N (1,500 tbs.) is
applied, through a 13 mm (‘l/2’) x 75 mm (3’) x $50 mm (sl) steel plate, to a non-PCC cover in place
on a pull box, the cover shalt not fail and shall not deflect more than 6 mm (‘/,“). The steel plate
shall be centered on the cover with its longitudinal axis coinciding with the longitudinal axis of the
cover. Where a ballast or transformer or other device is to be placed in a non-metallic pull box, the
box shalt be provided with recesses for a hanger. Pull boxes and covers for installation in structures
shall be of the sizes and details shown on the plans. Each No. 7 ceiling pull box located near a flush soffit fixture and to be used to house the ballast for the fixture shall be provided with mounting
brackets for the ballast and any required capacitors.
Covers, except covers for ceiling pull boxes, shall be secured with 9 mm &“) bolts, cap screws, or
studs, and nuts which shall be of brass, stainless steel or other non-corroding metal material. Stainless steel hoiddown bolts, cap screws or studs, and nuts and washers shall have a chromium
content of not less than 18 percent and a nickel content of not less than 8 percent.
All ferrous metal parts shall be gaivanized in accordance with the provisions in Section 210-3.6,
“Galvanizing for Traffic Signal Faciiities.n
209.2.06B Cover Marking. Covers for pull boxes, except covers for ceiling pull boxes, shall be
marked as shown on the plans. Marking shall be dearly defined and uniform in depth and may be
placed parallel to either the long or short sides of the cover.
mm (1“) and 75 mm (3”) high.
Marking letters shall be between 25 Marking shall be applied to each steel or cast iron cover prior to
galvanizing by one of the following methods: (a) Cast iron strips, at least 6 mm (l/T) thick, with the letters raised a minimum of 1.5 mm (lltsn).
Strips shall be fastened to covers with 6 mm (I/,‘) flathead stainless steel machine bolts and nuts. Bolts shall be peened after tightening.
(b) Sheet steel strips at least 0.7 mm (22 ga.) with the letters raised a minimum of 1.5 mm (i/,,,y) above the surrounding surface of the strips. Strips shall be fastened to covers by spot welding, tack
welding or brazing, with 6 mm (‘/,“) stainless steel rivets, or with 6 mm (‘/,“) roundhead stainless steel machine bolts and nuts. Bolts shall be peened after tightening. (c) Bead welding the letters on the covers. The letters shall be raised at least 2 mm (3/,a).
20912.06C Installation and Use. Pull boxes shall be installed at the locations shown on the plans
and, in conduit runs exceeding 60 m(200’), shall be spaced at not over 60 m (200‘) intervals. The
Contractor may, at the Contractor’s expense, install additional pull boxes to facilkate the work. The
bottoms of pull boxes instalied in the ground or in sidewalk areas, shall be bedded in crushed rock
as shown on the plans and shall be grouted prior to the installation of conductors. The grout shall
be ,between 13 mm (i/Z’) and 25 mm (t’) thick and shall be sloped toward the drain hole. A layer of
roofing paper shall be placed between the grout and the crushed rock sump. A 25 mm (1”) drain hole shall be provided in the center of the pull box through the grout and the roofing paper. Where the sump of an existing pull box is disturbed by the Contractor’s operations, the sump shall be
reconstructed and, if the sump was grouted, the old grout shall be removed and new grout placed.
Contract No. 3348 Page 80 of 299 Pages
209-2.08 Conductors. Conductors shall be copper of the gage shown on the plans, unless
specified otherwise. Copper wire shall conform to the specifications of ASTM Designations: B 3
and B 8.
Wire sizes, other than conductors used in loop detector lead-in cable, shall be based on American
Wire Gage (AWG), except that conductor diameter shall be not less than 98 percent of the specified
AWG diameter. Conductors for branch circuits shall be sized to prevent a voltage drop exceeding 3
percent at the furthest connected load, while drawing the combination of all connected loads capable of simultaneous operation. The maximum voltage drop for both feeders and branch circuits
shall not exceed 5 percent at the furthest connected load, while drawing the combination of ail connected loads capable of simultaneous operation. Conductors used in loop detector lead-in cable
shall conform to the specifications of ASTM Designation: B 286. A Certificate of Compliance
conforming to the provisions in Section 4-1.5, ‘Certification,” shall be submitted by the manufacturer
with each type of cable to be used on a project.
209-2.08A Conductor Identffication. Ail single wnductors in cables, except detector lead-in
cables, shall have clear, distinctive and permanent markings on the outer surface throughout the
entire length showing the manufacturer’s name or trademark, insulation type letter designation, conductor size, voltage rating and the number of conductors if a cable. Conductor insulation shall
be of a solid wlor or of basic wiors with a permanent wlored stripe as detailed in the following table unless otherwise specified. Solid or basic wlors shall be homogeneous through the full depth of insulation. identification stripes shall be continuous over the entire length of the conductor. For
conductor sizes No. 2 and larger, the insulation may be black and the ends of the conductors shall
be taped with electrical insulating tape of the required wlor for a minimum of 500 mm (20”). All single conductors in cables shall be marked as shown in Table 2OQ-2.08A (A):
Contract No. 3348 Page 81 of 299 Pages
TABLE 209-2.08A (A)
CifCUit I Signal Phase or Function
Vehicle Signals (Note 4) %
$3 ....................................
:i
....................................
....................................
,7 ....................................
Pedestrian Signals
................................
................................
Mutttple Servtce
I or SM . . . . . . . . .
/Jngrounded-Line 1 @gnats)
Sign Lighftng
W- 61 Flashing Baacons
Lln~rounded-Ltne 2 iL&ttn&
Jngrounded-Line 1 . . . . . . . . . . Jngrounded-Line 2 . . . . . . . . . . ,Jngrounded between Flasher (Note 7) 1 and Beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red or Yellow Pedestrian Push Buttons.. white Gignats & Mutttpte Ltghting White Grounded & Common “lashing Beacons 8 Sign Light@ whtta ahttng Control.. .............. vvhii
...........................
................... ..Y ......... Interconnect ................................ ................................
White
whii Orange Orange Orange OKillQt#
Black
Black
brtset . . . ..I.........................
Railroad Pre-Emption...J
I. F
1 F
ZTORS
tdentification
Insulation Colors
-7
Base
Stripe
Pw 11
Blade
Orange None
PUW
Zed, Yellow, Brow1 n
ted, Yettow, Brow n
bad, Yettow, Brow n W, Yellow. Brows n
Red, Brown Red. Brown Red; Brown Red, Brown
Blue
Blue Blue Btue
Black
Red
Biack
White
B&k Red
Black
Red
Black
Red (Note 10)
Black Red
-
-iizT
@ww None
e
O=W
e
None
None None
None Nona
None
None
None NOIN3
None None
None
Black None
None None None
None None None
NOW None
None
None
4.6 .................... 14
ii*5 .................... 14 ..................... 14
2p,6p.. .............. 14 4$6!. .............. .
3p:7p.. ..............................
if
14
P-29-6 ............ 14
P4.P-6 ............ 14 P-l.P-5 p-3;p-7 ............ 14 ............ 14
CON-1 .............
CON-2 ............. 8
Jo band required 14
Jo band reauired 14
SL-2.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
F-Lo&ton No. I
1. On overlaps, insutatton is stiipad for first phase in destgna*n, for example, a phase (2+3) co&u&r is striped as for
phase 2. 2. Band for overtap and special phases as requtred. 3. Flashing beacons having separate sewtce do not require banding. 4. These requirements do not appty to signal cabta. 5.
6.
‘S tf ctrcutt ts swttched on tine side of service equtpment by utility.
Band conductors in each putt box and near ends of termination points. On signal tight circuits, a single band may be
7. placed around 2 or 3 ungrounded conductors comprising a phase. Ungrounded conductors between service swttch and flasher mechanism shalt be black and banded as indk-&ed In this column. 8. Conductors between ballasts and sign lighting tamps shalt be No. 16 and cotor shall correspond to that of the battast leads.
‘a+
v l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 82 of 299 Pages
a 9. Both conductors between external H.f.0. ballast and lamp socket shall be black.
10. Black acceptable for size No. 2 and larger. Tape ends for 500 mm (2V) with indicated &or. 11. Wir6’sizes listed are minimums. Ampacity requirements of specific circuits or voltage drop may necessitate larger conductors.
20Q-2.08B Multiple Circuit Conductors- Conductors for multiple circuits shall be UL or ETL listed
and rated for 600-volt operation. The insulation for No. 14 through No. 4 conductors shall be one of
the following: 1) Type TW polyvinyl chloride conforming to the requirements of ASTM Designation: D 2219.
2) Type THW polyvinyl chloride.
3) Type USE, Type RHH or Type RHW cross-linked polyethylene.
At any point, the minimum thickness of any Type TW, THW, USE, RHH or RHW insulation shall be
1 .O mm (40 mils) for conductor sizes No. 14 to No. 10, inclusive, and 1.3 mm (84 mils) for No. 8 to
No. 2, inclusive. The insulation for No. 2 and larger conductors shall be one of the types listed
above or shall be Type THWN. Conductors for wiring wall luminaires shall be stranded copper, with
insulation rated for use at temperatures up to 125°C. Overhead lighting conductors shall be No. 8,
or larger, medium hard drawn copper with weatherproof covering.
209.2.08C Series Circuit Conductors. Conductors for series circuits shall be No. 8, shall be
rated for 500~volt operation and shall be insulated with 3.7 mm (150 mils) minimum thickness polyvinyl chloride compound conforming to the specifications of ASTM Designation: D 2219, or
polyethylene conforming to the specifications of ASTM Designation: D 1351.
209-2.09 Wiring. All conductors shall be run in conduit, except overhead and temporary
installations and where conductors are run inside poles. Wiring shall be done in conformance with
the regulations and code listed in Section 209-1.02, “Regulations and Code,” and the following
additional requirements:
At least 0.3 m (1 ‘) of slack shall be left for each conductor at each signal or lighting standard, or
combined standard, and at least one meter (3’) of slack at each pull box. At least one meter (3’) of slack shall be left for each conductor at each splice. Ends of spare conductors or conductors terminated in pull boxes shall be taped to provide a watertight seal.
2094.09C Connectors and Terminals. Conductors shall be joined by the use of UL or ETL listed
crimp type connectors as shown on the plans. Connectors and terminals shall be applied with the
proper type tool as recommended by the manufacturer of the connector or terminal being used.
Finished connections and terminals shall comply with the requirements of Military Specification MIL-
T-7928. All stranded conductors smaller than No. 14 shall be terminated in crimp style terminal lugs. All connectors and terminal lugs for conductor sizes No. 8 and smaller shall be soldered by
the hot iron, pouring or dipping method. Open flame soldering will not be permitted.
1)
209-2.091) Splicing and Terminations. Unless specified otherwise or permitted by the Engineer,
splices shall conform to the details shown on the plans and will be permitted only in the following types of circuits at the following locations: 1) Grounded conductors in pull boxes.
2) Pedestrian push button conductors in pull boxes.
3) Multiple or series lighting conductors in the pull box adjacent to each electrolier or luminaire location or in the bases of Type 21 standards. Where electroliers are more than 120 m (406‘)
apart, splices will be permitted in pull boxes at 120 m (400‘), or greater, intervals. 4) When traffic signals are being modified, ungrounded traffic signal light conductors may be
spliced in pull boxes at locations shown on the plans.
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 83 of 299 Pages
5) Ungrounded traffic signal light conductors to a terminal compartment or signal head on a standard may be spliced to through conductors of the same phase in the pull box adjacent to the
standard.
6) All splices and terminal lugs for conductor sizes No. 8 and smaller shall be soldered by the hot
iron, pouring or dipping method. Open flame soldering will not be permitted.
209.2.09E Splice Insulation. All splices shall be capable of satisfactory operation under
continuous submersion in water. Multi-conductor cables shall be spliced and insulated to provide a watertight joint and to prevent absorption of moisture by the cable.
Where more than one conductor enters the sleeve of a ballast installed in a pull box, the insulation and taping shall be applied between the conductors in such a manner as to provide a watertight
joint.
Splice insulation shall conform to the details shown on the plans.
Low-voltage tape shall be UL or ETL listed and shall be the folkswing types: 1) Self-fusing, oil and flame-resistant, synthetic rubber.
2) Pressure-sensitive, adhesive, polyvinyl chloride, 0.15 mm (0.007*) minimum thickness.
Tape for insulating splices in high-voltage (over 600 V) circuits shall be designed for use on 5-kvolt
circuits and shall be resistant to ozone, wrona and water. Insulating pad shall be composed of a
laminate of 2 mm (O.OSS”) thickness of electrical grade polyvinyl chloride and a 3 mm (0.125”)
thickness of butyl splicing compound with removable liner. . Heat-shrink tubing shall be medium or heavy wall thickness, irradia?ed polyolefin tubing containing an adhesive mastic inner wall.
Minimum wall thickness prior to contraction shall be one millimeter (39 mils). When heated, the
inner wall shall melt and fill all crevices and interstices of the object being covered while the outer
wall shrinks to form a waterproof insulation. Each end of the heat-shrink tube or the open end of the 0
end cap of heat-shrink tubing shall, after contraction, overlap the conductor insulation at least 38 mm. Heat-shrink tubing shall conform to the requirements of UL Standard 4681) and ANSI
Cl 19.1, for extruded insulated tubing at 606-V.
All heat-shrink tubing shall also meet the requirements of Table 2OQ-2.09E(A):
Property
Shrinkage Ratio:
TABLE 20902.99E(A)
HEAT-SHRINK TUBING
Requirement
33 percent, maximum, of supplied diameter when heated to 125°C and
allowed to cool to 25’C. - -
Dielectric Strength 140 kV per 10 mm, minimum.
Resistivity: 1013 W . mm, minimum.
Tensile Strength: 14 MPa, minimum.
Operating Temperature: -4O’C to 90°C (135°C Emergency).
Water Absorption: 0.5 percent, maximum.
When three or more conductors are to be enclosed within a single splice using heat-shrink tubing,
mastic shall be placed around each conductor, prior to being placed inside the heat-shrink tubing.
The mastic shall be the type recommended by the manufacturer of the heat-shrink tubing. After wntraction, the ends and seams of heat-shrink tubing shall be painted with electrical insulating
coating. Heat-shrink tubing shall not be heated with an open flame. A heating device designed for
the purpose is required.
Contract No. 3348 Page 84 of 299 Pages
a
The Contractor may, at the Contractor’s option, use either of the following splice insulation methods:
1) “Method 8” as shown on the plans. A minimum of 2 thicknesses of electrical insulating pad
shall be used. Pads shall be applied to the splice in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2) Heat-shrink tubing as provided above.
20912.095 Fused Splice Connectors. in the pull box adjacent to each luminaire a fused
diswnnect.splice connector shall be installed in each ungrounded conductor between the line and
the ballast. The connector shall be readily accessible in the pull box regardless of whether the
ballast is remote or is integral with the luminaire.
For 24~volt and 480~volt circuits, each connector shall be designed so that both ungrounded conductors are disconnected simultaneously. The connector shall have no exposed metal parts,
except the head of a stainless steel assembly screw may be exposed. The head of the metal as- sembly screw shall be recessed a minimum of 0.8 mm (1/32’) below the top of a plastic boss which
surrounds the head.
The splice connector shall completely enclose the fuse and shall protect the fuse against damage
from water and weather. The contact between the fuse and fuseholder shall be by spring pressure.
The terminals of the splice connector shall be rigidly crimped, using a tool of the type recommended
by the manufacturer of the fused splice connector, onto the line conductors and the conductors to
the ballasts and shall be insulated and made waterproof in accordance with the splice connector
manufacturer’s recommendations. Fused splice connectors shall not be used in series circuits.
Fuses shall be standard midget, ferrule type, with “Non-Time-Delay” feature, and shall be 10 mm
(13/s2’) x 38 mm (V/J.
2099.10 Bonding and Grounding. Metallic cable sheaths, metal pull box covers, metal conduit, equipment grounding wnductors, ballast and transformer cases, service equipment, sign switches,
and metal poles and pedestals shall be made mechanically and electrically secure to form a
continuous system, and shall be effectively grounded. Bonding jumpers shall be copper wire or copper braid of the same cross sectional area as No. 6 for series lighting systems and No. 8 or
larger for all other systems. The jumper size shall be increased to match the load or the circuit
breaker size, or shall be as shown on the plans. Equipment grounding conductors shall be wlor
coded to Code requirements or shall be bare.
The bonding jumper in standards wlth handholes shall be attached by a 4.5 mm &‘) or larger
brass bolt and shall be run to the conduit or bonding wire in the adjacent pull box. Standards without handholes shall be bonded by a jumper attached to all anchor bolts, and shall be run to the
conduit or bonding wire in the adjacent pull box. Grounding jumper shall be visible after cap has been placed on foundation. Where slip base standards or slip base inserts are installed, the bond- ing jumper shall not intrude into the slip plane. Bonding shall be accomplished by a bonding strap to
all anchor bolts or a 4.5 mm &“) or larger brass bolt installed in the bottom slip base plate.
One side of the secondary circuit of series-multiple and step-down transformers shall be grounded. Grounding of metal conduit, service equipment and the grounded conductor at service point shall be
accomplished as required by the Code and the serving utility, except that grounding electrode
conductor shall be No. 6, or larger. For equipment grounding purposes in Type 3 conduit, a No. 6
copper wire shall be run continuously in circuits used for series lighting, and a No. 8, minimum,
copper wire shall be run continuously in all other circuits. The bonding wire size shall be increased
to match the circuit breaker size, or shall be as shown on the plans. Where Type 3 conduit is to be
installed for future conductors, the copper wire may be omitted. Equipment bonding and grounding conductors are not required in conduits which contain only loop lead-in cable or signal interconnect cable or both.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 85 of 299 Pages
At each multiple service disconnect location, a ground electrode shall be furnished and installed.
Ground electrodes shall be one-piece lengths of galvanized steel rod or pipe not less than 19 mm
(V,“) in diameter, or of copper clad steel rod not less than 15 mm (“/c) in diameter. Ground
electrodes shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of the Code. The service equipment
shall be bonded to the ground electrode by use of a ground clamp or exothermic weld and No. 6 or larger copper wire, enclosed in a size 16 or larger diameter conduit.
Ground clamp for service grounding and for grounding of equipment on wood poles shall be Size 16
galvanized, malleable iron conduit hub with swivel feature. On wood poles, all metallic equipment mounted less than 2.4 m (8’) above ground surface shall be grounded. Bonding of metallic conduit
in non-metallic pull boxes shall be by means of bonding bushings and bonding jumpers. Bonding of
metallic wnduit in metal pull boxes shall be by means of locknuts, one inside and one outside of the
box.
Where a kilowatt-hour meter is required, a meter socket with sealing ring, as approved by the
serving utility, shall be furnished and installed. Where a meter socket is installed, the meter
enclosure shall be provided with factory installed test bypass facilities as required by the serving
utility. Service equipment shall be installed as soon as possible to enable the utility to schedule its
work well in advance of the completion of the project.
Each service shall be provided with a circuit breaker which shall simultaneously disconnect all
ungrounded service entrance conductors. All circuit breakers shall be quick-break on either
automatic or manual operation. The operating mechanism shall be enciosed and shall be trip-free
from the operating handle on overload. Circuit breakers shall be trip-indicating, shall have frame
size plainly marked and shall have trip rating clearly indicated on the operating handle. Overload
tripping of breakers shall not be influenced by an ambient temperature range of from -18% to 5O’C.
Multiple-pole breakers shall be the internal trip type. All circuit breakers shall be listed by UL or
ETL. Current rating of breakers shall be as shown on the plans. Circuit breakers used as se&e
disconnect equipment shall have a minimum interrupting capacity of 10 060 A, rms. Circuit breakers shall be enclosed in a NEMA raintight enclosure with dead-front panel and hasp with a 11
mm (7/,s’) hole for a padlock. The padlock will be furnished by others. Se&e equipment
enclosures, except Types II and Ill, shall be galvanized. Types II and Ill service equipment enclosures shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet steel or fabricated from sheet steel and zinc or
cadmium plated after fabrication, or shall be fabricated from aluminum. Fabrication of service equipment enclosures shall conform to the requirements of Section 2OQ-3.04A, “Cabinet Construction.” Steel enclosures shall be painted in accordance with the provisions in Section 2OQ-
2.16, ‘Painting.” All overlapping exterior seams and doors shall meet the requirements for Type 3R enclosures specified in the NEMA Enclosure Standards.
2094.16 Painting. Painting of electrical equipment and materials shall conform to the provisions
in Section 310, “Painting,” with the following additions and modifications. Paint materials for
electrical installations, unless otherwise specified, shall conform to the provisions in Section 210,
“Paint and Protective Coatings.” Factory or shop cleaning methods for metals will be acceptable if
equal to the methods specified herein. In lieu of the temperature and seasonal restrictions for painting as provided in Section 310, “Painting,” paint may be applied to equipment and materials for electrical installations at any time permitted by the Engineer.
All ungalvanized ferrous surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned prior to applying the prime coat. Blast cleaning will not be required. If an approved prime coat has been applied by the
manufacturer, and it is in good condition, the first primer application by the Contractor will not be
required.
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 86 of 299 Pages
Existing equipment to be painted in the field, including Agency-furnished equipment, shall be
washed with a stiff bristle brush using a solution of water containing 7.5 ml. of heavy duty detergent powder per liter (2 tablespoons per gallon). After rinsing, all surfaces shall be wire brushed with a
coarse, cup shaped, power-driven brush to remove all poorly bonded paint, rust, scale, corrosion,
grease or dirt. Any dust or residue remaining after wife brushing shall also be removed prior to
priming. Immediately after cleaning, all galvanized surfaces and all non-ferrous metal surfaces shall
be coated with one application of Primer (Wash) Pre-Treatment, Section 210-1.5 or wash primer conforming to the requirements of Military Specification MIL-P-153281). The wash primer shall be
applied by spraying or brushing to produce a uniform wet film on the surface. Galvanized
equipment and wood poles for traffic signal or flashing beacon installations shall not be painted.
New galvanlzed metal surfaces to be painted in the field shall be cleaned as specified for existing
equipment before applying the prime coats specified. Wife brushing of new galvanized surfaces will
not be required. After erection, all exterior surfaces shall be examined for damaged primer and the
damaged surfaces shall be cleaned and spot coated with primer. Galvanized metal guard posts
shall not be painted.
Types II and Ill steel service equipment enclosures shall be painted with a polymeric or an enamel coating system conforming to Color No. 14672 (light green) of Federal Standard 5958. All coatings
shall be commercially smooth, substantially free of flow tines, paint washout, streaks, blisters, and
other defects that would impair senriceability of detract from general appearance. The coatings
shall comply with the following requirements:
1) Coating Hardness - The finish shall have a pencil lead hardness of HB minimum using an
Eagle Turquoise pencil.
2) Salt Spray Resistance - The undercutting of the film of the coating system shall not exceed 3
mm (1/s’) average, from lines scored diagonally and deep enough to expose the base metal, after
250 hours exposure in a salt spray cabinet in accordance with ASTM Designation: B 117. 3) Adherence - There shall be no coating loss when tested by California Test 645. Compliance of the coating system to the above requirements may be determined by the application of the
coating, to 100 mm (4”) x 200 mm (6”) x 0.6 mm (0.0236”) test specimens of the same material
as the cabinets, in the same manner as applied to the cabinets.
A Certificate of Compliance shall be furnished in accordance with the provisions of Section 4-1.5, “Certification,” certifying that the coating system furnished complies in all respects with these re-
quirements. Interior of metal signal visors, louvers and front faces of back plates shall, be finished
with 2 applications of lusterless black exterior grade latex paint formulated for application to properly
prepared metal surfaces, except that factory finish in good condition will be acceptable.
Metal signal sections, signal head mountings, brackets and fittings, outside of visors, pedestrian push button housings, pedestrian signal sections and visors, and back faces of back plates, shall be
finished with 2 applications of lusterless black or dark olive green exterior grade latex paint
formulated for application to properly prepared metal surfaces. Dark olive green wlor shall match Color Chip No. 68 on file at the CALTRANS Transportation Laboratory.
Conduit and conduit fittings above ground shall be prepared and finished in the same manner as the adjacent standard or post. Relocated, reset or modified equipment previously finished as specified
in this Section 209-2.16, shall be given a spot finishing application on newly primed areas, followed
by one finishing application over the entire surface. If any signal faces or mounting brackets are re- quired to be painted under this Section, all signal faces and mounting brackets on the same mounting shall be repainted.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 87 of 299 Pages
Small rusted or repaired areas of relocated of reset galvanized equipment shall be cleaned and
painted as provided in Section 210-3.6 Equipment number shall be neatly stenciled on the standard
or adjacent stnrcture. The number designation will be determined by the Engineer. All paint shall
be applied either by hand brushing or by spraying machines in the hands of skilled operators. The
work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Engineer reserves the right to require
the use of brushes for the application of paint, should the work done by the paint spraying machine
prove unsatisfactory or objectionable, as determined by the Engineer.
209-6.078(5) Terminal Blocks. Terminal blocks shall be rated at 25 A, 600 V, shall be molded
from phenolic or nylon material and shall be the barrier type with plated brass screw terminals and
integral type marking strips.
2094.09 Transformers. Multiple to multiple and series to multiple transformers shall be-of the
single-phase, dry type designed for operation on a 60 Hz supply.
209-6.OqA Electrical Requirements. Transformer ratings shall be 120/460 volts, 240/480 volts or
480/120 volts for multiple to multiple units and 6.6 All20 volts of 6.6 A/480 volts for series to
multiple units or other ratings as shown on the plans. Secondary 480~volt windings shall be center
tapped. Volt-ampere ratings shall be as shown on the plans. Transformer efficiency shall exceed
95 percent for multiple to multiple units and 80 percent for series to multiple units. Secondary
voltage regulation and tolerance shall be i3 percent from half load to full load for multiple to multiple units and +lO percent (maximum) at no load to k3 percent at full load for series to multiple units.
Transformers shall have a decal showing a connection diagram. The diagram shall show either
wlor coding or tagging of wires with primary (Hl, H2) or secondary (Xl, X2) markers, and shall also
show the primary and secondary voltage and volt-ampere rating.
2096.098 Physical Requirements. External leads for multiple to multiple and series to multiple
secondary connections shall be Type USE, No. 10, rated 600 volts AC. Primary conductors for
series to multiple transformers shall be rated for use on 500~volt AC circuits. Transformer leads
shall extend a minimum of 300 mm (12“) from the case. Transformer insulation shall be NEMA
185’C or better. Series to multiple transformers shall withstand the application of 12 000 volts AC
from core to primary coil and from coil to coil for a one minute period. Series to multiple transformer secondaries and multiple to multiple transformers shall withstand the application of 2200 volts AC
from core to coils and, for multiple units only, from coil to coil for a one minute period. The above
tests shall be made immediately after operation of the transformer at full load for 24 hours. Non-
submersible transformers shall be provided with metal half-shell coil protection, shall have moisture
resistant, synthetic varnish impregnated windings and shall be suitable for outdoor operation in a
raintight enclosure. Each transformer to be installed in a pull box shall be the submersible type and
shall be provided with a handle and a hanger.
SECTION 212 - LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION MATERIALS
212-l LANDSCAPE MATERIALS.
212-l .2.3 Commercial Fertiiizer. add the following: Preplant fertiliier shall be granular
wmmerclal fertitiier 7-7-7 or approved equal. Postplant fertiltter shall be 1246 or approved equal
with Ca, Fe, Zn, and Mn and with the majority of nitrogen in nonammoniac form to prevent acidification of soil. Planting tablets shall be compressed fertilizer tablets with a 20-10-5 analysis.
Hydroseed fertilizer shall be long-lasting, controlled-release, plastic-coated, uniform in composition, free-flowing, suitable for application with approved equipment, and shall contain the minimum
available percentages of nitrogen, phosphoric acid, potash and sulfur required by table
212-1.2.5.1(A).
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 88 of 299 Pages
212-I .2.4 Organic Soil Amendment. Add the following: For all types of Organic Soil Amendment
mulch materials produced from pine trees grown in Alameda, Monterey, Santa Clara, Santa Cruz or San Mateo Counties shall not be used in the Work. Type 1A Organic Soil Amendment shall conform
to the requirements for type 1 Organic Soil Amendment except as modified hereinafter. Type 1A
Organic Soil Amendment shall be a wood or rice residual product derived from the bark of pine,
white fir, or red fir or cedar or redwood shavings or rice hulls. Type 1A Organic Soil Amendment
shall be manufactured from clean wood, free from clods coarse objects and rocks and shall conform
to the properties shown in Table 212-l .2.4(B):
Table 212-l .2.4(B)
SOIL AMENDMENT PROPERTlE$
Property 1 Minimum
Dry Weight Nitrc 3gen 1 (1)
Dry Weight Passing 25 mm (1”) Sieve 100%
Dry Weight Passing #4 Sieve 95%
1 Maximum
l(l)
100%
100%
pH I 6.0 1 7.0
Wettability
(1) (As Required by Table 212-l .2.4(A) SSPWC)
1 (1) 1 (1)
For all types of Organic Soil Amendment the Contractor shall supply the Engineer a sample of the
proposed amendment accompanied by an analytical analysis from an agricultural laboratory certifying compliance to the requirements herein. Said submittal shall be in accordance with Section
2-5.3.3.
212-1.2.5 Mulch for Hydraulic Method Seed Lawn Planting. Add the following: The terms
Hyroseeding and Hydroseed shall be synonymous with Hydraulic for the purposes of Section 212. Disturbed Areas, planting areas shall be mulched, fertilized and seeded using method 8. Mulch
shall be manufactured from virgin wood cellulose fiber mulch and shall not contain growth or
germination inhibitors. When mixed with water, the mulch shall remain in uniform suspension and
when blended with the seed, fertiliier, and other approved additives, shall form a homogeneous
slurry. When applied, the fibers shall form a moisture absorbing membrane with adequate
percolation properties sufficient to allow one hundred percent of water applied at the rate of 3.1 liters per minute per square meter (0.075 gallons per minute per square foot) onto a surface inclined at a
2:l (horizontal: vertical) slope to pass through the membrane. A non-phyto-toxic wetting agent shall be added to the slurry mixture. A water soluble, non-toxic green dye shall be added in sufficient quantity to clearly delineate the planted areas. When required, binder shall be added to the slurry
mixture “CPA 4000”, ‘AZTAC”, ‘Ecology Control” M-Binder, or approved equal.
1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 89 of 299 Pages
Add the following section: 212-1.2.5.1 Disturbed Area Mulch Fertilizer and Additives. In addition to the seed mix shown
in the table for Disturbed Areas the sluny mixture shall be applied at the rates shown in Table 212-
1.2.5.1 (A)
Table 212-1.2.5.1(A)
DISTURBED AREA MULCH FERTILIZER AND ADDITIVES
Component Application Rate
grams per sq. meter (pounds per acre)
Virgin Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch 225 (2000)
Binder (1) 7 ( 1 Fertilizer (18-20-O) Ammonium 35 (36ooo) Phosphate Sulfate, Plus 15% Soil Sulfur
Wetting Agent -- Per Mfg. Recommendation
Green Colorant Per Mfg. Recommendation
(1) Required to be incorporated only when applied between the months of Nov. through Feb.
Add the following section:
212-1.2.6 Herbicides and Pesticides. Shall be used in their appropriate applications with strict
adherence to manufacturer’s specifications and instructions. Postemergent herbicide for all areas
shall be Roundup, Diquat, Montar, or approved equal. Preemergent herbicide for shrubs and
groundcover areas planted from flats shall be Treflan, Surflan, Eptan, or approved equal.
Add the following section:
212-l .2.7 General Soil Conditioners. Agricuttural-grade gypsum shall be a calcium sulfate (CaSO, HzO) product - 94.3 percent. 90 percent shall pass a 50-mesh screen. Control of dust during
application is mandatory.
e Iron Sulfate shall be ferrous sulfate in pelletized or granular form containing not less than 20.0 percent iron expressed as metallic iron. Iron Sulfate pellets shall be of size and gradation such that
98 percent is retained on a IO-mesh screen.
Add the following section:
212-l .2.7 Stabilizing Emulsion. Stabilizing emulsion shall be a concentrated liquid chemical that
forms a plastic film upon drying and allows water and air to penetrate. The film shall be
nonflammable and shall have an effective life of at least one year. Stabilizing emulsion shall be
nontoxic to plant and animal life and nonthinking to concrete or painted surfaces. In the cured state
the stabilizing emulsion shall not be re-emulsifiable. The material shall be registered with, and
licensed by the California, Department of Food and Agriculture, as an “auxiliary soil chemical”. Stabilizing emulsion shall be miscible with water at time of mixing and application.
2124.3 Seed. Add following: The quantity of pure live seed supplied shall meet or exceed the
quantity shown in the specified mixes. Seed shall not contain more than 0.5 percent weed seed by
volume Seed types shall be as specified on the plans and planting legends, and shall ba applied at the rates indicated.
All brand-name, patented seed must be received by Contractor in original manufacturer’s bag. Sead
shall be received by Contractor in separate containers specifying kind, quantity, purity, and
germination. Contractor shall provide the Engineer with each seed bag label used in the Work.
.a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 90 of 299 Pages
212.1.3a Stolons. Hybrid Bermuda “Santa Ana” variety, fresh living sections of runners and stems
0
2 to 4 inches, high quality and certified to be free from diseases, insects, and weeds. Maximum
inert material acceptable will be 8 percent by weight. All materials are to be from the same growing
ground and delivered fresh to the jobsite, maximum 24 hours prior to planting.
212-1.4.1 General. Add the following: Plants shall be the variety and size shown on the plans or in the special provisions and shall conform to the requirements of these specifications. Contractor shall notify the Engineer 48 hours before each plant delivery so that the,Engineer can inspect the
plants. The scientific and common names of plants herein specified shall conform to the approved names given in “A Checklist of Woody Ornamental Plants in California, Oregon and Washington”
published by the University of California, Division of Agriculture Sciences, Publication 4091 (1979).
Each group of plant materials delivered on site shall be labeled clearly as to species and variety. All
patented plants (cultivars) required by the plant list shall be delivered with a proper plant patent
attached. The Contractor shall obtain clearance from the County Agricultural Commissioner, as
required by law, before planting plants delivered from outside the County in which they are to be
planted. Evidence that clearance has been obtained shall be filed with the Engineer. All plants
furnished by the Contractor shall be true to type or name as shown on the plans and shall be tagged
identifying the plants by species or variety; however, determination of plant species or variety will be
made by the Engineer and the Engineer’s decision shall be final. Plants shall be individually tagged
or tagged in groups by species or variety. Carpobrotus cuttings need not be tagged. All plants shall
comply with Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant diseases and infestations.
Inspection certificates required by law shall accompany each shipment of plants, and certificates
shall be delivered to the Engineer.
Plants furnished by the Contractor shall be healthy, shapely, and well-rooted, and roots shall show
a
no evidence of having been restricted or deformed at any time. Plants shall be well-grown; free
from insect pests and disease, and shall be grown in nurseries which have been inspected by the
State Department of Food and Agriculture and have complied with the regulations thereof.
The Engineer is the sole judge as to acceptability of each plant. vigorous, healthy, well-proportioned
plants are the intent of this specification. Plants which are even moderately “overgrown”, or are
showing signs of decline or lack of vigor, are subject to rejection. The size of the plants will be as
shown on the plans. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with the approval of the
Engineer, but the use of larger plants will make no change in contract price. If the use of larger
plants is approved, soil amendments shall be increased proportionately. All plants not conforming to
the requirements herein specified shall be considered defective and such plants, whether in place or
not, shall be marked as rejected, and immediately removed from the site and replaced with new
plants by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense. The Engineer reserves the right to change the
species, variety, and/or sizes of plant material to be furnished, provided that the cost of such plant
changes do not exceed the wst of plants in the original bid, and with the provision that the
Contractor shall be notified in writing, at least 60 days before the planting operation has
commenced.
No plant shall be transported to the planting area that is not thoroughly wet throughout the ball of
earth surrounding the roots. Any plant that, in the opinion of the Engineer, has a damaged root ball
or is dry or in a wilted condition when delivered to the planting area will not be accepted, and shall
be replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense. Each plant shall be handled and packed
in the approved manner for that species or variety, and all necessary precautions shall be taken to
ensure that the plants will arrive at the site of the work in proper condition for successful growth. Trucks used for transporting plants shall be equipped with covers to protect plants from windburn.
‘3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 91 of 299 Pages
Root condition of plants furnished by the Contractor in containers will be determined by removal of
earth from the roots of not less than 2 plants nor more than 2 percent of the total number of plants
of each species or variety, except when wntainer-grown plants are from several sources, the roots of not less than 2 plants of each species or variety from each source will be inspected by the
Engineer. In case the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the Agency reserves the right to reject the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective samples. Any plants
rendered unsuitable for planting because of this inspection will be considered as samples and will
not be paid for.
The Contractor shall notii the Engineer when plants are to be shipped to the project site. The notification shall be given not less than 10 days prior to the actual shipment date.
Carpobrotus cuttings shall be 250 mm (lo”) or more in length and shall not be rooted. Delosperma cuttings shall be 150 mm (6”) or more in length and shall not be rooted. Cuttings shall be tip
cuttings from. healthy, vigorous and strong-growing plants and shall be insect and disease free.
Mature or brown-colored stem growths or cuttings which have been trimmed will not be accepted. Cuttings shall be planted not more than 2 days after cutting and shall not be allowed to dry or wither.
Carpobrotus cuttings shall not be taken from any plants that indicate the presence of ice plant scale
(Pulvinaria species).
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the location where cuttings .are to be taken at least 10
days prior to taking the cuttings and shall be responsible for all permit and inspection fees involved in obtaining cuttings.
2121.53 Tree Stakes. Modify as follows: Tree stakes shall be 50mm (2”) d&meter turned lodgepole pine, pointed on their driven end.
0
1 IO6198 Contract No. 3348 Page 92 of 299 Pages
2123 IRRIGATION SYSTEM MATERIALS.
212-2.1.3 Plastic Pipe for Use with Solvent Weld Socket or Threaded Fittings, add the following:
Except as provided in this section, all buried piping in the irrigation system shall be installed with
underground utility marking tape conforming to the requirements of section 207-21 and identifying it as
reclaimed water. Intermittent pressure lines (lines on the downstream side of a controller valve that will not be subject to constant pressure) will not require underground utility marking tape. All PVC pipe
used for irrigation systems shall be wlored purple by the addition of a dye integral to the PVC.
Painted pipe will not be accepted. Pressure mainline piping for sizes 50 mm (2”) and larger shall be
PVC having a pressure rating of 2170 kPa (315 PSI), S.D.R. 13.5. Stenciled pipe is required for all
irrigation system piping including portions not required to be marked with underground utility marking tape. Ail pipe shall have stenciling appearing on both sides of the pipe with the marking ‘Reclaimed
Water” in 16 mm (“/,“) letters repeated every 300 mm (12“). PVC non-pressure buried lateral line
piping shall be PVC Schedule 40.
Add the following section:
2123.1.7 Brass Pipe and Fittings. Brass pipe shall be IPS standard weight 125 LB 85 percent
copper and 15 percent zinc, trade designation seamless red brass pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM 843-91. Brass pipe fittings and connections shall be Standard 125 LB class
85 percent red brass fittings and connections.
212-2.2.7 Valve Boxes. Add the following: All valve boxes shall be marked ‘RCV”, ‘BV” or ‘QC’,
‘PB” respectively. Remote control valves shall be marked with station numbers embossed on the
valve cover with a brass tag. (RCV boxes shall have locking covers.) Other boxes such as pull
boxes, etc., shall be marked with appropriate identification. .
Add the following section:
212-2.2.8 Ball Valves. Ball valves shall have bottom-loaded pressure-retaining stems, glass-
reinforced seats, and reinforced TFE stem packing seals. Valves sizes 13 mm (%“) to 50 mm (2”)
shall be pressure rated at 4140 kPa (600 PSI) WOO and 1030 kPa (150-PSI) saturated steam. Each valve shall be tested, air under water, in the opened and closed position by the manufacturer.
Ball valve must conform to Federal Specification WW-V-35B, Type II, Class A, Style 3, End
Connection A or C.
212-2.4 Sprinkler Equipment. Add the following: All sprinkler heads are to have factory built-in check valves or a check valve under each head. Drip assemblies shall meet the following
requirements: The drip emitter shall be Pepw Quadra or Rainbird XERI-Bird-8 or approved equal
as called on drawings, with four ports. Drip tubing for emitter outlets shall be Rainbird (RBT-160V),
Salw, or approved equal. Drip tubing stakes shall be Rainbird No. RS-13, Salw, or approved equal.
Bug cap for drip tubing shall be manufactured by Rainbird, Pepw, or approved equal. The drip
pressure regulator shall be Rainbird, Netafim PVR, or approved equal. Drip emitter filter shall be
Amiad, Rainbird, or approved equal. Drip emitter access boxes shall be Rainbird No. SEB-GX, Salw
Subterranean Emitter Box, or approved equal. Check valves shall be of heavy-duty virgin PVC
construction with FIP thread inlet and outlet. Internal parts shall be stainless steel and neoprene.
Antidrain valves shall be field adjustable against drain out from 1.5 m to 12 m (5’ to 40’) of head. All sprinkler heads that are without valves in the heads are to have an antidrain valve feature and shall
have an excess flow feature, which will automatically stop the flow of water when it exceeds the
GPM preset by the manufacturer. Check valves shall be King Bros., Rainbird, or approved equal.
q 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348
___
Page 93 of 299 Pages
2129.3 Backflow Preventer Assembly. Add the following: Backflow preventers shall be one of
the approved reduced pressure prihciple devices listed by the California Department of Health
Senrices, Division of Drinking Water and Environmental Management, 601 North 7th Street, Mailing
Station (MS) 92, P.O. Box 942732, Sacramento, CA 94234-7320.
Backflow preventers shall be factory assembled and shall include 2 check valves, one pressure
differential relief valve, 2 shut-off valves and 4 test cocks. Backflow preventer and valves shall be
the same size as the pipeline in which they are installed, unless otherwise shown on the plans.
BackfJow preventer shut-off valves shall be manufactured from iron or bronze and shall be either
resilient wedged gate valves, resilient seated and fully ported ball valves, or resilient seated butterfly
valves. Threaded type shut-off valves shall be provided with a union on one side of each valve.
Unions shall be brass or malleable iron.
212-2.4.1 Additional Equipment. Contractor shall provide the following items to the Engineer:
Two control valve keys.
Two wrenches for removing each different type of sprinkler head. Two quick coupler keys. The keys and hose ells shall be of the same manufacturer as
the coupling valve. Five keys for opening and locking each automatic controller and enclosure.
2123 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS.
2lh.l General. Add the following: All electrical materials shall conform to’ the requirements of
the 1996 National Electrical Code.
2123.2.2 Conductors. Add the following: Low voltage electric wiring running from controller to
the automatic control valves shall be no smaller than No. 14 solid single conductor, copper wire,
0.015 mm (60 mil) insulation, 0.015 mm (60 mil) neoprene jacket, style UF (Direct Burial), or equal,
wlor code wires to each valve. Neutral wires shall be white, no smaller than No. 12 solid single
conductor wire, 0.015 mm (60 mil) insulation, 0.015 mm (60 mil) neoprene jacket, style UF (Direct
Burial).
0
1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 94 of 299 Pages
SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS
TO
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS
CONSTRUCTION
PART 3, CONSTRUCTION METHODS
SECTION 300 - EARTHWORK
300-l CLEARING AND GRUBBING.
3004.1 General. add the following to the third paragraph: During surface clearing operations,
the Contractor shall not cover or bury any plant growth or other objectionable materials. If the
Contractor cannot successfully separate the plant growth from the surface soil and advertently or
inadvertently mixes organic or other objectionable materials with the soil, the soil so contaminated
shall be removed from the site by the Contractor. All costs, if any, associated with removing the soil mixed with organic or other objectionable materials and importing soil to replace said contaminated
soil shall be borne by the Contractor and no additional payment therefor shall be made to the
Contractor. ,.
3004.1 General. add the following: All clearing and grubbing, including the removal of deared
and grubbed materials, must be completed and the resultant surface made available for
measurement by the Engineer prior to the Contractor starting any unclassified excavation. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer three (3) working days prior to completing clearing and grubbing
and the removal of all deleterious material from the site. The Engineer intends to schedule and perform field survey and/or aerial photography of the entire site. If the Contractor has not removed
all deleterious material from the entire site by the day before the scheduled field work and/or
photography, the field work and/or photography will be cancelled and not rescheduled until’ the
Contractor has completed removing all material from the entire site. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional compensation or extensions in time if the field work and/or aerial
photography is cancelled due to the Contractor not completing clearing. and grubbing and removal
operations as scheduled. If the entire site cannot have field work performed and/or be
photographed because of weather, poor visibility or adverse flight conditions the Contractor will be
entitled to a corresponding time extension but not entitled to any additional compensation due to the
delay.
300-2.5 Slopes. add the following: after the first sentence of the first paragraph: A slope shall be
defined as any area steeper than three horizontal to one vertical.
300-2.6 Surplus Material. add the following: The Contractor shall haul and dispose of all surplus
material from the project. The Contractor shall utilize highway legal haul trucks for this export of material from the project site and to a site secured by the contractor. No earth moving equipment
or special construction equipment, as defined in section 565 of the California Vehicle Code, will be allowed for hauling material on public streets.
G l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 95 of 299 Pages
308 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
308-2.3.2 Fertlllzatlon and Conditioning Procedures. add the following: The Contractor shall
cultivate the surface of all areas to be planted or hydroseeded by discing, ripping or scarifying the
finish grade. After cultivation the planting areas shall be raked to a smooth friable and plantable surface. All planting areas, except slopes steeper than 3-l/2:1, shall be cultivated to a depth of 300
mm (12”). The planting areas that are slopes steeper than 3-l/2:1, shall be cultivated to a depth, of 150 mm (6”). After cultivation, the soil amendments shown in table 308-2.3.2(A) shall be thoroughly
blended 150 mm (6”) deep in all planted areas. Backfill for planting pits shall conform to the
requirements of section 3084.5. After surface preparation and application of the soil amendments shown in Table 308-2.3.2(A) the Contractor shall obtain a minimum of one test for each soil property
listed in Table 308-2.3.2(B) from each median planter, at least one test per 150 m (500’) from each
parkway and for each hectare (2.5 acres) of hydroseeded area and shall submit the results of said
tests to the Engineer. The Contractor shall then adjust the soil properties to the acceptable ranges
of soil properties shown in Table 308-2.3.2(B) using such materials and methods as may be
necessary. If adjustments are necessary the soil shall be tested by the Contractor after such
adjustments for each soil property listed in Table 308-2.3.2(B) to determine that the adjustments to the-soil made by the Contractor result in soil properties within the acceptable range. The Contractor
shall adjust the soil properties and show acceptable ranges prior to any planting or application of
hydroseed slurry. Prior to the start of any planting or application of hydroseed slurry the surface
and root area shall be thoroughly moistened. The Contractor shall certify, in writing, that the ground surface has been prepared in accordance with this section and shall request inspection by the Engineer prior to any planting or seeding. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval
before any planting or hydroseeding.
TABLE 308-2.3.2
For areas to receive planting of all types, excluding only hydroseeding, the Contractor shall amend
the prepared soil by blending 200 g of 7-7-7 fertilizer per square meter (40 Ibs. per 1,000 square
feet) into the top 150 mm (6”) of soil after the completion of adjustment of soil properties and
acceptance of the planting area by the Engineer. The Contractor shall apply postplant 12-4-6 fertilizer at the rate of 20 pounds per 1,000 square feet, 30 days after planting and every 30 days through the end of the maintenance period.
308-2.4 Finish Grading.. add following: The finish grade in hydroseed slope areas shall have moderately rough texture to provide a suitable surface for adherence of the hydroseed mix.
e 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 96 of 299 Pages
308-4 PLANTING.
3084.1 General. add the following: Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when
weather and soil conditions are suitable and in accordance with locally accepted horticultural
practice and as approved by the Engineer. No planting shall be done in any area until it has been satisfactorily prepared in accordance with these specifications. Soil moisture level prior to planting
shall be no less than 75 percent of field capacity. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s
approval of planting pits before planting operations begin. For pit planted vegetation when the soil moisture level is found to be insufficient for planting, the planting pits shall be filled with water and
allowed to drain before starting planting operations. No more plants shall be distributed in the
planting area on any day than can be planted and watered on that day. All plants shall be planted
and watered as herein specified immediately after the removal of the containers. Containers shall not be cut pridr to placing the plants in the planting area. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to provide continuous horticultural services and temporary and/or permanent irrigation to
all planted and hydroseeded areas so that the planted and hydroseeded vegetation is 100 percent
healthy and thriving prior to, and throughout the, landscape maintenance period.
Mulch all landscape areas (exduding turf) having less than a 2:l slope with a l-l/2” deep layer of
‘medium grind mulch’ at the conclusion of planting operations.
3089.2 Protection and Storage. add the following: The Contractor’s onsite plant storage area
shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the delivery of any plant materials. Any plant determined
by the Engineer to be wilted, broken, or otherwise damaged shall be rejected at any time during the
project, whether in the ground or not. All plants shall be handled by their containers. Any plant that
has been handled by its trunk or stem shall be rejected. All rejected plants shall be removed from
the site immediately.
3084.3 Layout and Plant Location. modify as follows: Planting areas shall be staked by the
Contractor and the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval of the planting layout before
planting operations begin.
30846 Tree and Shrub Planting. add the following: Amend each cubic yard of backfill for
planting holes with..a thoroughly blended mixture of clean loamy soil meeting the requirements of Table 308-2.3.2(A) and the amendments listed in Table 30845(A).
TABLE 30848(A)
BACKFILL AND AMENDMENTS FOR TREE AND SHRUB PLANTlNG
Planting tablet requirements are not cumulative and apply to the size container indicated
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 97 of 299 Pages
Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs and branches, and to
compensate for loss of roots during transplanting, but never to exceed one-tenth the branching
structure. Pruning may be done only with the approval of, and in the presence of, the Engineer. Cuts
over 19 mm (W) shall be painted with an approved tree wound paint.
3084.6 Plant Staking and Guying. add the following: All boxed trees shall be installed per the
details shown on the plans.
3084.8.2(b) Method B. add the following: Slurry preparation shall take place at the job site. Slurry additives shall arrive at the site sealed and
properly identified by the manufacturer. All specified additives shall be at the rates specified and
shall be thoroughly mixed. Seed shall be added to the slurry after the fiber mulch has been
thoroughly incorporated. Seed shall remain in the mixing tank for a period not greater than 60
minutes.
Spray all areas with a uniform, visible coat using the green color of the mulch as a guide. The slurry shall be applied in a sweeping motion, in an arched stream so as to fall like rain allowing the mulch
fibers to built on each other until a good coat is achieved and the material is spread, evenly, at the required rate per acre. The applicator shall use care not to drag spray hoses over container planted
material and shall attempt to spray from the edges of the planting areas wherever possible.
Any slurry mixture which has not been applied to the planting areas within four (4) hours after mixing
will be rejected and removed from the project at the Contractor’s expense. Any slurry spilled into
areas out&de the limits of work shall be cleaned up at the Contractor’s expense to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. The Contractor shall assure that the site is properly prepared. The Contractor shall
repair all tire ruts created by the equipment. Areas needing grading repair prior to hydroseeding
shall be blended and floated to match surrounding grades. Areas having less than 80% seed
coverage/germination within thirty (30) days after the initial application. shall be reseeded every
twenty (20) days until 80% of the ground surface is evenly covered by hydroseeded or subsequently
reseeded growth.
Add the fotiowing section: ,308-4.8.3.1 Weed Eradication. Water all irrigated areas to be hydroseeded for three (3) weeks
prior to hydroseeding to allow for germination of the weed seeds. Then spray ail weeds with a post emergent herbicide. Wait two (2) weeks, then eradicate the weeds prior to the application of the
hydroseed mixes. Areas shall be inspected and deemed to be in an acceptable condition by the Engineer prior to hydroseeding.
Add the following section,
3084.10 Erosion Control Matting Installation
Add the following section,
308410.1 General. Before installation of erosion control matting all soil preparation, fine grading,
and hydroseeding of the areas to receive erosion control matting shall be completed.
Add the following section:
308410.2 Coordlnatlon with Hydroseedlng. Erosion control matting shall be installed immediately after the first application of hydroseed materials. In all cases the erosion control matting shall be placed within three days of the first hydroseed material application. Should any seed in the
q l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 98 of 299 Pages
hydroseed materials begin to germinate within the threeday period after application or before the
0
installation of the erosion control matting, the installation of the erosion control matting shall be
considered as late and the Contractor shall disc the hydroseed materials into the top 1OOm (4”) of
the underlying soil, condition the soil for hydroseeding, and apply hydroseeding materials at the
rates and of the type specified. No additional payment will be made for second or subsequent
hydroseed applications resulting from late installation of erosion control matting.
Add the following section:
308410.3 Installation. Erosion control matting shall be installed using the following techniques:
Begin at the top of the slope by placing the erosion control matting into a 150 mm (8“) wide by 150
mm (6’) deep trench with the end of the matting laid flat in the bottom of the trench and anchoring
the end of the erosion control matting with erosion control mat staples spaced no more than 300
mm (12”) on centers placed at the intersection of the bottom and the downhill vertical face of the
trench.
Roll the erosion control matting down the slope.
Staple the erosion control matting on an alternating grid consisting of three across and two across lines of staples in horizontal lines spaced 900mm (3’) on centers. Erosion control mat so stapled
shall be spaced such that no less than 1 X staples per square meter (1% staples per square yard) are provided to anchor the erosion control matting.
Start the adjacent erosion control mat as in Item 1 of this section, overlapping the previously placed
mat by no less than 50 mm (2”). Staple placement may be such as to use the staples used to
secure the adjacent mat to secure both mats along their edges.
3086 IRRIGATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION. .*
3084.1 General. add the following: Where appropriate, irrigation water shall be applied as
often and in sufficient amounts, as conditions may require, to germinate and establish the seed and
keep the container plants healthy and growing.
Locate lines, valves, and other underground utilities and receive the approval of the Engineer before
digging trenches. Contractor shall be responsible for damages caused by its operations.
Connections shall be made at approximately the locations shown on the drawings. Contractor shall
be responsible for unapproved changes. Permission to shut off any existing in-use water lines must be obtained 48 hours in advance, in writing from the Engineer, as to the exact length of time of each
shut-off. The entire irrigation system shall be under full automatic operation for a period of seven
days prior to any planting.
All pop-up sprinkler heads in shrub or groundwver areas shall be installed. so that the top of the
sprinkler is 1” above finished grade.
All pop-up type sprinkler heads in turf areas shall be installed so that the top of the sprinkler is flush with the adjacent hardscape.
All pressure lines shall be tested for two hours under hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi and be proven water tight. Contractor shall provide all equipment for test.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 99 of 299 Pages
All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finish grade of the area to be irrigated unless
othennrise noted on the plans.
The sprinkler system is based on the minimum operating pressure and the maximum flow demand shown on the irrigation drawings at each point of connection. The irrigation contractor shall verify
water pressure prior to wnstruction. Report to the owner’s authorized representative any difference
between the water pressure shown on the drawings and the actual pressure reading at the irrigation
point of connection. In the event pressure differences are not reported prior to start of construction, the irrigation contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revisions necessary.
This design is diagrammatic. All piping, valves, etc. shown within paved areas are for design
clarification only. Install piping and valves in planting areas where possible, and locate control and
quick coupling valves 6” to 12” away from hardscape or turf area for easy access.
The irrigation contractor shall flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and/or buildings. This shall include selecting the best
degree of arc to fit the existing site conditions and throttling the flow control at each valve to obtain optimum operating pressure for each system.
Do not wiltfully install the sprinkler system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field
that obstructions, grade differences, or differences in site dimensions exist that might not have been
foreseen and considered in the engineering. The ownefs authorized representative should be informed of such obstructions and differences, but in the event that this notification is not performed,
the irrigation contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revisions necessary.
Install all pipe materials and equipment as shown in construction details. Use teflon tape or teflon
pipe dope on all pvc male pipe threads of all sprinkler swing joint and valve assemblies.
0 It is the responsibility of the irrigation contractor to familiarize himself with all grade differences,
location of walls, structures and utilities. The irrigation contractor shall exercise extreme care, and be
responsible for any damage in excavating and working near utiliies. He shall coordinate his work with the general contractor and other sub-contractors for the location of utilities and the installation of
pipe sleeves through walls, under roadways, and near structures.
Drainage of water through sprinkler head will not be allowed. Some sprinklers will require the installation of an anti-drain valve in the riser nipple to prevent drainage. During the wurse of
construction, the contractor shall install an antidrain as required at any sprinkler showing signs of
draining after the irrigation system has operated from an on to off position. installation of anti-drain
valves shall be included in the bid price without additional cost to the owner.
Adjust angle of sprinkler perpendicular to slope for proper coverage.
Locate valve boxes in shrub planting areas whenever possible.
30805.T Irrigation Plpellne Installation. add the following: All pressure main line piping from the irrigation system shall be installed to maintain 3.1 m (10’) minimum horizontal separation from all
potable water piping. Where reclaimed and potable water pressure mainline piping cross, the reclaimed water piping shall be installed below the potable water piping, sleeved in a P.R. 206 PSI
SDR 21 “Alertline” PVC sleeve which extends a minimum of 3.1 m (lo’) on either side of the potable
water piping and be located to provide a minimum vertical clearance of 300 mm (12”) between the reclaimed and potable water lines. Conventional (white) PVC pipe Schedule 40 may be used for sleeving material if it is taped along its entire length with 75 mm (3”) wide purple warning tape which reads ‘Caution Reclaimed Water”.
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 100 of 299 Pages
For trenching through areas where topsoil has been spread, deposit topsoil on one side of trench
and subsoil on opposite side. Subsoil shall be free of all rocks 13 mm (X‘) in diameter or larger, debris, and litter, prior to use as backfill. The Contractor shall repair any leaks and replace all
defective pipe or fittings until lines meet test requirements. The Contractor shall not wver any lines
until they have been inspected and approved by the Engineer for tightness, quality of workmanship,
and materials. The The Contractor shall not be backfill trenches until all required tests and
observations are performed. Observations include sprinkler heads, all fittings, lateral and mainline
pipe, valves, and direct burial wire.
308-5.2.3 Plastic Pipeline. add the following: Pipe and fittings shall be stored under cover until used, and shall be transported in a vehide with a bed long enough to allow the length of pipe to lay flat
so as not to be subjected to undue bending or concentrated external load at any point. Pipe ends and
fittings shall be wiped with MEK, or equal, before welding solvent is applied. Welded joints shall be
given a minimum of 15 minutes to set before moving or handling. All field cuts shall be beveled to
remove burrs and excess before fitting and gluing together. Center load pipe with small amount of backfill to prevent arching and slipping under pressure. Leave joints exposed for inspection during
testing. Plastic-to-plastic joints shall be solvent-welded, using only solvent recommended by pipe
manufacturer.
Add the following section:
308-5.2.6 lnstallatlon of Brass Pipe. Cut brass piping by power hacksaw, circular cutting
machine using an abrasive wheel, or hand hacksaw. Cut no piping with metallic wheel cutter of any
description. Ream and remove rough edges or burrs so that smooth and unobstructed flow is
obtained. Place Teflon tape, Teflon dope, or approved equal on male threads only, and tighten to
prevent any leakage. Tighten screwed joints with tongs or wrenches. Caulking is not permitted.
Add the following section: 308-5.3.1 Valves. add the following:
Install each control valve in a separate valve box with a minimum of 300 mm (12”) separation between valves and 150 mm (6”) from any fixed object or structure.
Add the following section 308-5.3.2 Valve Boxes. Install no more than one valve per box. All boxes are to be marked as to
the type of valve. Remote control valve boxes shall also indicate control station number.
Add the following section:
308-5.3.3 Backflow Preventer.’ Backflow preventer assembly shall be installed in accordance
with manufacturer’s specifications and as directed on drawings. Exact location and positioning shall
be verified on the site by the Engineer.
308-5.4.4 Sprinkler H&d Adjustment. add the following: The Contractor shall flush and adjust
all irrigation heads and valves for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks.
Roadways buildings, walls, and other structures.
308-5.5 Automatic Control System Installation. add the following: All electrical installation methods shall conform to the requirements of the 1996 National Electrical Code. Provide one control wire and one wmmon ground wire to service each valve in system.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 101 of 299 Pages
308-5.6.3 Sprinkler Coverage Test. add the following: This test shall be accomplished before
any ground cover is planted.
3086 MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT. Modify as follows: The maintenance
period shall be minimum 120 days or until final acceptance of the project, whichever is the greater.
The Contractor shall provide complete landscape maintenance of all planting areas. The work shall include, but not be limited to, watering, litter control, weed control, stake repair, cultivating, repair of
irrigation systems, and control of diseases and pests. All planted areas, except hydroseed areas, shall be treated with an approved granular pm-emergent herbicide, according to manufacturer’s
specifications, at the beginning of the maintenance period and if the product specifies, additional
scheduled treatments on a regular schedule, as required through the maintenance period. At the
direction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall control weeds, disease, and pest infestations in the
planting areas. The Engineer shall approve all methods and materials for such control. Upon
approval, the Contractor shall implement the control measures, exercising extreme caution in using
pesticides and taking all steps to ensure the safety of the public. Only licensed personnel will be
permitted to perform toxic spraying work. During establishment period, the Contractor shall furnish
sufficient men and equipment on a daily basis to perform the work required by this section. Any day
when the Contractor fails to adequately cany out specified maintenance work, as determined necessary by the Engineer, will not be credited as one of the plant establishment days. All planting
areas which are damaged by construction shall be repaired by the Contractor within twenty (20) days
following completion of construction in such. The Contractor shall repair such damaged areas. The
repair shall consist of bringing the damaged area back to final grade, preparing the soil, replanting the
area with the same vegetation as originally specified, and maintaining the area to achieve acceptable plant establishment. Contractor is required to take ail precautionary measures to protect the native
vegetation in all areas outside the limits of grading. Individual trees which are to remain should be protected with the placement of an approved barrier at the drip-line of the tree. Protective barriers to
be plastic mesh on redwood stakes 900 mm (36”) high.
Groups of trees or shrubs which are to remain should be protected with approved barriers firmly
anchored to the ground at an adequate distance to protect the planting. No material should be
stockpiled; no equipment parked, repaired, or refueled; and no oil, gasoline, paint or other contaminants dumped or stored within 7.6 m (25’) of the drip-line of trees and shrubs which are to
remain.
308-7 GUARANTEE. Add following: All 600 mm (24”) box trees installed under the contract shall
be guaranteed to live and grow for one vear from the day of final acceptance of the contract work; All . other plant material, including ground covers, shall be guaranteed to live and grow for a period of 120
days from the last day of the maintenance period or final acceptance of the wntract work, whichever is the later. Any material found to be dead, missing, or in poor condition during the maintenance period
shall be replaced immediately. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to the condition of the
material. Material found to be dead or in poor condition within the guarantee period shall be replaced
by the Contractor, at its expense, within 15 days of written notification. Replacements shall be made
to the same specifications required for the original plantings.
Submit written vegetation, planting and irrigation guarantee in approved form that all work showing defects in materials or workmanship will be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Engineer for a
period of one year from the date of acceptance by the Engineer. The Guarantee form shall be retyped on the Contractor’s letterhead and contain the following verbiage:
G l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 102 of 299 Pages
“Guarantee For Vegetation, Planting and hrigation System For Poinsettia Park Phase I-A
We hereby guarantee that the vegetation, planting and imgation system we have furnished and installed for (project name) is free from defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has
been completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications. We agree to repair or replace
any defect in vegetation, material or workmanship, including that due to ordinary wear and tear,
which may develop during the periods specified in section 308-7 of the Standard Specifications and the Special Provisions of said project from date of completion of the Work or termination of any
maintenance period, whichever is the later, and also to repair or replace any damage resulting from
the repairing or replacing of such defects at no additional cost to the Agency.
This guarantee does not extend to unusual abuse or neglect that may occur subsequent to the bate of completion of the Work or termination of any maintenance period, whichever is the later.
We shall make such repairs or replacements within a reasonable time, as determined by the Engineer, atter receipt of written notice. In the event of failure to make such repairs or replacements within a reasonable time aider receipt of written notice from the Engineer, we authorize the Engineer
to proceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our expense, and we will pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand.
Project: (Project Name)
Location: (Legal Description of Project Property
Name of Contractor:
Address: (Of Contractor) _
Telephone: : (Of Contractor)
SF (Typed or printed names of signing Oi%er(s) of the Contractor authorized to bind the Contractor in legal matters)
Tit/e: (Of said ofHcer(s)) l Signature(s)
Date of Execution?
Add the following section:
308-7.1 Record Drawings. In addition to the requirements of section 2-5.4, herein, the Contractor
shall prepare record drawings that show all changes in the work constituting departures from the
original contract drawings, including those involving both constant-pressure and intermittent-pressure
lines and appurtenances. All conceptual or major design changes shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before implementing the changes in the construction contract. Failure to receive prior
approval may result in rejection of the work. The Contractor shall accurately record, on a daily basis,
on one set of blue line prints of the irrigation drawings, all changes in work constituting departures from the original contract drawings, induding changes in both pressure and nonpressure line. Post
information on record drawings day to day as the work is installed. Record changes and dimensions in a legible and professional manner. When the drawings are approved by the Engineer the Contractor
shall transfer all information to a set of reproducible photo mylar drawings. Items required to be shown shall be dimensioned by the Contractor from two permanent points of reference (buildings,
monuments, sidewalks, curbs, pavement). The accuracy of location of all items to be shown on the
drawings shall be 150 mm (6”) in both the vertical and horizontal planes. All text and numerals placed
on drawings shall be 0.30 mm (V*“) in size. Facilities and items to be located in their horizontal and
vertical positions and shown on the record drawings indude all:
a) Point(s) of connection, for water and electrical services
b) Routing of irrigation pressure mainlines
c) Backflow preventors d) Ball, gate and check valves e) Irrigation control valves. f) Quick coupler valves
g) Routing of service wires
.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 103 of 299 Pages
h) Routing of control wires
i) Electrical service equipment j) Electrical junction boxes
k) Irrigation controllers
I) Sleeves for future connections
m) Other equipment of a similar nature (as directed by the Engineer).
,
@
The blue print drawings are subject to inspection at any time. Make all changes to reproducible
drawings in waterproof black ink (no ball point pen). Changes in dimensions shall be recorded in a
legible and professional manner. Record construction drawings shall be maintained at the job site
during construction. The Contractor shall provide one set of mylar “record” drawings to the Engineer
after submitting blue-line prints of the proposed “record” drawings for, and obtaining their approval by,
the Engineer.
Add the following section:
308-7.2 Controller Chart. Record drawings shall be approved by the Engineer before charts are
prepared. Provide one controller chart of the maximum size controller door will allow, for each controller supplied, showing the area covered by that automatic controller. The chart shall be a
reduction of the actual record system drawing with a legend to explain all symbols. If the controller
sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, enlarge it to a site that will be readable when
reduced. Chart shall be photocopied, with a pastel transparent &Or Used to show area of coverage
for each station. When completed and approved, hermetically seal the chart between two pieces of
plastic, each piece being a minimum 20 mils thick. Charts shall be completed and approved prior to
final inspection of the irrigation system.
Add the following section:
308-7.3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Prepare and deliver to the Engineer, within 10 calendar days prior to completion of construction, all r8qUir8d and necessary descriptive material
in complete detail and sufficient quantity, properly prepared in four individual bound copies. Describe the material installed in sufficient details to permit qualified operating personnel to
understand, operate, and maintain all equipment. include spar8 parts list and related manufacturer
information for each equipment item installed. Each manual shall include the following:
a) Index sheet stating Contractor’s address and t8lephOn8 number.
b) Duration of Guarantee period.
c) List of equipment, with names and addresses of manufacturel’s local representative.
d) Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
8) In addition to the maintenance manuals, provide the maintenance personnel with in&N&ions for
major equipment, and show written evidence to the Engineer at the conclusion of the work that
this service has been rendered.
Add th8 following section: 308-7.4 Check List. Complete the following checklist at the end of the project, using the format
shown: a) Plumbing permits (if none required, so note) b) Materials approval
c) Pressure mainline test (by whom, and date)
d) Record drawings completed (received by, and date)
Q l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 104 of 299 Pages
e) Controller chart completed (received by, and date) 9 Materials furnished (received by, and date)
g) Operation and maintenance manuals furnished (received by, and date) h) System and equipment operation instructions (received by, and date)
i) Manufacturer warranties (received by, and date)
j) Written guarantee by Contractor (received by, and date)
Forward signed and dated checklist to the Engineer befOr final acceptance of project.
30843 Measurement and Payment. add the following: The lump-sum or unit prices set forth in
the contract documents shall include, but not be limited to, full compensation for furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, and equipment and performing all work necessary to complete, maintain, and
guarantee the planting and. irrigation work described or specified in the contract documents, including soils testing and recommended soil amendments, seed and hydroseed slurry, tree stakes, bark mulch, erosion control matting, plant materials, temporary irrigation and permanent irrigation,
including reduced-pressure back-flow preventer, ball valves, drip valve assembly, electric control
valves, quick couplers, control wires, pull boxes, valve boxes, all piping and sleeves, electrical conduits, irrigation heads, drip emitters, bubblers, drip irrigation equipment, connection from
electrical service to irrigation electrical meter, connection from meter to irrigation controller(s),
installation of controller enclosure, concrete pads, preparation, correction, reproduction and
lamination of ‘as-built” drawings, controller charts, assembly and submittal of the check list and
operation and maintenance manuals and all appurtenances to the aforementioned items, as well as
120 days’ maintenance and project guarantees. After completion of the project, the Engineer will retain $12,000 of the total contract amount, and will disburse to the Contractor on a monthly basis of
$3,000 per month. The Engineer reserves the right to-stop payment until all punch list submitted to the Contractor every month are completed.
G l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 105 of 299 Pages
-
ARCHITECTUftAL SPECIFICATIONS
POlNSElTlA PARK
DIVISION 02 - SITE WORK Section 02860
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE Section 03100
Section 03200 Section 03300
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
Section 04220
Section 04221
Section 04270
DIVISION 05 - METALS Section 05120 Section 05500
Section 05580
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Site Furnishings
Concrete Fomork Concrete Reinforcement
Cast-In-Place Concrete
Concrete Unit Masonry
Prefaced Concrete Masonry
Glass Unit Masonry
SblJCtUd St881
Miscellaneous Metals Sheet Metal Fabrication
DIVISION 06 -WOOD AND PLASTIC
Section 06100 Rough Carpentry
Section 06113 Sheathing Paper
Section 06151 Truss Joists
Section 06161 Parallam
Section 06200 Finish Carpentry and Millwork
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07181 Water Repellant Coating
Section 07500 Built-up Roofing
Section 07600 Sheet Metal
Section 07610 Sheet Metal Roofing
Section 07820 Framed Skylights
Section 07900 Caulking and Sealants
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 08100 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Section 08331 Overhead Counter Doors Section08710 Finish Hardware
DIVISION OQ - FINISHES
Section 09200
Section09900
Lath and Plaster
Painting
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10162
Section 10520 Section 10600
Metal Toilet Partitions
Fir8 Extinguishers, Cabinets Toilet Accessories
Contract No. 3348 Page 108 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING
Section 15400 Plumbing
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16010
Section 16060 Section 16111
Section 16123
Section 16130
Section 16141 Section 16170
Section 16190 Section 16195
Section 16470
Section 16500
Basic Electrical Requirements
Minor Electrical Demolition for Remodels
Conduit
Building Wire and Cable
Boxes
Wiring Devices Grounding and Bonding
Supporting Devices Electrical Identification
Panelboards
Lighting
Contract No. 3348 Page 107 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1 .OO - GENERAL
1 .Ol SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 16 Sections, in
addition to Division 1 - General Requirements.
1.02 UTILITY COMPANY SERVICES
A. Contact the serving utility companies prior to submission of bid to confirm utility service requirements.
B. Include in bid costs for trenching, conduit, hand-holes, manholes, excess cable
charges, connection charges, and other requirements of the serving utilities.
C. If s8&8 information is not available from the sewing utility companies, notify the fhgin88r in writing 14 days prior to submitting bid.
D. Unless otherwise indicated in the General or Supplementary Conditions, th8
Contractor-s bid is deemed to include costs related to Utility services.
1.03 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Mounting heights specified and drawn are to the center line of devices and equipment except where noted Otherwise.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. .
B. NETA ATS - Acceptance testing specifications for electrical power distribution
equipment and systems.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Shop brawings: Submit six (6) sets.
1. Make shop drawings to scale, showing overall dimensions and other
dimensions required proper installation of equipment. Identify clearly each item on drawings to show piece of equipment it represents. Indicate corrosion
resisting treatment and finish.
2. Provide drawings with title block identifying project name, specification section, responsible contractor, and name of preparer.
?a l/06/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 108 of 299 Pages
a
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Product Data: Submit six (8) copies of catalog cuts or manufacturers- data she&. For circuit breakers, include full size (10, x 16- with 9, x ll- log-log graph) time
current characteristic curves. For fuses, Include minimum melting time/total clearing
time characteristic curves. For panelboards, distribution panels, and distribution
boards, show size, number of poles, trip rating of each circuit breaker, and circuit
numbering system. For panelboards, show width of top, bottom, and side wireways,
method of attaching circuit identification markers, characteristics of each type of
circuit breaker, and details of circuit breaker locking device:
Wiring Diagrams: Submit six (6) sets of wiring diagrams. Schematic, line to line type,
using standard symbols and with components arranged in logical sequence, so that system operation can be checked easily. Where special symbols are used or where
function of components is not obvious, include suitable legend or functional guide. Number all terminals for external wiring connections on diagrams.
Make submittals sufficiently complete to show compliance with specified features and
standards.
Coordinated Installation Drawings: Show all equipment in affected space or room.
Indicate required workspace. Show plan view and elevations.
Field Test Reports:
1. When specified in individual specification sections, submit three copies of field
t8St reports for record pUrpOS8S.
2. Indicate methods, procedures and instruments used.
3. Identify deficiencies discovered and corrective action taken.
1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Provide in acceptable form, two (2) bound copies of operating manuals. Include:
1. Where required in their respective technical Sections for equipment and
systems: PrOVid8 c&log cuts, functional description of operation, wiring
diagrams, operating and maintenance instructions, parts lists and other data
useful and necessary for complete maintenance and operation of equipment.
For signal systems, also include system diagrams showing interconnections
between various units, terminal markings at each unit, and schematic
diagrams of each typical component, such as amplifier, power supply, tuner,
etc.
2. Corrected copies of all submittals.
B. Deliver operating manuals to Engineer prior to final acceptance.
Contract No. 3348 Page 109 of 299 Pages
DIVISION ;6 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to:
1. California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code;
2. California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 3, California Electrical Code;
3. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction including Standard Special Provisions, latest adopted edition and or City of San Diego Standard
Drawings Dot. 769796 Dated April 23,1992;
4. NFPA-70.
B. When conflict exists between two or more governing codes, comply with the stricter
requirement.
C. Obtain permits, and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
Coordinate installation of work in available space with work specified in other
Sections.
B. Propose rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to
Work specified in other Sections. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement when requested by Engineer. Obtain permission of Engineer before
proceeding.
1.09 PRODUCTS
A. Where manufacturer-s model or series numbers are specified or shown, these
indicate generally acceptable types required. Furnish products which comply with all
requirements, as specified or shown.
B. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, provide units produced by a single manufacturer.
1.10 TESTS
A. Furnish test equipment, facilities, and technical personnel required to perform field
tests.
B. At completion of job, check voltage at several points of utilization on the system. Energize all loads installed.
a 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 110 of 299 Pages
DIVISIGN 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1 .ll CLEANING
A. After other work such as sanding, painting, etc., has been completed, clean lighting
fixtures, panelboards, switchboards and other electrical equipment to remove dust, dirt, grease, or other marks, and leave work in clean condition.
2.00 PRODUCTS
Not Used
3.00 EXECUTION
Not Used
1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 111 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL.
SECTION 16060 7 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELS
1.00 GENERAL
1 .Ol SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical demolition.
-
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01120 - Alteration Project Procedures.
8. Section 02072 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling.
.2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.
B.
C.
Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing
documents. Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation.
D. Examine panelboards and distribution equipment affected by the work for
defective conditions and report such conditions to Owner.
E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for
removal.
C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in
service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.
Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system
is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make sv@chovers and
connections. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary
connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
1 I08198 I Contract No. 3348 Page 112 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION .16060 - MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELS -
3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK .
A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Section 01120, Section 02072, and this Section.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
6.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed.
Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.
Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories.
Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.
Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified.
Maintain continuity of circuits which remain in service.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean existing materials and equipment which are to be reused. Report damage or defects to the Engineer.
B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Section 01120.
II,
‘3 l/08/98 Contract.No. 3348 Page 113 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT
1 .OO GENERAL
’ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal conduit. . . :
B. Flexible metal conduit
‘C. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit.
0: Electrical metallic tubing.
E. Nonmetallic conduit.
F. Fittings and conduit ‘bodies.
._ ‘G. Pull Line.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16130 i Boxes.
B. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding.
C. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.
D. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
?
ts ? /08/98
ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and
Cable Assemblies.
NECA -Standard of Installation.
NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).
NEMA TC 8 - Extra-strength PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation.
NEMA TC 9 - Fittings for ABS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground
Installation.
Contract No. 3348
\’ 4B
Page 114 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT
1.64 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Dimension location of feeder conduits to permanent above ground structure or to
column lines.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
2.00 PRODUCTS --
2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Underground Installations
1. Outside Building Foundation: Use encased burial duct and Schedule 40 PVC
in concrete encasement; use PVC-coated rigid steel conduit and.Schedule 40 PVC for direct burial.
2. Under Slab on Grade: Use Schedule 40 PVC and PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.
3. Use PVC coated metal conduit for bends greater than 30 degrees in conduits one inch trade size and larger, except where not allowed by the serving utility
company.
B. Exposed Wet Locations: Use rigid steel and intermediate metal conduit.
C. Exposed Dry and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit, below
switch height and electrical metallic tubing above switch height, except that electrical metallic tubing may be used below switch height in designated equipment rooms and
closets, utility chases, and similar locations.
0. Concealed Locations:
1. Furred, Elevated Under floor, Ceiling Spaces and Stud and Masonry Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing.
2. Concrete Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing ,and Schedule 40.
3. Connections to Lighting Fixtures in Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible conduit.
aD
‘3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 115 of 299 Pages
DlVlSlON 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT
E. Equipment Connections:
1. Damp and Wet Locations and For Connections to Liquid-Handling Equipment in Dry Locations: Use liquid-tight flexible conduit.
2. Equipment for Dry Systems in Dry Locations: Use flexible conduit.
METAL CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1; threaded, hotdipped galvanized, including threads,
with protective coating on inside and outside.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (I‘MC): Threaded, zinc-coated rigid steel.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:
1. ANSllNEMA FBl.
2. Rigid Steel Conduit and IMC: Use threaded steel or malleable iron fittings.
2.03 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 40 mil thick.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating and overlapping PVC sleeves to match conduit.
2.64 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Zinc-coated, interlocked steel construction.
B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron clamp or squeeze type, or pressure
cast screw-in type. Do not use die-cast, set-screw, or sheet metal screw-in type.
2.05 LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Galvanized interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron, watertight type.
2.06 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: ANSI C80.3; zinc-coated tubing with protective enamel coating on inside.
‘# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 110 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:
1. ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2. Concrete-tight steel or malleable iron, or pressure-cast body with steel or
malleable iron nuts.
C. Use compression type for 2 inch trade size and smaller, use compression or set-screuY
type for 2-112 inch trade size and larger.
2.07 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Schedule 40 PVC: NEMA TC 2.
B. Encased Burial Duct: NEMA TC 8; EB Thick wall.
C. Fittings:
1. NEMA TC 9 for EB duct.
2.08 PULL LINE
A. l/8 inch diameter braided yellow polypropylene.
2.09 DUCT SEALING COMPOUND
A. Manufacturers:
1. Blackburn
2. llsw
3. 0-ZGedney
B. Description:’ Pliable, non-hardening, paintable, service temperature to -40’ F.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.-
8. Do not combine individual homeruns into wmmon conduit.
C. Handle and install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 117 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 1’6 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16111- CONDUIT
D. Conduit Supports: . _
1.
2.
Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
Support individual conduits using spring steel clips, coated steel or malleable
iron straps, pre-formed steel supports, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis
hangers, and split hangers.
3. Group related conduits in exposed and accessible locations. Support using
conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel.
4. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190.
5. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used
for temporary supports
6. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
E. Arrange wnduit to maintain headrpom and present neat appearance.
F. Conduit Routing:
1. Route exposed conduit and conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
2. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
3. Route conduits to clear access openings.
G. Make transition from non-metallic conduit under slab to metallic wndult entirely within slab.
H. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
I. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures
exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).
1. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
2. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
3. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer.
Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat
of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
4. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to cast boxes.
e
w l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 118 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT
5. Bends:
a. Install no more than equivalent of four 90 degree bends between
boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as
around beams.
b.
C.
d.
8.
“. f.
h.
i.
j.
k.
I.
-_
m.
1 I08198
PVC Coated Metal Conduit: Use factory made 90 degree and 45
degree bends; where field bends are required, use standard bender of
next larger size, and protect section of conduit to be bent with Kraft
paper wrap.
Non-metallic Conduit: Use factory made 90 degree and 45 degree
bends; where field bends are required, use electric heat box or hot air
blower designed specifically for bending PVC conduit.
Metal Conduit Larger than 2 inch Trade Size: Use factory elbows or fabricate bends with hydraulic one-shot bender.
Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic, control and expansion joints.
Provide pull line in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
Leave 8 inches of slack at each outlet. Identify pull line under provisions of Section 16195.
Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt
and moisture.
Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170.
Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195.
Provide insulated equipment ground conductor in flexible conduit.
Make conduit penetrations of exterior concrete or masonry walls below
grade, and of floor slabs on fill below grade, watertight.
Seal underground conduits terminating inside building below grade after
installation of conductors; install plugs or caps in such spare (unused)
conduits.
Provide chromium plated escutcheons on each exposed conduit
penetrating floor, wall or ceiling in finished spaces.
Contract No. 3348 Page 119 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16111- CONDUIT -
n. Termination of Conduit Stubs:
(1) Underground and Flush With Finish Float: Use coupling and
threaded plug.
(2) Above Floor: Use conduit bushing.
(3) Signal Systems: Use conduit bushing.
3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRdDUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
G 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 120 of 299 Pages
DIVISION i6 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16123 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
1 .OO - GENERAL
1 .Ol SECTION INCLUDES
A. Building wire and cable.
B. Wiring wnnectors and connections.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16111 - Conduit.
B. Section 16130 - Boxes.
C. Section 16195 - Identification.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Submit under provisions of Section 01340.
Manufacturer-s Installation Instructions; Watertight splice kits.
C. Field Test Reports: Torque measurements. Indicate location of connection; measured
tightness and manufacturer-s recommended values.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish products listed and classified by UndeMlriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
2.00 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
A. Description: Single conductor, insulated wire.
B. Conductor
1. Qwper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THHWHWN for sizes 2 and smaller, Type XHHW for sizes #l and larger.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 121 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16123- BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
2.02 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Spring Wire Connectors: Corrosion-resistant, live-action spring in insulated shell,
105Oc.
B. Compression Connectors and Lugs: Circumferential (non-indenter) type.
C. Watertight Splice Kits: Epoxy resin or shrinkable type suitable for the type, size
and number of conductors being spliced.
3.00 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. Do not use mechanical means to pull
conductors #I8 AWG and smaller.
Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
Neatly train wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no
perceptible temperature rise.
Use hardened and tempered steel, tin-plated or stainless steel Belleville washer with
slightly larger tin-plated mild steel flat washer for aluminum lugs.
Use compression connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and
larger. Use compression tool designed for the size and type of connector being
compressed.
Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and
taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
Make underground splices watertight.
3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Identify and wlor code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195.
B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings.
a. 1 JO8198 Contract No. 3348 Page 122 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16123 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
C. Make connections to equipment and devices so that phase conductors are in the same
relative position and phase sequence runs left to right, front to rear, or top to bottom,
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with
manufacturer-s recommended values.
G l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 123 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16130 - BOXES
1.00 - GENERAL
1 .Ol SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
B. Pull and junction boxes.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
B. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box
supports.
C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
1.03 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
Dimension actual locations and mounting heights pullboxes larger than 4 1 l/16
inches square.
1.64 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable fo
purpose specified and shown.
1.05 PROJECT CONDlTlONS
A.
B.
Verify location of floor boxes and outlets prior to rough-in.
Boxes are shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at
location required for box to serve intended purpose.
2.00 - PRODUCTS
2.01 OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanlzed steel.
1. Device, Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Minimum 4 inch square; 1 0 inches deep when used with 7/8 inch for strips, minimum l- inches deep
eigewhere; rated for weight of equipment supported; include _ inch male fixture
studs where required.
2. Concrete Boxes: 4 inch octagonal.
B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. -.
Contract No. 3348 Page 124 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16130 - BOXES
2.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, screw cover, minimum 4 inch square and l-112
inches deep galvanized steel or gray baked enamel finish.
B. Surface-Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box.
1. Material: Cast aluminum.
2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel
- cover screws.
3.00 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1 I08198
Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire
pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical
appearance.
Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished
areas only.
Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches
from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements; arrange boxes to meet regulatory requirements.
Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar
devices with each other.
Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas.
Do not use through-walls boxes or install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls;
provide minimum 6 inch separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.
Use stamped steel bridges or bar hanger assemblies to fasten flush mounting outlet
box between studs.
Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its
effectiveness.
Contract No. 3348 Page 125 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16130 - BOXES *
L. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
M. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. e
N.
0.
Support sheet metal boxes independently of conduit.
Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together, including floor
boxes. Do not use sectional box.
P. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
Q. Use masonry boxes with square comers in tile, marble, brick or concrete block.
R. Plaster Rings: Use for all concealed work except for masonry boxes; depth of rings as
required to reach finished surfaces.
3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit comer
only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
B. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters,
benches and back splashes.
C.
D.
Position outlet boxes to locate luminaries as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
Coordinate trimming of openings for outlet boxes in partitions to achieve neat,
closely-fitting openings.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material.
B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
C. Install knockout closure in unused box opening.
Contract No. 3348 Page 126 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16141. - WIRING DEVICES
1.00 - GENERAL
1 .Ol SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall switches.
B. Receptacles.
C. Device plates and decorative box covers.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
2.00 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WALL SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
::
3.
4.
5.
S:
Arrow Hart 4900 1990 Series. Series.
Bryant General Electric GE 5900 Series.
Hubbell 1220 Series
Leviton 1221 Series.
Pass and Seymour 20 ACI Series.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Description: Specification grade, quiet type, AC only general-use snap switch.
C. Device Body: Ivory plastic with toggle handle.
D. Locator Light: Lighted handle type switch; ivory wlor handle.
E. Voltage Rating: 120-277 volts, AC.
F. Current Rating: 20 amperes.
2.02 RECEPTACLES
A. Duplex Convenience Receptade, Type 520R, Specification Grade:
:: Arrow Hart #I5362 Bryant #5382
:: General Electric #GE 4108.
Hubbell #!5362.
5. Leviton ##5362. 6. Pass and Seymour #5362.
p3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 127 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16141 -WIRING DEVICES
B. GFCI Receptacle, Type 5-20R, Specification Grade: _ .
1. Arrow Hart #GF5342.
z:
Bryant #GFR53.
General Electric #GF-5342.
4. Hubbell ##GF-5362
5. Leviton #I6598
6. Pass and Seymour #1591 -S.
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630.
D. Device Body: Ivory plastic.
2.03 WALL PLATES
A. Decorative Cover Plate:
1. Smooth stainless steel.
2. Manufacturer: Same as wiring device.
B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover.
Provide separately operable cover for each half of duplex receptacles.
C. Provide blank plates wiring device plates.
3.00 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
for telephone, television outlets. Use same manufacturer as
e
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer-s instructions.
B. Install devices plumb, level, and rigidly in place.
C. Install switches with OFF position down, 2 inches to 8 inches from trim on the strike
side of door.
C. Install wail dimmers to achieve power rating required for load shown on drawings.
D. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
E. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.
e 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 128 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16141 - WIRING DEVICES
F. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding
conductor.
G.
H.
Install switched receptacles with top half switched.
Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas,
Use multi-gang plates for multiple devices.
I. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
J. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
K. Install gaivanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas,
above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting
heights indicated on Drawings.
8. Identify receptacles under provisions of Section 16195.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wail plates to be flush and level.
4B #m w 1 IO8198 Contract No. 3348 Page 129 of 299 Pages
DNISION 16 -+ ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16170 - GROUNDING AND BONDING .__
1.00 - GENERAL
1 .Ol SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grounding electrodes and conductors.
B. Equipment grounding conductors.
C. Bonding.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.-.
1.03 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
A. Concrete-encased electrode.
B. Rod electrode.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: Maximum 25 ohms.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Test Reports:
1. ~ Indicate overall resistance to ground of the grounding electrode system and resistance of each electrode.
2. Indicate test method and equipment used.
C. Manufacturer-s Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation and installation of exothermic connectors.
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes, locations of
grounding electrode connections, and routing of grounding electrode conductors.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
Contract No. 3348 Page 130 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16170 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
2.00 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ROD ELECTRODE
A. Material: Copper-clad steel.
B. Diameter: _ inch.
C. Length: 10 feet.
2.02 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A. Cable to cable or bus: Copper.
BT Cable to rod, pipe, or bar. Bronze.
2.03 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS .
A. Low-emission, electric-starting type.
2.64 WIRE
A.
B.
Grounding Electrode: Bare stranded copper.
Grounding Electrode and Equipment Grounding Conductors: Under the provisions of Section 16123.
3.00 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to
the grounding electrode system.
B. Provide communications system grounding conductor at point of service entrance and connect to nearest effectively grounded metallic water pipe.
C. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated.
E. Use mechanical connections in above ground accessible locations; use exothermic connectors in underground and inaccessible locations.
F. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. include bonding of metallic gas and sprinkler piping systems.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument - manufacturer’s recommendations using the fail-of-potential method.
G l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 131 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES
1 .OO - GENERAL
1 .Ol SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and equipment supports.
B. Anchors and fasteners.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide support systems adequate for weight’ of equipment and conduit,
including wiring, which they carry with a minimum safety factor of 4. For empty
conduits, include weight of 4 type XHHW wires of maximum permissible size.
2.00 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A Anchors and Fasteners:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
7.
2.02 MATERIAL
Concrete Structural Elements: Use pm-cast insert system, expansion
anchors, and pm-set inserts.
Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps and steel ramset fasteners.
Concrete Surfaces: Use selfdrtlling anchors and expansion anchors.
Hollow Masonry, Plaster and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts
and hollow wall fasteners.
Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts.
Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws and spring steel bar retainer clips.
Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
A. Support Channel: Galvanized or painted steel.
B. Hardware: Corrosion resistant.
3.00 - EXECUTION
a 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 132 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES e 3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
8.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer-s instructions.
Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA -Standard of
InstallationT.
Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
Obtain permission from Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.
Obtain permission from Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.
Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members
or use hexagon lead bolts to present a neat appearance. Use spring lock
washers under ail nuts.
Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
In wet and damp locations, use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and
panelboards one inch off wall.
Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and
panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.
a e 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 133 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL ,
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
1 .OO -$ENERAL
1 .Ol SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates.
B. Wire and cable markers.
C. Raceway and pull rope markers.
D. Warning signs.
2.00 - PRODUCTS
2.01 NAMEPLATES
A. Engraved three-layer laminated plastic; white letters on black background for normal power systems and on red background for emergency power systems.
B. inch letters for equipment designation; 3/6 inch letters for subsidiary information.
2.02 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS
A. Plastic impregnated cloth or epoxy film markers, split sleeve, or tubing type.
2.03 BOX AND PULL LINE MARKERS
A. Cloth, vinyl or paper with vinyl overlay.
2.04 WARNING SIGNS
A. Multiple Services: Engraved three layer laminated plastic; one inch high white
letters on red background.
B. Series Rated Devices: Engraved three layer laminated plastic; _ inch high white letters on red background.
3.00 - EXECUTION --
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.
B. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws or rivets.
e . w l/08/98 . Contract No. 3348 Page 134 of 299 Paps
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished
locations.
Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection.
Color code conductors at accessible locations.
Use wire with insulation of required wlor. For sizes of wire, which may not be
available in specified wiors use self-adhesive wrap around, markers of solid
wlors to wlor wde conductors.
Make wior coding for signal system such as fire alarm, intercommunication, etc., in accordance with programs or schedules prepared by the equipment
manufacturer.
Use same wior throughout a given system for any signal or control wires
performing the same function.
Use wlored tape to identify conduit by system. Apply tape to each length of
conduit installed above grade so that at least one marker is located between any
two couplings.
Mark outside of wver plates of junction boxes installed in exposed or accessible
ceilings to identify circuits present with black permanent marker. For signal
systems, identify system by name.
Mark inside of wiring device cover plates to identlfy circuits present with black
permanent marker. For signal systems, identify system by name.
Affix lab81 at each end of pull line identifying termination point.
Provide warning signs to meet Regulatory Requirements and as shown.
3.03 SCHEDULE
A. Conductors:
1. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting
circuits. If more than one neutral conductor is present, mark each with related circuit numbers.
2. Color code all secondary branch circuit and feeder conductors. For two
wire grounded system, use one black, one white (neutral); three wire, single phase, grounded system, use one black, one red, one white
(neutral); four wire, three phase, ,grounded wye system, use one black,
one red, one blue,. one whit8 (neutral) for 120/208 volt systems and us8 one brown, one orange, one yellow and one gray (neutral) for 277/480 volt systems.
# 1 IO8198 Contract No. 3348 , Page 135 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION _
3. Use green color for any conductor intended solely for equipment grounding, unless it is bare.
B. Nameplates:
1. Panelboards and Main Switchboard: Identify equipment designation,
VObg8 rating and sourc8.
2. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Main Switchboard: Identify
circuit, source of supply and load SW&~, including location.
3. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters:
Identify load served and sourw ofsupply.
4. Light Switches Not in Sight of Fixtures They Control: Identify location of
light fixtures controlled.
5. Tenninal Cabinets: Identify system and designation.
6. Engraving on d8ViC8 plates with black enamel filled l8tt8ring is aCC8ptabl8
in lieu of separate nameplates.
Conduit:
1. 208 Volt, Single and Three Phase System: Dark Blue.
2. 480 Volt, Three Phase System: Yellow.
3. Motor and Other Control Systems: Brown.
4. Telephone System: Black.
5. Data System: white
6. Intercom System: Light Blue
7. Grounding: Green
Q 1 IO8198 Contract No. 3348 Page 136 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS
a
1 .OO - GENERAL
1 .Ol WORK INCLUDED
A. Lighting and appliance branch circuit pan8lbOardS.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NEMA PB 1 - Pan8lbOatdS
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Su6mit shop drawings and product data for equipment and component devices under provisions of Section 01340.
B. include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, short
circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker arrangement and sizes, and locking device.
1.04 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit corrected copies of submittal data under provisions of Section 01700.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish products listed and classified by UndeNvriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.06 SPARE PARTS
A. Keys: Furnish 5 each to Owner.
2.00 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES - PANELBOARDS
A. Cutler Hammer
B. General Electric
C. Square D
D. D-E
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630.
2.02 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Enclosure: NEMA PB-1; Type 1.
Cabinet Size: 6 inches deep; 20 inches wide.
Contract No. 3348 Page 137 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTICN 16470 - PANELBOARDS
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Provide surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge and
flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer-s standard gray enamel.
Provide panelboards with tin plated aluminum bus, ratings as scheduled on
Drawings extending full height of panel. Provide copper ground bus in all
panelboards. Provide neutral bus with terminals for each circuit in the panel,
including future circuits.
Minimum Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208 volt
panelboards. Where higher values are shown on Drawings, meet or exceed th8
higher values.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Bolt-on type ambient-compensated thermal
magnetic trip circuit breakers, with factory assembled wmmon trip handle for multiple pole units. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for lighting
circuits. Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where
scheduled on Drawings.
Current Limiting Moided Case Circuit Breakers: Provide circuit breakers
designed to limit short circuit currents by using opposing magnetic fields to open
breaker contacts.
Time Clock or Contactor Compartment; Separated from the panelboard by a
steel barrier of th8 same gauge as the cabinet housing and equipped with a hinged, lockable door separate from that supplied for the circuit breaker
compartment.
Provide lugs with approved connectors for size of conductors feeding panel.
Provide double lugs and extra gutter space for parallel feeder conductors.
Provide padlockable lockout devices for branch circuit breakers as shown on the drawings. Do not use devices removable from front of panel.
3.00 - EXECUTION
. 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards plumb. Install flush mounted panelboards flush with wall
finishes.
B. Height: 6 ft. to top of panel.
C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
0. Provide typed circuit directory in plastic holder for each branch circuit
panelboard.
E. Stub one inch conduit to accessible location above ceiling out of each
recessed panelboard for each 3 spares or spaces.
Contract No. 3348 Page 138 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol SECTION INCLUDES
A. Lighting fixtures.
B. Ballasts.
C. Lamps.
D. Fixture aCWSSOrieS.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16130 - Boxes.
B. Section 18141 - Wiring Devices.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. California Energy Commission (CEC) P400-92-005 - Nonresidential Manual for
Compliance with the 1992 Energy Efficiency Standards.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Product Data: Indicate dimensions, components, ratings, and performance data
for each lighting fixture.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of S8ction 01700.
B. Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts list, instructions for maintaining
luminaire, and corrected copies of submittals.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish products listed and classified by UndeMlriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Provide two of each plastic lens.
C. Provide two spare lamps of each type and wattage installed.
D. Provide tW0 Of 8aCh ballast $438.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 139 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING
2.00 - PRODUCTS ,...
2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Furnish products as specified in Schedule and on Drawings.
B. Install ballasts and specified accessories at factory.
C. Furnish fluorescent fixtures certified by the California Energy Commission as
meeting California minimum efficiency standards.
D. Furnish fixtures complete with accessories, end caps, trim, plaster frames,
yokes, hangers, etc., required for specific installation.
E. Furnish tandem wiring in accordance with regulatory requirements. Use
pre-manufactured cables of the same manufacture as affected luminaires. Use
factory-installed connectors.
2.02 BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent Ballast:
:*
3:
4.
Magnetek-Triad. Description: Class P. electronic.
Provide ballast suitable for lamps specified.
Voltage: As indicated.
C. Provide ballasts with maximum input watts, including lamps, not exceeding
typical values stated in CEC P400-92-005.
2.03 LAMPS
A. Manufacturers:
:.
3:
General Osram. Electric.
Philips.
4. Sylvania.
5. Venture. 6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630.
B. Provide lamp type specified on drawings for luminaire.
3.00 - EXECUTION
3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDlTlONS
A. Verify ceiling construction; coordinate with luminaire trim and accessories.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 140 of 299 Pages
. e
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16500 -. LIGHTING
a 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J. a K.
L. Install specified lamps in each luminaire.
Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers.
Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing.
Locate luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan and on architectural
elevations.
Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines
and with each other. Secure to prohibit movement.
Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet
regulatory requirements for fire rating.
Install wall mounted luminaires at height shown on Drawings.
Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation
suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire.
Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding
conductor.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust Work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed.
C. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. .
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean Work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
C.
D.
E.
Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
Clean finishes and touch up damage.
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 141 of 299 Paps
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 02880 - SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .Ol WORK INCLUDED
A. Park Bench
B. Litter Container
C. Basket Ball Backstop
D. Bicycle Rack
E. Baseball Field Bleachers
F. Baseball Field Players Bench
G. Drinking Fountain
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 201 - Mortar and Related Materials
B. Section 303 - Concrete and Masonry Construction
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS ’
A. AWPA - LP-20.
B. WWPA.
C. CLMA.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer’s published product information, catalogs, and installation
instructions to Engineer for review.
8. Submit small samples of material finishes where options are available, and no
selection has been specified.
C. Submit complete shop drawings, layout indicating installation details and
accessories.
4%
w l/08/98 Contract No. 3348
.
Page 142 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
SECTION 02860 - SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Recreation equipment and playground equipment shall conform to most recent
edition of UBC, ADA; and general safety standards designed to assure public
safety.
B. Wood and metal surfaces are to be free of splinters, sharp edges, protrusions, and
loose objects.
C. Where warnings are posted or attached to equipment, verbiage is to be printed in
both the English and Spanish languages.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate soil preparation and paving with other trades.
B. Inspect surfaces and conditions which will affect equipment and its function.
C. Acceptance of surfaces and conditions will be assumed it work of Section is
commenced.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s published, printed recommendations
and instructions, and reviewed shop drawings.
B. Anchor assemblies in permanent fashion to prevent overturning, for safety and
vandal-resistance.
C. Inspect all equipment for sharp edges, burrs, splinters, and harmful projections. .
D. Adjust and correct as required.
*
Q l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 143 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
1 .oo GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General
Requirements”, shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work Included in this Section:
1.
i:
Concrete Formwork.
Form Sealers.
Form Tiis.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
::
Cast-in-Place Concrate.
Concrete Reinforcement.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design of formwork is the Contractor’s responsibility.
B. Standards:
1. Comply with pertinent provisions of ACI 347.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A Product Data:
1. Within thirty (30) calendar days after award of Contract, submit manufacturer’s
data and installation instructions for proprietary materials including form
coatings, ties, and accessories, and manufactured form systems if used.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Use means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect the work and materials of other trades.
B. In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the City.
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 144 of 299 Pages a
0 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Except for metal forms use new materials. Materials may be reused during progress of the Work, provided they are completely cleaned and reconditioned, rewated for
each use, and capable of producing form work of the required quality.
Footings and Foundations:
1. Use Douglas Fir boards or planks secured to wood or steel stakes,
substantially constructed to shapes indicated and to support the required
loads.
Studs, Walls and Supports:
1. Use standard grade or better Douglas Fir, dimensions as required to support the loads, but not less than 2” x 4”.
Wall Forms, Exposed Concrete Surfaces:
1.
2.
Use 3/4” minimum thickness Douglas Fir plywood, grade B/B, Class I or II, exterior, sanded both sides, complying with PS l-74.
Seal edges and coat both faces with wlorless coating which will not affect
application of applied finishes.
Form boards for wncrete impressions shall be as detailed and noted in the
Drawings.
2.02 FORM SEALERS
A. All form sealers used shall be non-staining, non-grain raising, free of mineral oils and
other nondrying ingredients, and leaving no bond-inhibiting residues on concrete.
Approved form sealer is:
.
1. “Form Sealer”, Burke Concrete Accessories, Inc.
.- Contract No. 3348 Page 145 of 299 Pages
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 146 of 299 Pages m
DIVISION 03-0 CONCRETE
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
2.03 FORM TIES
A. Hold inner and outer forms for vertical wncrete together with combination steel
ties and spreaders.
2.04
. 1. Space ties symmetrically in tiers and rows, each tier plumb from top to
bottom and each row level.
2. At horizontal pour lines, locate ties not more than 6” below the pour lines. Tighten after concrete has set and before the next pour is made.
3. Provide metal type acting as spreaders and leaving no metal within 1” of
concrete faceor fractures, spalls, depressions, or other surface
disfigurations greater than 3/4” in dlameter.
DESIGN OF FORMWORK
A. General:
Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork so it will safely
support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied, until such loads
can be supported by the concrete structure.
Carry vertical and lateral loads to ground by formwork system and in-place wnstructionthat has attained adequate strength for that
purpose. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct
size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Design forms and falsework to include assumed values of live load, dead
load, weight of moving equipment operated on the formwork, wncrete mix, height of concrete drop, vibrator frequency, ambient stability, and
other factors pertinent to safety of the structure during construction.
Provide shores and struts with positive means of adjustment capable of
taking-up forrnwork settlement during concrete placing operations, using
wedges or jacks or a combination thereof.
Provide trussed supports when adequate foundations for shores and
struts can not be secured.
Support form materials by structural members spaced sufficiently close
to prevent objectionable deflection.
Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate
alignment, free from irregularities, and within the allowable tolerances.
Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste
during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and .provide back-up
material at joints as required to prevent leakage and fins.
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
2.05 EARTH FORMS
A. Side forms of footings may be omitted and concrete may be placed directly
against excavation only when requested by the Contractor and approved by the
City.
1. When omission of forms is accepted, provide additional concrete 1” on
each side of the minimum design profiles and dimensions shown on the
Drawings.
2.06 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other form materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and
subject to the approval of the City.
1. The use of ties consisting of twisted wire loops will not be permitted.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely wmpletion of
the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions, have been corrected.
3.02 FORM CONSTRUCTION
A. General:
1.
2.
Construct forms wmplying with ACI 347 to the exact sizes, shapes,
lines, and dimensions shown, and as required to obtain accurate
alignment, location, grades, and level and plumb work in the finished
StlUCtU~.
Provide for openings, offsets, keyways, recesses, moldings, reglets,
chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, inserts, and other features required.
B. Fabrication:
1.
2.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against
concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast wncrete surfaces.
a e. l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 147 of 299 Pages
DlVlSlON 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
a 3. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to
prevent swelling and assure ease of removal.
4. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces.
C. Forms for exposed concrete:
1. Drill forms to suit ties used and to prevent leakage of cement paste
around tie holes. Do not splinter fours by driving ties through improperly prepared holes.
2. Provide sharp, clean wmers at intersecting lanes, without visible edges
or offsets. Back the joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true,
square intersections.
3. Use extra studs, wales, and bracing to prevent objectionable bowing of
forms between studs and to avoid bowed appearance in concrete. Do
not use narrow strips of form material which will produce bow.
D. Comer Treatment:
1.
2.
Form chamfers only where specifically noted on Drawings, with 3/4” x 3/4” strips, accurately formed and surfaced to produce uniformly straight
lines and tight edge joints on exposed concrete.
Extend terminal edges to required limit, and miter chamfer strips at changes in direction,
E.
F.
Locate expansion and construction control joints as indicated on the Drawings. a
Provisions for Other Trades:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other
trades.
Verify size and location of openings, recesses, and chases with the
trade requiring such items.
Accurately place and securely support items to be built into the forms.
Electrical or telephone conduits shall be run in concrete walls only upon approval of the Engineer.
No wood other than necessary nailing blocks shall be embedded in
concrete. Install dovetail anchor slots for masonry veneer, which will be
furnished by the Masonry Contractor. Install dovetail slots 16” O.C.
3.03 FORM COATINGS
A. Coat form surfaces with form-coating compound before reinforcement is
placed.
e l/08/98. Contract No. 3348 Pags 148 of 299 Pages a
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
3.04
1. Do not allow excess form coating material to accumulate in the forms to
to wme in contact with surfaces which will bond to fresh concrete.
2. Apply in compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. General:
1.
2.
3. 4.
::
Do not disturb or remove forms until the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to permit form removal with safety. In no case may any
forms or shoring be removed until the time and sequence has been
approved by the Engineer.
Do not remove shoring until the member has acquired sufficient strength
to support its own weight, the load upon it, and the added load of
construction.
Do not strip floor slabs in less than two (2) days.
Do not strip vertical concrete in less than seven (7) days. Do not strip joists, beams, and girders in less than fifteen days. Nothing herein shall be construed as relieving the Contractor of any
responsibility for the safety of the structure.
B. Finished Surfaces:
1’.
2.
Exercise care in removing forms from finished concrete surfaces so that
such surfaces are not marred or gouged, and that wmers are true,
sharp, and unbroken.
Release sleeve nuts or clamps, and pull the form ties neatly.
C. Form Ties:
1.
2.
3.
Do not permit steel spreaders, form ties, or other metal to project from or
be visible on any concrete surface except where so indicated on the
Drawings.
Solidly pack fom, tie holes, rod holes, and similar holes in the concrete.
For packing, use the cement grout specified in Section 03300 of these
Specifications. Flush the holes with water before packing. Screed off
flush and grind to match adjacent surfaces.
Where form tie pattern on exposed wncrete is required by the Drawings,
grout and seal the interior holes prior to sandblasting or application of
other finish, allowing adequate space for insertion of the approved plugs.
@ a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 149 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
3.05 PROTECTION
A. General:
1. After stripping, Contractor shall properly protect all concrete to be
exposed in the finish work from damage with boards and building paper to prevent staining, spoiled edges, chips, etc.
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 150 of 299 Pages a
0 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
1.00
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDlTlONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General
Requirements”, shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
SCOPE OF WORK
.A. Work included in this Section:
1. Steel Reinforcement and Accessories.
8. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
::
3.
Concrete Formwork.
Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete Unit Masonry.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the following, except as may be modified herein:
1. ACI 318;
2. CRSI “Manual of Standard Practice”.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Upon request. of the City’s testing agency, deliver to that testing
agency complete manufacturer’s data showing heat number and mill analyses of
reinforcement delivered to the job site.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A. An experienced foreman shall be constantly employed by the Contractor while the
work is in progress. Sufficient laborers and mechanics shall be on the job during
working hours to provide for the expedient unloading, storage, transferring, and
placing of the reinforcing.
a a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 151 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
B. Protection: Use means necessary to protect the materials of this Section
before, during, and after installation, and to protect the work and materials of
other trades.
C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and
replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer and at no additional
cost to the City.
D. Delivery and Storage:
1.
2.
Use necessary precautions to maintain identification after bundles are
broken. Do not remove tags until steel is placed.
Store in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling with dirt, grease, and other bond-breaking coatings.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCEMENT MATERlALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Bars: Comply with ASTM A615:
1. Use grades shown on the Drawings.
2. Where grades are not shown on the Drawings, use grade 40.
B. Steel wire: Comply with ASTM A82.
C. Welded wire fabric: Comply with ASTM A185, 6” x 6YWl.4 x W1.4 unless
noted otherwise.
D. Supports for reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement in place:
1. . Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations,
unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
f : Do not use wood, brick, or other non-complying material. For slabs on grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners
where base material will not support chair legs.
4. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in
contact with forms, provide supports with approved plastic protected
legs.
1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 152 of 299 Pages a
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
I)
SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
2.02 FABRICATION
3.60
a 3.01
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and
dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with the CRSI Manual.
2. In case of fabricating errors, do not rebend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will weaken or injure the material.
B. Unacceptable materials: Reinforcement with any of the following defects will
not be acceptable:
1.
2. 3.
4.
::
Bar lengths, depths, and/or bends exceeding specified fabrication
tolerances.
Bends or kinks not indicated on the Drawings.
Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other cause.
Bars heated for bending.
Bars injured due to bending or straightening.
Reinforcement not placed in accordance with the Drawings and/or Specifications.
EXECUTION
INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the
Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. General:
1. Comply with the specified standards for detail and method of placing reinforcement and supports, except as may be modified herein.
2. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, and
other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
3: Position, support, secure reinforcement against displacement by
formwork, construction, and concrete placing operations.
4. Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, bolsters,
spacers, and hangers, as required.
5. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with
number 16 gauge fully annealed copper-bearing steel wire.
0 f3 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 153 of 299 Pages
.-
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
6. Set wire ties so twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete
surfaces.
Install welded wire fabric in as’long lengths as practicable, lapping adjoining
pieces at least one (1) full mesh.
Provide sufficient numbers of supports, and of strength to carry the reinforcement.
Make bends for stir-ups and ties around a pin having a diameter not less than
six (6) times the minimum thickness of the bar; except that for bars larger than
l”, use a pin not less than eight (8) times the minimum thickness of the bar.
Bend all bars cold.
Do not place reinforcing hers more than 2” beyond last leg of any continuous
bar support
Do not use supports as bases for runways for wncrete conveying equipment
and similarwnstruction loads.
Inspection: All reinforcing shall be inspected by the City prior to pouring
concrete.
3.03 CONCRETE COVER
A. Install all reinforcement to achieve the following minimum wverages of
concrete (U.O.N.):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Concrete below ground
deposited against forms: 2 inches
Concrete deposited
against earth: 3 inches
Concrete in walls:
Intertot: 1 inch
Exterior: l-1/2 inches
Concrete in columns:
Clear to ties: l-518 inches
Clear to bars: 2 inches
Hold wire fabric or reinforcement steel in floor slabs above sub-base
using 4” x 4” concrete blocks of height and quantity required to hold
steel at proper height and alignment.
Q l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 154 of 299 Pages a
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1 .oo GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General
Requirements”, shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work Included in this Section:
Cast-in-place concrete required for this work is shown on the Drawings and
includes, but is not necessarily limited to, formwork, reinforcement, embedded
items, concrete, and finishing for:
1.
- z:
4.
5.
Footings and foundations
Interior slabs Exterior walks
Granular sub-base
Moisture barrier
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
::
3.
Concrete Formwork
Concrete Reinforcement
Concrete Unit Masonry
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are
thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely
familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.
B. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all
applicable provisions of “Structural Concrete for Buildings”, with publications AC1
301, Latest Edition, of the American Concrete Institute.
C. Codes and standards: In case of conflict between or among the referenced
standards and pertinent codes, the more stringent requirements shall govern.
Contract No. 3348 Page 155 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Within thirty (30) calendar days after award of tha Contract,
submit: I
1.
2.
3.
Materials list stating which of tha acceptable products the Contractor has
elected to provide. For each such product, the manufacturer’s recommended installation
procedures which, when approved by the Cii, will become the basis for
acceptance or rejection of actual installation procedures used on the
work.
Submit copies of the concrete mix designs to the City for approval.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use adequate means to protect materials of this Section before,
during, and after installation, and to protect work and materials of other trades.
B. Replatiments: In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and
replacements necessary to the approval-of the City and at no additional cost to
the Cl.
1.08 TESTING
A. City will employ separate tasting laboratory to evaluate concrete delivered to
and placed at sita.
1.
2.
Batch plant inspection is required for all structural concrate. Inspection
shall be by laboratory inspector qualified as concrete inspector.
Inspector shall be present at each day of batching and shall continuously
perform the following: (Contractor shall notify Engineer 48 hours in
advance of mixing time.)
a. Check plant and equipment quality.
b. Check identity of materials.
C. Check aggregate grading and characteristics and water in
aggregate.
d. Verify mix designs being used.
iTa
Check proportioning and loading of concrete materials.
Issue certifications of quality and quantity of materials as batched.
Waiver of Batch Plant Inspection: Upon approval by City batch plant
inspection may be waived provided the following conditions are met: a. Concrete plant meets requirements of UBC Standards 28-13.
e 1 lO8fQ8 Contract No. 3348 Page 158 of 299 Pam m
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
3.
4.
b. Plant has been certified to comply with the requirements of the
National Ready Mix Association.
C. Plant shall be equipped with an automatic hatcher in which total
batching cycle, except for the measuring and introduction of an admixture, is completed by activating a single starter device.
d. 2,000 lb. or less compressive strength. Bonded Deputy Weighmaster Certificates: Provide in lieu of batch plant
inspection when such inspection is waived by City. Licensed
Weighmaster shall furnish notarized affidavits on City approved forms, certifying the quantiiies of all materials and stating that all concrete is
furnished in accordance with the project specifications and mix designs.
Furnish copies to City.
Continuous Placement inspection: Required for all structural concrete; performed by Resident Inspector. inspector shall perform the following
inspection procedures. a. Verify condition and adequacy of forms and reinforcement
placement. b. Insure that concrete is of required quality and consistency.
C. Insure that all requirements and conditions of concrete placement are met.
d. Make slump tests; assist in securing cylinders as required. 8. Keep placement record of the time and date of placing the
concrete in each portion of the structure. Such record shall be
kept until completion of the project and shall be available to
inspection.
B. The Contractor shall notify the City forty-eight (48) hours prior to placement of concrete so the City can arrange to observe the taking of test cylinders if he
deems it necessary.
C. Test methods: .
Sampling concrete ASTM Cl72
Taking cylinders
Testing
Core tests (ii required)
Slump tests
ASTM C31 ASTM C39
ASTM C42
ASTM Cl43
4D 1108198 -. Contract No. 3348 Page 157 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTICN 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
D. Slump Tests: .-
1. One slump test shall be taken for each set of test cylinders. Reject ail
concrete not meeting the Plans and Specifications.
E. Compression Tests:
1. Each sample for test shall consist of four (4) cylinders taken from each
class of concrete used in each day’s operation, but at least one (1) sample for test shall be taken for each 100 cubic yards of concrete.
a. First cylinder tested at 7 days shall show 65% of the specified 28 day strength.
b. Second and third cylinders tested at 28 days shall show 100% of
specified 28 day strength.
C. Fourth cylinder will be tested if required by the Engineer.
G. Doubtful wncrete:
1. If the concrete does not conform to the requirements of AC1 301, Latest Edition, Section 3.5, and/or if 20% of the slump tests exceed the limits
shown on the Drawings, the City shall be notified immediately and shall
have the right to order a change in the mixed proportions or in the .method of mixing, placing, and curing of the concrete to secure the
required strength and consistency for the remaining portion of the
structure at no expense to the owner.
2. Core samples at least 4” in diameter may be made of any doubtful
wncrete in representative locations selected by the Engineer. If cores
meet strength requirements, the expense of wring and patching will be
borne by the City. If tests of core specimens fail to show the strength
specified, the wncrete will be deemed defective and shall be removed
and replaced or adequately strengthened in a manner acceptable to the City. The Contractor shall bear the entire cost of such removal and
replacing or strengthening including cost of wring, testing, and redesign, as required.
3. Concrete slabs or other concrete work not properly cured and deemed
unacceptable to the City shall be removed and replaced at the
Contractor’s expense.
1.07 INSPECTION
A. Concrete floor slabs: 1. The Contractor shall notify the City 48 hours prior to the pouring of any interior floor slabs after all reinforcing, plumbing, electrical, etc., are in
place.
2.00 PRODUCTS
1 /OS/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 158 of 299 Pages @
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
I) SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2.01 CONCRETE
A. Materials: comply with the following as minimums:
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
@ q 1/?8/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 159 of 299 Pages
::
3.
4.
::
7.
Portland Cement: ASTM Cl50, Type V.
Aggregate, general: ASTM C33, uniformly graded and clean. Do not
use aggregate known to cause excessive shrinkage. Aggregate, coarse: Crushed rock or washed gravel with maximum size
between 3/4” and l-1/2”, and with minimum size number 4.
Aggregate, fine: Natural washed sand of hard and durable particles
varying from fine to particles passing a l/4” screen, of which at least 12% shall pass a 50-mesh screen.
Water: ASTMC94 clean and free of substances harmful to concrete. Air-entraining admixture: ASTM C260.
Water-reducing admixture: ASTM C494. Use only admixtures which
have been tested and accepted in mix designs, unless otherwise
approved by Engineer.
Mix design: Concrete minimum strengths and/or minimum mix proportions
shall be as noted on the Drawings; and unless otherwise noted, achieve a
slump of not more than 10 cm (4”). The mix designs shall note expected
shrinkage rates. The maximum permissible drying shrinkage after 21 days of drying of field cast specimens is 0.085% of length.
All Concrete mixes are to be designed by a laboratory retained by the
Contractor and approved by the City.
Mixing:
1. Batch, mix, and transport concrete to the site in accordance with the provisions of ASTM C&4.
Curing materials: Provide curing and protection paper, or membrane curing
compound, for exposed flat concrete:
1. Acceptable paper. a. Sisalcraft “Orange Label”, or equal, complying with ASTM Cl 71.
b. Where finished concrete will receive no other covering, use
non-staining paper equal to Sisalcraft “Seekure 896”.
Control joints: Preformed “r “Quick Joint” as manufactured by SCA
Construction Supply company, Sacramento, CA., or approved equal.
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE I)
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Expansion joints: Where indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required for
proper installation, provide ASTM D94 preformed asphaltic impregnated strips
for exterior hardscape concrete.
Non-shrink grout: “Embew” non-metallic grout as manufactured by Master
Builders, or approved equal.
Capillary Break: Clean gravel or crushed rock approved for this use by the
Soils Engineer. _.
Sand cushion under interior slabs:
1. Fine sand as specified for wncrete aggregate.
Moisture barrier:
1.
2.
Provide in largest size available to minimize need for joints. Exercise
care to avoid punctures. Lap joints a minimum of 30 cm (12”). Seal
around penetrations.
Acceptable Products:
a. “Moistop 2” manufactured by Sisalcraft.
b. “Visqueen” plastic sheeting of 6 mil. thickness.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
3.66
3.01
3.02 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation of the Work of this Section shall be as selected by the Contractor
subject to the approval of the City.
EXECUTION
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be
installed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the
Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
::
Install granular sub-base as indicated on Drawings.
install moisture barrier as indicated on Drawings.
A. Place concrete in accordance with the following and the recommendations contained in ACI 364.
Q l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Pa* 180 of 299 Pages 0
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
B. Procedures:
1. Notify the City at least 48 hours before placing concrete.
2. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no
concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to
cause formation of seams or planes or weakness within the section,
3. if a section cannot be placed wntinuously, provide construction joints as
specified and approved herein.
4. - Perform concrete placing at such a rate that concrete which is being
integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic.
5. Deposit wncrete as nearly as practicable in its final location to avoid
segregation due to flowing and re-handling.
6. Do not subject concrete to any procedure which will cause segregation.
7. On concrete which is to receive other construction, screed the wncrete
to the proper level to avoid excessive skimming and grouting.
8. Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and unworkable, or
does not meet the required quality control limits, or which has been contaminated by foreign materials.
9. Remove rejected concrete completely from the site.
C. Concrete conveying:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Handle concrete from the point of delivery and transfer to the concrete
conveying equipment, and to the locations of final deposit, as rapidly as
practicable and by methods which will prevent segregation and loss of
concrete mix materials. Provide runways for wheeled concrete conveying equipment from the
concrete delivery point to the locations of final deposit.
Keep interior surfaces of conveying equipment, including chutes and
tremies, free from hardened concrete, debris, water, and other
deleterious items. Pumps may be used only if they can pump the designed mix. Do not ’
add fine aggregate or water to the mix to satisfy the needs of pumping devices.
Use chutes or tremies for placing concrete where a drop of more than 2m (72”) is required.
Where free drop through tremies exceeds 6m (18’-0”) use flow checking devices.
D. Placing wncrete in forms:
1.
2.
Deposit the concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 60cm
(24”) and to avoid iniined construction joints.
Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while
preceding layer is still plastic and to avoid cold joints.
m # 1 I08198 , Contract No. 3348 Page 161 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
3. Remove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete placing has
reached the elevation of such spreaders.
E. Placing wncrete slabs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The method of screeding and vibrating or tamping for all floor slabs shall
be. approved in writing by the Cii. The Contractor shall furnish this
information to the City one (1) week prior to commencement of any slab
work.
Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within
the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is
completed.
Consolidate concrete during placement by use of the specified
equipment, thoroughly working concrete around reinforcement and into
comers. Consolidate concrete in slabs by vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe
screeds, or other methods acceptable to the Cii.
Limit the time of vibrating consolidation to prevent bringing an excess of
fine aggregate to the surface.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, make all slabs even and uniform in appearance and where no slope is required, level and
straight, within plus or minus 118 inch in 10 feet. Where floor drains or
floor slopes are indicated, slope slabs uniformly to provide even fail for
drainage. Use bulffloats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free from
bumps and hollows.
Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab
surfaces prior to start of finishing operations.
F. Cold weather placing: Comply with ACI 306 to protect the concrete from
physical damage and reduced strength which would be caused by frost or low
temperatures.
G. Hot weather placing: When hot weather conditions exist which would seriously
impair the quality and strength of concrete, place the concrete as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 32 degrees
C. (90 degrees F.)
Use chilled mixing water or chopped ice to control concrete temperature, using the water equivalent of the ice in calculating the total water
content.
Cover the reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if the steel
becomes too hot.
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 162 of 299 Pages
0 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
4.
6”:
Do not allow the steel temperature to exceed ambient air temperature
immediately prior to placement of concrete.
Wet the forms thoroughly prior to placement of the concrete.
Use set-control admixtures as approved by the-City.
3.03 CONSOLIDATION
A. General:
::
43:
5.
Consolidate concrete in accordance with the provisions of ACI 309.
Consolidate each layer of concrete immediately after placing, by use of internal concrete vibrators.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside the forms.
During all phases of operation, maintain a frequency of not less than
10,000 vibrations per minute per internal vibrator.
Do not vibrate forms or reinforcement.
8. Equipment:
::
3.
Provide adequate number of units and power source at all times.
Maintain spare units on hand to assure adequacy.
If, in the opinion of the City, the equipment being used is not adequate to
accomplish proper consolidation, the City may order delay in further
placement of concrete at no cost to the City until such equipment is
available for use at the location of placement of concrete.
C. Procedures:
1.
2.
3. 4.
5.
6.
8 l/08/98
Limit duration of vibration to time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation of aggregates.
insert the vibrator so as to penetrate the lii immediately below the one being placed, and manipulate to blend the two (2) lifts.
Do not insert the vibrator into lower wurses which have begun to set.
Use the vibrator to melt down the concrete as it is being placed, and use
the vibrator to consolidate the mass of concrete. In the case of wall
construction, assign at least one (1) vibrator and vibrator operator to melting down the mix; and assign at least one (1) vibrator and vibrator
operator to consolidating the mass of concrete. Space the insertions of the vibrator which is used to consolidate at
spaces not exceeding twice the radius of action shown in Table 5.1.4 of
ACI 309.
During the consolidation phase, do not insert the vibrator at points more
than 45 cm (18”) apart.
Contract No. 3348 Page 163 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTICN 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
3.64 JOINTS
A. Construction joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Horizontal construction joints will not be permitted except as may be
shown on the Drawings.
If construction joints necessary for progress of the Work are not shown on the Drawings, show and submit them in complete detail on Shop
Drawings. Construction joints (“shut-offs”) shall be provided at 60’-6” max. for any concrete pour.
For slabs on grade, locate the unindicated joints in a manner to divide
the slab into areas not larger than 75 sq. m. (800 sq. ft.), with one (1)
dimension being not greater than 120% of the other dimension.
Provide keyways at least 38 mm (l-1/2”) deep in construction joints in
walls, slabs, and between footings and walls.
Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across the construction joints.
B. isolation joints in slabs on grade;
1.
2.
Provide isolation joints in slabs on grade at points of contact between
slabs on grade and vertical surfaces, where indicated.
Caulk in accordance with provisions of Caulking and Sealant Section.
C. Control joints in slabs on grade:
1.
2.
3.
Provide control joints in slabs on grade at column lines and 20 ft.
maximum O.C. (evenly spaced) between lines in each direction. Use inserts 6mm (l/4”) wide by l/5 to l/4 of the slab depth, or use l-1/4”
deep saw cuts. Form control joints with a straight edge by inserting a premolded
hardboard or fiberboard strip into the fresh concrete until the top surface
of the strip is flush with the slab surface.
After the concrete has cured for at least seven (7) days, remove inserts
and clean loose debris from the grooves.
3.05 PROTECTION--AND CURING
A. Protect ail concrete from injurious action of the elements and defacements of
ail nature during construction operation.
B. Until forms are removed, keep ail forms sufficiently wet to prevent drying out of the concrete.
Q 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 164 of 299 Pages m
C. Cure slabs by keeping the exposed wncrete surface continuously moist for a
period of at least seven (7) days after the concrete has been placed by means
of fog sprays or flooding.
3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Monolithic slab finishes:
1. Float finish:
a.
b.
C.
d.
e.
f.
Ff :
Apply wood float finish to monolithic slab surfaces at building, and
other finishes hereinafter specified, and as otherwise shown on
the Drawings. After placing concrete slabs, do not work the surface further until
ready for floating. Begin floating when the surface water has disappeared and when
the concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of a power-driven float, or both.
Consolidate the surface with power-driven floats, or by
hand-floating if area is small or is inaccessible to power units.
Check and level the surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding
3mm (l/8”) in 3m (1 O’-0”) when tested with a 3m (lol-0”)
straightedge. placed on the surface at not less than two (2)
different angles.
Cut down high spots and fill low spots.
Uniformly slope surfaces to drains where so required.
Immediately after leveling, refloat the surface to a uniform,
smooth, granular texture, and apply a light broom finish to ail
exposed interior surfaces.
B. Treat architectural (exposed) concrete as follows:
1.
@ q l/08/98
Tie-rod holes that remain after forms are stripped shall be filled solid with
cement grout, using a pressure gun. Grout for this purpose shall be
made of two (2) parts Portland Cement to one (1) part sand (wloring as
directed by manufacturer to match existing) or approved equal.
Concrete from which forms have been removed, which is spattered with concrete from a subsequent pour, shall be cleaned immediately after the
spillage occurs by hosing with water in such as way as to remove all
such spillage.
Contract No. 3348 Page 165 of 299 Pages
2. Immediately after forms have been removed from the surfaces of
architectural concrete footings, they shall be ground and/or honed with
carborundum stones to remove all loose projecting portions and form marks. Extra expense resulting from delaying this operation shall be
borne by the Contractor. Depressions shall be eliminated and rock
pockets, construction joints and other imperfections brought to an even
surface.
3. Fill voids caused by air bubbles with a grout of cement and fine sand in
equal proportions mixed with enough water to give a wnsistency of thick
paint. Air bubble voids that are larger underneath than appear on the
surface shall be broken out to their full size before filling with grout. Wet
architectural concrete surfaces that are to be repaired.
Apply grout with stiff bristle brushes over entire surface of architectural
wncrete completely filling holes. When cement has partial set, remove the excess grout by rubbing vigorously with burlap until no visible film
remains.
3.07 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE lTEMS
A. Filling in:
1.
2.
3.
Fill in holes and openings left in wncrete structures for the passage of
work of the other trades, unless otheMlise directed, after the work of
other trades is in place.
Mix, place and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction.
Provide other miscellaneous wncrete filling to complete the Work.
B. Equipment bases and foundations:
1.
2.
8:
Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on the
Drawings or required for the machine and equipment actually furnished.
Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template, at correct
elevations, and complying with certified diagrams or templates of the
manufacturer furnishing the machines and equipment.
Provide isolation joints surrounding bases where indicated or required.
Fill joints with joint filler and sealant complying with the provisions of
Section 07900.
G 1 JO8198 Contract No. 3348 Page 166 of 299 Pages m
3.08 SEALING/HARDENING AGENT
A. Apply the chemical hardening agent “Lapidoiith” by Sonnebom to all finish
concrete surfaces. Fully comply with manufacturer’s instructions in preparation
of concrete surface and application of the product.
3.09 DRYPACKING
A. Perform ail drypacking, grouting, and particular patching directed by the City or
needed for proper completion of the Work. Use only the approved grouting
material and apply it in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s published recommendations to produce a grout which will not shrink and which will attain
a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi at seven (7) days.
3.10 REMEDIAL WORK
A. The following concrete work will be considered defective and may be ordered
by the City to be removed and replaced at Contractor’s expense.
1.
2.
Concrete:
i:
Incorrectly formed
Not plumb or level
ii:
Not specified strength
Containing rock pockets, voids, honeycomb
i?’ Containing wood or foreign matter ’
Not in accordance with the intent of the Drawings and
Specifications
Concrete finishing work: a. Not true to elevation
b. Not pitched to drain when called for
ii:
Not surfaced as specified
With any loose or roughened or defaced surfaces
t’
Not true to l/8” in ten feet of straightedge in any direction.
Not in accordance with the intent of the Drawings or
Specifications
B. Patching:
1. Repair defective areas and fill form-tie holes and similar defects in
accordance with Chapter 9 of ACI 301.
3.11 CLEAN-UP
A. At completion of this Work; Contractor shall ramove from the premises all
surplus material, equipment, and debris resulting from this Work.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 167 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE UNlT MASONRY
1 .oo GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General Requirements” shall apply to all work of this section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work Included: Furnishing all wncrete masonry units, grout and mortar, and
equipment necessary to construct the masonry walls. it shall include the placing of
reinforcing steel in the ceils in accordance with the plans and specifications of the
project. This work shall be properly coordinated with that of the other trades.
Bolts, anchor bolts and shelf angles shall be installed but not furnished by the
masonry contractor. Built in nailing blocks shall be installed but not furnished by
the masonry contractor.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ii-
9:
Concrete Reinforcement
Cast-In-Place Concrete Fasteners and Supports
Sheet Waterproofing
Sheet Metal Work
Caulking and Sealants
Lath and Plaster
Ceramic Tile
Painting
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely
familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.
B. Samples of the block units shall be submitted by the masonry contractor for
approval of type and wlor.
G l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 168 of 299 Pages m
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
C. .Certification - The concrete block manufacturer shall certify that the masonry units furnished meet or exceed the requirements of this specification.
D. Sample panel - A sample panel shall be built approximately 4 feet by 6 feet.
This sample panel may be part of the project and incorporated into the wall
system. Masonry construction shall not proceed until the sample panel is
accepted by the Engineer. Full size concrete masonry units which have been
selected and approved by the Engineer to show wlor range, maximum texture
range, bond, mortar, tooling of joints and quality of workmanship shall be used
in the example panel. Sample panel shall remain on the project for comparison
purposes with the actual masonry work.
If the sample panel is not part of the wall system, it shall be demolished and
removed from the site after completion and acceptance for the project concrete masonry work.
1.04 SAMPLING AND TESTING
A. General:
Sampling and testing shall be the responsibility of the City. Test for airdry condition shall be performed in sufficient number to insure that materials meet
the specified requirements.
B. Linear-Drying Shrinkage:
Sampling and testing in accordance with ASTM C426 to determine the linear
drying-shrinkage of concrete masonry units shall be performed not more than 12 months before delivery of units to the project site. No change in
manufacturing processes and techniques or in drying and curing procedures
shall be made nor shall materials with different physical or chemical
characteristics be used in units delivered to the project site unless the
Contractor verifies the linear drying-shrinkage by additional certified test
reports. A sample of 5 individual and whole units representative of the product proposed for use shall be selected after cooling and/or wring of the units at the
point of manufacture. Sample units shall prove under test to be free from
cracks or other structural defects.
C. Air-Dry Condition:
Upon delivery of wncrete masonry units to the project site, samples shall be
selected at random from stockpiles and tested for air-dry condition. Sampling and testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C 427. Air-dry condition is
defined as the moisture condition of a concrete masonry unit in a state of
equilibrium with a relative humidity of not greater than 15 percent higher than the average relative humidity at the project site, except that the relative
l/08/98 .- Contract No. 3348 Page 169 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTlON 04220 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
humidity of the unit at equilibriums hall not exceed 85 percent and shall not be
required to be less than 50 percent. The average relative humidity at the
project site shall be as determined by the nearest Weather Bureau station from
the total of annual observations recorded for the month in which the unit is
delivered.
D. Mortar and Grout
Mortar and grout shall be laboratory proportioned and tested by City. Certified
copies of laboratory-established proportions shall be submitted with the
required test materials with different physical or chemical characteristics shall
not be used in mortar or grout for the work unless additional evidence is
furnished that the mortar and grout meet the specified requirements.
1.
2.
Mortar:
Three (3) mortar cylinders shall be taken for each 5000 square feet concrete-masonry-unit walls. One cylinder shall be tested at 7 days
meeting a compressive strength of 1,300 psi and two (2) cylinders shall be tested at 28 days meeting the specifiedstrength of 2,000 psi.
Grout:
Three (3) grout cubes shall be taken for each 100 cubic yards, or
fraction thereof, of grout. One cube shall be tested at 7 days meeting a
strength of 1,300 psi and two (2) cubes shall be tested at 28 days with
an average strength of the two meeting the specified strength of 2,000
psi.
E. Mortar Admixture:
When it is proposed to use a mortar admixture, test reports indicating the
advantages to result shall be submitted to the City for approval. Testing shall be performed by the laboratory that designed the mortar mix. Six test
specimens shall be made from the mortar containing admixture. The mortar
used in this testing shall be identical except for the admixture, shall be designed and mixed from identically graded aggregates and from the same
brand and type of cement, in strict conformance to the properties required for
type S mortar in ASTM C 270. The mortars with and without the admixture
shall have the same aggregate ration, water retention, and compressive
strength as stipulated. Admixture shall be used in conformance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Each of the mortars shall be tested for bond
strength in conformance with ASTM E 149 and shall be tested for water retention and compressive strength in conformance with ASTM C 270.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 170 of 299 Pages e
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 64220 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
1.05 PRODUCT STORAGE
All delivered concrete masonry units shall be covered and protected from inclement
weather.
1.06 COLD WEATHER CONDITIONS
Concrete masonry units shall not be laid when the air temperature is below 46?F
unless authorized by the Engineer.
. 2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 ’ CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F. Face Shells and Surfaces:
a
l/08/98
Load bearing smooth face (light) weight concrete masonry units shall comply
with ASTM C96-90, (Type I or Type II). Provide required shapes such as
comer, end units, radius, bases, bond beams, lintels, etc. Provide units open
one or both ends, as required. Concrete masonry units shall be a minimum net
compressive strength of 1960 psi.
Masonry units shall be manufactred by Omo Block Company, Inc., Oceanside plant. Provide the following types of concrete masonry units.
1. Precision block - single swre
2. 8” radius wmer block - single score
3. 8” radius block for columns
Colors shall be as indicated on the Engineer’s wlor schedule.
Sizes:
Sizes of units shall be 8 x 8 x 16 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Cells of units shall not be less than 4 inches.
Curing:
Units shall be steam-cured for 12 hours and shall then be air-cured.
Where standard block is used, face shells shall be straight and true. Warped
ends will not be accepted. The finished wall shall be plain smooth surface, exhibiting no shadow-light pattern in any way. To avoid any irregular wall
plane, the Masonry Contractor shall omit any units with warped face shells.
Such units shall be returned to the concrete-masonry- unit manufacturer or -
supplier and shall be immediately removed from the site.
Contract No. 3348 Page 171 of 299 Pages
DlVlSlON 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Maximum Linear Drying-Shrinkage:
Shall be 0.065% as determined in accordance with ASTM C 426.
Aggregates:
Aggregates used in making wncrete masonry units shall conform to ASTM
c331. _.
Closer, Jamb, Header, Lintel, Bond-Beam Units and Special Shapes and Sizes:
Shall be furnished as required to complete the work indicated.
Appearance:
Exposed-to-view or painted units in any one building shall be of the same
appearance.
certificates:
The Contractor shall furnish to the City certiicates of all concrete masonry units, executed in 6 copies and certifying compliance with specification
requirements at the same time the units are delivered and prior to their installation. Each certificate shall be signed by the Contractor and an
authorized officer of the manufacturing company, and shall bear the name and
address of the Contractor, the project location, quantity, and date or dates of
the applicable delivery.
2.02 MORTAR
ASTM C 270, Type S minimum compressive strength of 2,000 psi at 28 days, or Type
S, as given in Table 24-A of Uniform Building Code 1991, and as modified herein,
proportioned and tested in the laboratory. When tested for water retention, the mortar
shall have a flow, after suction of 75% or more when mixed to an initial flow of 125% to 140%. When tested for compressive strength, mortar shall be mixed to a flow of
100% to 115%. Mortar shall be wlored to match masonry units. Submit two l/2” x 4” mortar briquettes for approval prior to using mortar. The use of fire clay, rock dust,
dirt and other deleterious materials is prohibited in mortar.
Sand for mortar shall conform to ASTM C 144.
9 1108198 Contract No. 3348
-.
Page 172 of 299 Pages
a DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
2.03 GROUT
Fine grout shall conform to ASTM C 476, except that natural sand, conforming to
ASTM C 33, shall be used and lime shall not be used. Grout shall attain a minimum compressive strength’of 2,000 psi at 28 days. Test for grout shall be as specified
hereinafter. Minimum slump shall be 10” + 1”.
2.04 LIME
A. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
B. Lime Putty shall be made from hydrated lime. The lime shall be slaked and
then screened through a No. 16 mesh sieve. After slaking and screening, and
before using, the lime putty shall be stored and protected from exposure to the
sun and to prevent excessive evaporation for not less than 10 days. The
resulting putty shall weight not less than 83 pounds per cubic foot.
2.05 CEMENT
A. Cement shall be Type I or Type II portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150.
If plastic cement is used, it shall have less than 12% of the total cement
volume in approved types of plasticizing agents and shall conform to all the requirements of the portland cement ASTM C 150. If plastic cement is used, only l/lOth part lime may be used in the mortar.
2.06 AGGREGATE
A. All aggregate for mortar and grout shall be sharp, clean and well graded and
free of injurious amounts of dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings and
organic matter.
B. Aggregate for mortar shall conform to ASTM Cl44
C. Aggregate for grout shall conform to ASTM 04.
2.07 ADMIXTURES
The use of admixtures shall not be permitted in mortar or grout unless approved by
the Engineer.
In high lift grouting, the use of an admixture to counteract water loss and volume
reduction shall be used.
a ‘3 1108198 Contract No. 3348 , Page 173 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 64220 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
2.08
2.09
2.10
3.00
3.01
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
Miscellaneous items, such as rough hardware, anchors, bolts, ties, etc., required for
items to be anchored to or embedded in concrete-unit-masonry construction shall be
furnished by the general contractor and installed by the masonry contractor, unless
otherwise specified.
WATER
Water shall be free of deleterious quantities of acids, alkalis and organic materials and
shall wme from a domestic supply. The quantity of water to be used in the
preparation of the mortar or grout shall be the minimum required to produce a mixture
sufficiently workable for the purpose intended.
REINFORCING STEEL
A. Steel reinforcing shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 40 for #&I bars and
smaller, Grade 60 for ##5 bars and larger (U.O.N.).
B. Steel wire reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A82.
C. Reinforcements shall be clean and free from loose rust, scale and dirt and any coatings that reduce bond.
0
EXECUTION
WORKMANSHIP
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
VW
v l/08/98
Masonry shall not be started when the horizontal and vertical alignment of the
foundation is out of plumb or line one inch or more.
Care shall be taken to prevent grout and mortar stains. Keep wall continually
clean; if grout does mn over, clean immediately.
All masonry shall be laid true, level and plumb in accordance with the drawings.
The masonry units shall be cut accurately to fit all plumbing, ducts, openings,
electrical work etc. and all holes are to be neatly patched.
No construction support shall be attached to the wall except where specifically permitted by the City.
The top surface of the concrete foundation shall be clean and free of laitance
and the aggregate exposed before starting masonry construction.
Contract No. 3348 Page 174 of 299 Pages a
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
G. Where no bond pattern is shown, the wall shall be laid up in straight, uniform
wurses with regular half or running bond.
H. All work, bond patterns or special details as shown on the drawings shall be
accurately and uniformly executed.
3.02 PROTECTION OF THE WORK
A. Protect all sills, ledges and offsets for mortar droppings or other damage during
construction.
B. Care shall be taken to prevent visible mortar and grout stains on the exterior of
the work and they shall be removed immediately if they occur.
3.03 MASONRY UNITS
A. All masonry units shall be sound, free of cracks or other defects that would
interfere with the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength of
construction. Minor cracks incidental to the usual method of manufacturer, or
minor chipping resulting from customary method of handling and shipping and
delivery shall not be deemed grounds for rejection.
B. All masonry units should be stored on the job so that they are kept off the
ground and protected from the elements.
C. Proper masonry units shall be used to provide for all windows, doors, bond beams, lintels, pilasters etc. with a minimum unit cutting.
D. Where masonry unit cutting is necessary, all cuts shall be neat and true and made by a masonry saw.
3.84 JOINTS
A. The starting joint on foundations shall be laid with full morbr coverage on the
bed joints except that the area where the grout occurs shall be free from mortar
so that the grout will be in contact with the foundation.
B. Mortar joints shall be straights, clean and uniform in thickness. Unless
otherwise specified or detailed on the plans, horizontal and vertical joints shall
be approximately 318 inch thick with full mortar coverage on the face shells and on the webs surrounding calls to be filled. Units shall be laid with “push joints”. No slushing or grouting of a joint will be permitted, nor shall a joint be made by
working in mortar after the units have been laid.
a a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 175 of 299 Pages
DlVlSlON 94 - MASONRY - SECTION 94220 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Unless otherwise specified, all joints shall be tooled with a concave surface.
Tooling shall be done when the mortar is partially set and still sufficiently plastic
as to bond. All tooling shall be done with a tool that compacts the mortar.
Vertical head joints shall be butted for a thickness equal to the face shell of the
unit and these joints shall be shoved tightly so that the mortar bonds well with
both units.
Raked joints shall be not more than 3/8” deep, and where exposed to weather,
shall be tooled.
If it is necessary to remove a unit after it has bean set in place, the unit shall be removed from the wall, cleaned and set in fresh mortar.
All work, bonds or special details shall be accurately and uniformly executed.
Face joints shall be tooled as shown on the plans and in the specifications.
Where control joints are required or specified, they shall be detailed on the drawings.
3.05 REINFORCING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
a l/08/98
Coordinate locations of all dowels and other embedded items with the General
Contractor. When a foundation dowel does not line up with a vertical core, it
shall be sloped at not more than one horizontal to size vertical. Dowels shall
be grouted into a core in vertical alignment even though it is in an adjacent cell
to the vertical wall reinforcing.
Reinforcing bars shall be straight except for bends around wmers and where
bends or hooks are detailed on the plans.
Reinforcing steel where spliced shall be lapped a minimum of 48 bar diameters, unless otherwise noted.
When full length vertical bars are used, they shall be held in position at top and bottom at intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters of the reinforcement. -..
Horizontal reinforcing shall be ‘laid on the webs of bond beam units and shall be solidly grouted in place. Reinforcing in channel units shall be spaced off the
bottom of the unit.
Vertical reinforcing shall have a minimum clearance of l/4” from the masonry.
A dowel shall be provided in the foundation for each vertical bar.
Contract No. 3348 Page 178 of 299 Pages a
a DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
H. Wire reinforcement shall be completely imbedded in mortar or grout. Mortar
joints with wire reinforcement shall be at least twice the thickness of the wire.
I. Wire reinforcement shall be lapped at least 8 inches at splices and shall contain
at least one cross wire of each piece of reinforcement in the lap distance.
3.06 GROUTING
A. General: .
::
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Reinforcement shall be in place before grouting starts.
Mortar droppings shall be kept out of a grout space. All grout shall be puddled or vibrated in place.
Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment to maintain a
continuous unobstructed cell area not less than two inches by three
inches. Cells containing reinforcement shall be solidly filled with grout and pours
shall be stopped one inch below the top of a wurse to form a key or
joints.
Grouting at beams over openings shall be done in one continuous operation.
The tops of ungrouted cells under a horizontal masonry beam shall be
covered with metal lath or other approved materials to confine the grout
fill to the beam section.
All calls containing reinforcement, anchor bolts and inserts shall be
grouted solidly.
Spaces around metal door frames and other built-in items shall be filled
solidly with grout or mortar.
Columns, beams, joists, and similar structural members shall be anchored to the wall with anchor bolfs or their equivalent. Anchors shall
be fully, solidly embedded in place. Embedment shall not be less than 5” except provide 4” bands where so detailed.
B. Low Lift Grouting:
1. In low lift grouting of hollow unit masonry, the structure shall be grouted in lifts of four feet or less.
Grout shall be puddled to insure full penetration into mortar joints and
around steel.
@ a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 177 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 64220 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
C. High Lit Grouting:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Cleanout holes shall be provided at the bottom of all cores containing
vertical reinforcement in hollow unit masonry.
Mortar projections and mortar droppings shall be cleaned out of the
grout space and off the reinforcing steel.
All grout shall be consolidated at time of pouring by puddling or vibrating and then reconsolidated later by puddling before the plasticity is lost.
Masonry shall cure at least threedays before grouting.
Grout shall be poured in not more than four foot depth, and then wait
approximately one-half hour and then pour another four foot depth. The
full height of each section of a wall shall be poured in one day.
All reinforcing steel shall be placed before grouting and there shall be
continuous inspection during grouting operations.
Grout shall be consolidated by puddling or mechanical vibrating during
placement and reconsolidated after excess moisture has been absorbed
but before plasticity-is lost.
3.07 POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Wall Cleaning and Protection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Concrete scum and grout stains on the walls shall be removed immediately.
After walls are constructed, they shall not be saturated with water for
wring or for any other purposes.
Where the atmosphere is dry, the walls shall have their surfaces dampened with a very light fog spray during the curing period for the
mortar of three days.
At the conclusion of the masonry work, the masonry contractor shall
clean all masonry, remove scaffolding and equipment used in the work
and all debris, refuse and surplus masonry material and remove them
from the premises.
3.06 CONTINUOUS INSPECTION
An independent lab employed by the City shall continuously inspect the masonry area during construction and shall certify compliance with the plans and specifications.
# 1108198 Contract No. 3348
_
Page 178 of 299 Pages a
a DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 04221. PREFACED CONCRETE MASONRY
1 .oo
1.01
1.02 DESCRIPTION
1.03
a 1.04
2.00
2.01
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General
Requirements”, shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
A. This section covers information specific to prefaced concrete masonry and its
installation.
B. Work Included: Provide glazed concrete masonry work as indicated on drawings
and specified herein.
RELATED WORK
Block work, reinforcing, cell grouting, and other details applicable to the concrete block
portion of this product shall be in accordance with the sections covering these items, (or)
shall be in accordance with best practices for block work. All proposed products and
execution subject to prior approval.
PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver via open trailer on covered pallets with individual glazed faces protected.
Do not ship via rail.
B. Keep dry, store on level ground and do not stack pallets. Avoid excessive handling
prior to installation.
PRODUCTS
DESCRIPTION
A. Glazed face shall be a factory applied compound composed of thermo-setting polymers, pigments, and modified silica sand. The glazed face, after curing, shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM C-744 relative to tolerances and
imperviousness. There shall be no pinholes, chips, or other imperfections
detracting from the appearance of the finished wall when viewed from a distance of
5 feet. Minor imperfections may be repaired by manufacturer or installer using
matching pigment furnished by original manufacturer. Provide bullnose jambs,
caps, and other special units as shown on plans.
a g 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 179 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 042210 PREFACED CONCRETE MASONRY
a
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Amwr, Inc., Licenses of Bums and Russel Co., (Distributed by Glazed Masonry, Inc.,
Fontana, ca). (Telephone 909-822-3106).
2.03 SHAPES AND SIZES
A. Manufactured bond beam and open end units will be ordered as required for steel
placement.
B. Provide sizes and special shapes (bullnose, cove, etc.) as shown on drawings.
2.04 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES
A. Through the wall (width) dimension for single faced unit; (+/-) l/8”. Double faced
units; (+/J 3116”.
B. Face dimensions’and distortion, (+/-) l/16”.
C. CMU Tolerances per ASTM C-90.
2.05 COLORS
A. Glaze and wlor to conform to ASTM C-744.
B. Minor variations in shade or wlor of glazed face are due to variations of natural materials used and are acceptable.
3.00
3.01
EXECUTION
INSPECTION
Inspect related conditions, do not commence unit adverse conditions are corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
B. CMU portion of product to conform to ASTM C-90, N-l, lightweight. Provide
manufactured bond beam and open end units as required for steel reinforcing
placement.
A. Keep all surfaces of preglazed CMU clean and free from foreign substances.
a 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 180 of 299 Pages a
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 04221- PREFACED CONCRETE MASONRY
B. Lay out wall as to ensure minimum cutting of units.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Align glazed faces plumb and level. Work from the glazed face in layout,
plumbing, and leveling. Lay glazed CMU in accordance with accepted masonry
procedures and related specifications.
B. Mortar joints shall be l/4” on exposed glazed face(s), this allows for the
standard 318” joint between unglazed portion of CMU.
C. In those areas where a sanitary mortar is required, the setting mortar shall be
raked to the depth of l/4” and the wall shall be pointed, gunned, or bagged with
an approved fine-textured sanitary grout containing hardening and/or
waterproofing agents. Joints to be tooled slightly concave with glass or other
non-staining tool, to join rounded block edge. If setting mortar is to be tooled,
setting mortar must contain waterproofing/hardening additives.
0. With vertical scored units, always use Stack Bond construction. Do not use
running bond on vertical scored units. Scored joints should be grouted
concurrently with working joints.
3.84 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.
B. Final cleaning of the glazed wall shall be done with care, after erection. Suitable
detergent such as SURE KLEAN or DEOX will be used in strict accordance with manufacturers directions for cleaning preglazed CMU walls.
C. Protect finished work from spillage, etc.
D. Do m use muriatic acid on glazed finish.
1 I08198 , Contract No. 3348 Page 181 of 299 Pages
_ DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 04270 - GLASS UNIT MASONRY
1.00 GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General Requirements”, shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work Included in this Section: Provision and setting of fire-rated glass unit
masonry, including glass block and associated mortar, reinforcing, expansion
material, anchors, and caulking.
B’. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
:
Cast-in-Place Concrete.
3:
Metal Fabrications.
Joint Sealers.
1.03 SUBMllTALS
A. Shop Drawings showing complete installation, including framing, anchorage, and
reinforcing.
B. Samples: 3 block units illustrating wlor, design and pattern of faces.
C. Product Information: Complete list of materials to be used.
1.04 MANUFACTURER
A. Glass Block: Pittsburgh Coming Corporation.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS ---
A. Glass Block: Partially evacuated hollow masonry units of clear, wlorless glass with
side wall bond coating of latex based paint. The units shall be as follows: 8” x 8” x
4”, thickset series glass block, “Endura” pattern.
1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 182 of 299 Pages a
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 04270 - GLASS UNIT MASONRY
B. Accessories:
1. Panel Reinforcing: 9 gauge hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. Crossrods 8” on center, 2” wide for standard block.
2. Expansion Strips: 318” x 3-l/2” polyethylene plastic or glass fiber (for
fire rating).
3. Panel Anchors: 20 gauge x l-314” wide steel strips, punched with three
rows of elongated holes, pattern staggered, electroplated after
fabrication.
,Z:
Perimeter Chase: Steel, as detailed on Drawings.
Asphalt Emulsion: Where indicated or required, cutback, paint grade.
6. Sealant: Silicone type, wlor to match mortar.
7. Backer Rods: Where indicated or required, white polyethylene foam stock with bond breaking sleeve.
C. Mortar Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Shall be prepared according to ASTM C270 for Type N mortar. White
cement shall be used and shall be prepared using 1 bag white Portland
cement (Type I), 1 bag lime (Type S), 4-l/2 to 6 cu. ft. mason sand.
Silica sand may be used if desired. Mix to stiff but workable
consistency. Mortar may be retempered if used in less than l-112 hours
after mixing. Accelerators or anti-freeze shall not be added to mortar.
Color to be selected by City.
Add mortar wlor as per manufacturer’s instructions. Sidewalls of glass
block must be same wlor as mortar. If mortar is not white, strip white
paint before repainting with wlored latex paint.
Add Laticrete 8510 for waterproofing.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine frame work surrounds and bases for conditions which may affect
installation. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.
B. Verify existing dimensions in the field and adjust accordingly.
C. Commencement of work implies acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Anchors: Secure to surrounds, aligning with horizontal and vertical reinforced joints.
1 I68198 Contract No. 3348 Page 183 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 04270 - GLASS UNIT MASONRY
B. Dissimilar Materials: Apply asphalt emulsion to all steel in contact with mortar,
except anchors.
C. Mortar:
:*
3:
Clean tools and containers of old mortar prior to beginning.
Mix mortar by volume at a ratio described in Part 2. Mix to stiff but workable consistency, drier than for concrete masonry.
D. Glass Block: Lay up in straight even courses, plumb with equal joint widths.
Provide expansion joints at head and jamb.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Ta l/08/98' Contract No. 3348
Apply hea@ coat of asphalt erriulsion to sill, let dry completely.
Set full mortar bed on sill; do not furrow.
Set lowest wurse of block with full shoved joints. Do not use steel tools to tap
into position.
Install panel reinforcing In center of reinforced horizontal joints; do not furrow.
Run reinforcing continuous from end to end, lapping not less than 6” where splicing required. Set succeeding courses. Reinforcement is to be used in all
mortar channels, except under the bottom row of block.
Install panel anchors above the first row of block and on 24” centers for
remaining courses.
Mortar joints must be solid. Furrowing is not pennitted.
Isolate panel from adjacent construction on sides and top with expansion strips.
Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar.
Maintain uniform joint width of l/4” + l/8”.
Maximum variation from plane of unit to next unit -1132”.
Maximum variation of panel fram plane -l/l 6”.
Page 184 of 299 Pages a
l DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION 04270 - GLASS UNIT MASONRY
K.
L.
M.
N.
0.
P.
Do not tap glass block with steel tools.
Strike joints smooth when mortar is thumbprint hard. Rake out joints requiring sealant to depth required to accept sealant and backer rod.
Tool joints smooth and concave before mortar takes final set.
After final mortar set, install backer rods at depth to allow caulking depth to be half the joint width; required at perimeters at exterior.
Apply sealant to smooth concave surface:
:: Joints at head, jamb, inside and outside.
Steel frames (vertical), inside and outside.
3. All joints between each block for complete waterproofing.
Remove surplus mortar, and wipe dry faces of the block. Use only water,
cloths, and Number 4 steel wool. No abrasive tools or cleaners are to be used.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and sealant upon completing work.
B. Clean surfaces using solution which will not harm joint materials, or adjacent
surfaces.
C. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 185 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 05 -‘METALS
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
.
l
1 .oo GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General
Requirements”, shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work included: Furnish, fabricate, mark for erection identification, pack, crate or
otherwise properly prepare for shipment, ship to the site, and erect all structural
steel indicated on the Drawings, described in these Specifications, or otherwise
required for proper completion of the Work.
B. Related work described elsewhere:
1. Concrete Reinforcement
2. Miscellaneous Metals
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Quality Control: The City reserves the right to require inspection and tests
in the mill and shop, conducted by an independent testing agency approved by the City, at no additional cost to the Cii. 0
B. In addition to conforming with all pertinent codes and regulations, conform with the
following standards:
1.
2.
3.
“Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel
for Buildings” of the American Institute of Steel Construction.
“Code for Welding in Building Construction” of the American Welding
Society.
“Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel” of the American
Institute of Steel Construction.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Steel fabricator:
B.
1. The steel fabricator shall have not less than five (5) years continuous experience in the fabrication of structural steel.
Steel erector:
1. The steel erector shall have not less than flve (5) years continuous
experience in the erection of structural steel.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 188 of 299 Pages l
DIVISION 05 - METALS
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
C. Welders:
1. All welders, welding procedures, welding operations, and tackers shall be
qualified in accordance with AWS “Standard Qualification Procedures”.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Within thirty (30) calendar days after award of Contract, submit:
1. Producers’ or manufacturers’ specifications ‘and installation
recommendations for the following products, including laboratory test
reports and other data required to demonstrate compliance with the
specified requirements:
a. Structural steel, including certified copies of mill reports covering
chemical and physical properties.
b.
ii:
High strength and anchor bolts, including.nuts and washers.
Unfinished bolts and nuts.
Structural steel primer paint and final paint.
2. Shop drawings: Within thirty (30) calendar days after award of contract, including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly
of members: a. lndude details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other
pertinent data.
b. Indicate welds by AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of
weld.
C. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of
anchor bolts and other anchorages.
d. Identify details by reference sheet and detail number of the Drawings.
1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery and storage:
1.
i:
Deliver materials to the job site properly marked to identify the location for
which it is intended. Use markings corresponding to markings shown on the Shop Drawings.
Store in a manner to maintain identification and prevent damage.
B. Protection: Use means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and after installation, and to protect the work and materials of
other trades.
‘3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 187 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 05 - METALS
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
C. Replacements: -In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and
replacements necessary to the approval of the City and at no additional cost to
the Cii.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Rolled steel shapes, plates and bars: Comply with ASTM A36.
8. Steel pipe: Comply with ASTM A501 or ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B.
C. Steel tube: Comply with ASTM A500, Grade B.
0. Anchor bolts: Comply with ASTM A36 or ASTM A307, non-headed type with
heavy hexagonal nuts unless otherwise indicated.
E. Unfinished threaded fasteners:
1.
2:
Comply with ASTM A307, Grade A, regular low carbon steel bolts and
nuts. Provide either hexagonal or square heads and nuts; except use only
hexagonal units for exposed connections.
F. High strength threaded fasteners: Provide heavy hexagonal structural bolts,
heavy hexagonal nuts, and hardened washers, quenched and tempered
medium carbon steel complying with ASTM A307.
G. Electrodes for welding: Comply with AWS Code, using AWS A5.1 or .A5.5 E70XX electrodes.
H. Shop Paint: Comply with Fed. Spec. IT-P-86a, Type II, or “TNEMEC” 69
special red primer.
I. Galvanizing: ASTM Al23 for steel shapes, plates bars and strip; ASTM Al53 for iron and steel hardware.
J. Expansion bolts: Comply with Fed. Spec. FF-S-325.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabrication and assembly:
1. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC
Specifications, and as indicated on the approved shop drawings.
a l/06/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 188 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 05 - METALS
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
2.
3.
4.
5.
Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly and for
identification as to location for which intended.
Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and
minimize field handling of materials.
The steel trellis structure shall be fully fabricated, assembled, and shop painted, ready for erection, prior to delivery to the site.
Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in the final structure free
from markings, burrs, and other defects.
B. Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide bolts and washers of types and sizes required for completion of
field erection.
High strength bolted construction, where required:
a. Install high strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC
“Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490
Bolts”.
b. Use A325N bolts, unless noted otherwise.
Welded construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welded work Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true
alignment of axes without warp.
C. Holes for other work:
1.
2.
:-
5:
Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel
framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members,
as shown on the approved shop drawings.
Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items
shown, to receive other work. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning.
Drill holes in bearing plates.
2.03 SHOP PAINTING
A. General:
1. Galvanize all exposed exterior steel members, fabrications and assemblies after fabrication, by hot dip process, in accordance with ASTM A123, with weight of zone coating conforming to ASTM Al23 “Weight of Coating”.
e q l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 189 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 05 - METALS
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
2.
3.
4.
5.
Galvanize bolts, nuts,. washers and iron and steel hardware in
accordance with ASTM A153, with weight of zinc coating conforming to
ASTM Al 53 “Weight of Coating”.
Shop paint structural steel work, except those members or portions of
members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. I Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on the exposed portions, and the initial 50mm (2”) of embedded areas only.
Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high strength bolted
with friction type connections.
B. Surface preparation:
::
After inspection and before painting, clean steelwork to be painted.
Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, and flux deposits. 3. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council SP-3,
“Power Tool Cleaning”.
C. Painting:
1.
2.
Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint
and two final coats of gloss finish structural steel paint in accordance
with the manufacture& recommendations and at a rate to provide a
uniform dry film thickness. Color shall be as indicated on the Engineer’s
color schedule.
Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, comers,
edges, and exposed surfaces.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with AISC Specifications and “Code of Standard Practice”, except as
may be modified herein.
B. Anchor bolts:
1.
2.
Provide anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing
structural steel to foundations and other in-place work.
Provide templates and other devices necessary for pre-setting bolts and anchors to accurate locations.
C. Bases and bearing plates: Shop weld to columns and members attached to concrete.
G l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 PaQe 190 of 299 Pages 0
4B DIVISION 05 - METALS
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
3.02 ERECTION
0.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Splicing:
1, Splice members only where indicated on final shop drawings.
Gas cutting:
1. Do not use gas cutting torches for correcting fabricating errors in the
structural framing.
Bolted connections shall be such that threads will be entirely outside the holes.
Use washers where necessary. Bolt holes shall not be made or enlarged by
burning. Nuts shall be drawn up tight. Multiple threads with a chisel or use
approved self-locking nuts. All exterior fasteners shall be galvanized or
cadmium plated.
Do not drift to match unfair holes. Where enlarging is required, ream and use larger bolt.
Where nuts are exposed’ to view in finished construction projection of bolt from nut shall be 118” minimum and l/2” maximum.
No field welds shall be allowed.
Repair galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780 with dry film thickness of repair material not less than galvanized coating thickness required
by ASTM Al23 or ASTM Al53 as applicable.
After the erection is complete, touch-up all shop paint coat damaged during
transportation or erection specified for shop priming. Clean bolted connections
and abraded areas and apply same paint as used in shop.
A. Comply with AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as
specified herein.
B. Surveys:
1.
2.
Establish permanent benchmarks necessary for accurate erection of structural steel.
Check elevations of concrete surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and
similar items, before erection proceeds.
a 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 191 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 05 - METALS
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
C. Temporary shoring and bracing:
1. Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads.
a l/06/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 192 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 05 - METALS SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
2.
3.
Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of the structure as erection proceeds. Remove temporary connections and members when permanent members are in place and final connections are made.
0. Anchor bolts:
1.
2.
install anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work.
Provide templates and other devices as needed for the pm-setting of
bolts and other anchors to accurate locations.
E.. Setting bases and bearing plates:
1.
::
4.
5.
6.
Clean concrete bearing surfaces free from bond-reducing materials, and then roughen to improve bond to surface. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structuml
members in wedges or other adjusting devices. Tighten anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
P&k grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to assure that no voids remain.
F. Field assembly:
::
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
a 1 I08198
Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated.-
Align and adjust the members forming part of a complete frame or
structure before fastening permanently. Clean the bearing surface and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Adjust as required to compensate for discrepancies in elevation and alignment.
Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified
AISC tolerances. Establish required ieveiing and plumbing measurements on the mean operating temperature of the structure. a. Make allowances for the difference between temperature at time of erection and the mean temperature at which the structure will be when completed and in service. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment.
Contract No. 3348 Page 193 of 299Pages
DIVISION 05 - METALS
SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS
1 .oo GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contmct” and of Division 1, “General
Requirements”, shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services newssary to provide all
miscellaneous metals, complete in place, as shown and specified.
A. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
1. Structural Steel
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop
drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for
trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay
work.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. 2. Submit within thirty (30) calendar days after award of contract. Shop drawings shall indude wtalog cuts, templates, and erection and
installation details, as appropriate. Submittals shall be complete in detair;
shall indicate thickness, type, grade, and class of metal, and dimensions;
and shall show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and
installation with relation to the building construction.
1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The current rules and practices set forth in the American Institute of Steel
Construction “Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings” and the “Code of Standard Practice” shall govern this work,
except as otherwise noted or specified.
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 194 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 05 - METALS
SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS
B. All items shall be constructed of sizes and shapes and materials as specified and
as shown. All measurements shall be verified before fabricating any item. All
accessories or incidental items shall be furnished as required to fulfil1 the intent of
the work, whether specifically shown or specified, without additional cost to the
City.
C. Galvanizing shall be in accordance with ASTM A 123-73, A 153-73, A 386-73, or A
525-77, as applicable. Items specified to be galvanized, when practicable and not indicated otherwise, shall be hotdip galvanized after fabrication.
0. Fastenings: Exposed fastenings shall be compatible materials, shall generally
match in wlor and finish, and shall harmonize with the materials to which
fastenings are applied. Materials and parts necessary to complete each item, even
though such work is not definitely shown or specified shall be included.
Miscellaneous bolts and anchors, supports, braces, and connections necessary for completion of the miscellaneous metahork shall be provided. The necessary
rebates, lugs, and brackets shall be provided so that the work can be assembled in a neat and substantial manner. Holes for bolts and screws shall be drilled or
punched. Poor matching of holes shall be cause for rejection. Fastenings shall be
concealed where practicable.
E. Anchorage shall be provided where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items securely in place.
F. Joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water.
G. Dissimilar Materials in contact with each other shall be protected to prevent
galvanic or wrrosive action. Use 3M #473 vinyl pressure tape or Prestite ##579
series polyisobutylene tape.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. In fabricating items which will be exposed to view, limit materials to those which are
free from surface blemishes, pitting, rolled trade names, and roughness.
B. Comply with following standards as pertinent:
1. Steel plates, shapes, and bars: ASTM A36. 2. Steel plates to be bent or cold formed: ASTM A283, Grade C. 3. Steel tubing (hot-formed, welded, or seamless): ASTM A500, Grade B. 4. Steel bars and bar-size shapes: ASTM A615, or ASTM A36.
* a l/08/98 Contract No, 3348 Page 195 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 05 - METALS SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS
5.
6. 7.
Concrete inserts: Threaded or wedge type galvanized ferrous castings
of malleable ironwmplying with ASTM’ A48 or cast steel complying with
ASTM A27. Provide required bolts, shims, and washers, hot-dip
galvanized in accordance with ASTM Al53. ’
Galvanizing: Conform with ASTM A126, 1.25 oz. per sq.ft.
Sleeves: As manufactured by Finigan & Co. #1200, or equal.
2.02 FASTENERS
A. General:
1.
2.
For exterior use and where built into exterior walls, provide zinc-coated
fasteners. Provide fasteners of type, grade, and class required for the particular
use.
B. Comply with following standards as pertinent:
1. Bolts and nuts: Provide hexagon-head
ASTM A307.
2. Lag bolts: Provide square-head type
FF-B-561 C.
regular type complying with
complying with Fed. Spec.
3. Machine screws: Provide cadmium plated steel type complying with
Fed. Spec. FF-S-92.
4. Wood screws: Provide flat-head carbon steel type complying with Fed.
Spec. FF-S-1110.
5. Washers:
a. Plain washers: Comply with Fed. Speck FF-W-92, round, carbon
steel, UON. b. Lock washers: Comply with Fed. Spec. FF-W-84, helical spring
type carbon stee!.
6. Toggle bolts: Provide type, class, and type needed, but complying with
Fed. Spec. FF-B-588C.
7. Anchorage devices:
a. Masonry: Provide expansion shields complying with Fed. Spec.
FF-S-325.
2.03 SHOP PAINT
A. Primer: Use “10-99 Tnemec Primer” or “Rustoleum #I5769 Primer”.
B. Galvanizing: ASTM A386 for assembled products; ASTM Al23 for rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip 118” and thicker.
C. For repair of galvanizing, use a high zinc dust content paint complying with
MIL-P-21035.
l/08/98 C&tract No. 3348 Page 196 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 05 - METALS
SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS
0. Shop paint all steel except steel to be encased in concrete, surfaces to be
welded, contact surfaces to be high-strength bolted, and steelwork which will
be concealed by interior building finish. Thoroughly clean all steel to be
encased in concrete.
2.04 FABRICATION
A-. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or the approved Shop Drawings,
use materials of size, thickness, and type required to produce reasonable
strength and durability in the Work of this Section.
B. Fabricate with accurate angles and surfaces which are true to the required lines
and levels, grinding exposed welds, smooth, and flush, forming exposed
connections with hairline joints, and using concealed fasteners wherever
possible.
C. Prior to shop painting or priming, properly clean metal surfaces as required for
the applied finish and for the proposed use of the item.
0. On surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection, apply two (2) coats of the
specified primer. Change wlor of second coat to distinguish it from the first.
E. All exterior steel, exposed, concealed or embedded, and where called for on
the Drawings, shall be thoroughly zinc-coat galvanized after fabrication by the
hotdipped method.
F. Drill or punch all holes required for the attachment of work of other trades and
for bolted connection. Burned holes are not acceptable.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. Fittings and Shop Assembly: insofar as possible, work shall be fitted and
shop-assembled, ready for erection. Shop and field connections shall be
riveted, welded, blind-riveted or attached with screws; countersunk and finished
flush where exposed, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Field welding
shall not be allowed.
B. Jointing and intersections shall be accurately made in true planes, tightly fitted
and drawn up with end threads nicked to prevent loosening.
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 197 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 05 - METALS
SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS
C. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth.
0. Provide holes and connections for the work of other trades and make
necessary connection thereto.
E. Insulation of metals from contact with masonry and different metals from
contact with each other, shall be provided where necessary to prevent
corrosion.
F. Bolting shall be with proper size bolts. Nuts shall be drawn tight and end threads upset. Metal shall be dean and free from mill scale, rust and/or pitting.
G. Accuracy of Work: Work shall be fabricated and erected square, plumb,
straight and true. Provide all supporting and anchoring means as required for .
proper installation.
3.02 FINISH
A. Shop Priming: Thoroughly dean all surfaces by sandblasting, wire brushing or
other approved method to remove all grease, rust, and loose mill scale. Prime
all surfaces immediately after deaning with one coat of primer, thoroughly
worked into all corners, connections, etc.
B. Field Touch-Up: After installation is completed all welded and other. abraded
areas shall be touched up. For shop primed surfaces, use primer of same
manufacture and type as prime coat. Galvanized items shall be fully shop fabricated prior to galvanizing.
a
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Embedded Items: Deliver miscellaneous metal items to be embedded or
installed in concrete with setting instructions in time to avoid delaying the work,
for setting. Verify grade and line positioning of items as set; report errors or
deviations in order that corrective adjustments may be made before placement
of concrete.
B. General: Install work, other than that to be embedded in concrete, in strict
accordance with drawings, specifications and approved shop drawings.
Perform all required cutting, drilling and fitting. Accurately set, place and properly, securely attach work, in true planes, in alignment, plumb and level;
properly reinforced and stiffened.
C. Expansion, Contraction: Assemble and install work with adequate provisions to
prevent objectionable distortion and over-stressing from expansion or construct
to be weathertight where exposed to the weather.
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 198 of 299 Pages
a
DIVISION 05 - METALS
SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS
3.04 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS The scope of work as listed and the following detailed requirements are not
all-inclusive. It is the intent of this section to provide all miscellaneous steel items required which are not specified elsewhere. All necessary supports, guides, brackets,
etc. shown or required to support all equipment shall be provided in accordance with
the equipment manufacturer. Obtain templates from equipment manufacturers, and
carefully fabricate supports, brackets, etc. to conform to these templates. Cooperate
with all other trades and install all items as required in time to avoid delaying the work.
A.
B.
C.
0.
E.
Fabricate backing plates for wall mounted countertops, cabinets, equipment,
and other items shown or required, exwpt where necessary plates are
furnished by equipment manufacturer. Carefully study the drawings and specifications to determine all such items for which backing plates are required.
Pipes and conduit sleeves not specified in other sections of these specifications
shall be placed in all locations shown on the drawings or required for making
pipe and conduit penetrations through building structure.
Vertical steel ladders shall be fabricated as detailed on the engineer drawings
with Schedule 40 steel rungs. Rungs shall be headed into rails and welded.
Ladders shall be to widths shown on Engineer’s plans. Ladders shall be anchored at top and bottom. All joints shall be welded. Ladders shall be
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Installation shall be in accordance with
Building Code.. Provide cages around ladders where indicated or required to
comply with Industrial Safety requirements.
Install miscellaneous metal covers, frames, racks, etc., furnished by utility
companies according to their instructions.
Immediately after erection, dean the field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop priming. Paint the exposed areas with same material used for shop priming.
a 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 199 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 05 - METALS SECTION 05580 - SHEET METAL FABRICATION
1 .oo
1.01
1.02
’ 1.03
2.00
2.01
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General Requirements”, shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work Included in this Section:
1. Stainless steel counter at Concession Building.
2. Stainless steel counter in Restrooms.
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing showing details of fabrication assembly and
installation.
8. Samples: Submit 8” square sample of metal and finish required.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. Provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness and freedom from
surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit.
B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 302/304, with No. 4 finish, minimum 18
gage.
C. Fasteners: Use fasteners made of the same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless othewise indicated. Do not use metals which are corrosive or incompatible
with materials jointed.
1. --- Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable. Match finish of metal surrounding fastener.
2. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless
otherwise indicated.
1 I08198 , Contract No. 3348 Page 200 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PlASTlC
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 0.’ Anchors and Inserts: Use non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and
inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion
resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place
anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
E. Plywood Backing: APA Ext. A-C, Douglas Fir plywood.
F. Joint Sealers: See Division 7 section. --_
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate items from materials of type, gage and finish and to dimensions, profile
and details indicated, or required to provide unit of strength required for intended
use and to produce exposed surfaces which are smooth, flat and free of
imperfections.
1.
2.
3. 4.
Form sheet metal in maximum lengths and keep joints to a minimum, with
cut edges concealed. _
Continuously weld all joints, including field joints, providing seamless
sanitary construction.
Return backsplash to walls. Provide rounded and coved comers and bends with minimum 3/4” radius or as detailed.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place sheet metal items plumb, level, in proper alignment with, adjoining work.
B. Use concealed anchorages. Seal joint between counter and wall to form
waterproof sanitary joint which will withstand repeated cleaning operations.
I) l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 201 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 06 -WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
1 .oo GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and the requirements of
Division 1 shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though
repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work Included in this Section:
1. All wood framing including roof, floor, wall and ceiling framing, purlins,
2.
partitions, etc.
All wood blocking, backing, stripping, furring, grounds, etc., except as specifically excluded.
::
Plywood sheathing, at roof and shear walls.
Plywood backing for electric and telephone terminals.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
::
::
::
7.
ii:
Paralams
Truss Joists Fonnwork
Fasteners and Supports
Sheathing Paper
Glued laminated beams
Doom Finish hardware
Lath and Plaster
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Quality Control:
1.
2.
Each piece of lumber shall bear the grademark of the WCLIB (or WWPA)
or of an agency certified by the WCLIB, (or WWPA), and each mill
shipment to the site shall be accompanied by a certificate of inspection by
the WCLIB (or WWPA).
Each piece of plywood shall be grade stamped in accordance with APA “Guide to Plywood Grades”, in conformance with the requirements of NBS PS-1.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348
*
Page 202 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTlC
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
1.04
e 2.00
2.01
B. Reference Standards:
1. APA - American Plywood Association: “Guide to Plywood Grades”.
::
:WPI - American Wood Preservers Institute.
PS - United States Product Standard:
a. PS-1 - “Construction and Industrial Plywood”.
4. UBC - Uniform Building Code: Volume 1, Chapter 25, “wood?
5. &LIB - West Coast t-umber Inspection Bureau: “Standard Grading Rules No. 16”.
6. &PA - Western World Products Association:
a. “Grading Rules for Lumber.
MOISTURE CONTENT:
Unless noted otherwise on drawings or in this specification all framing lumber and
plywood shall have a moisture content not greater than nineteen (19) percent.
Moisture content shall be maintained at 19 percent or less before, during and after
installation.
PRODUCTS
GRADE STAMPS
A. Framing lumber: Identify framing lumber by the grade stamp. of the West. Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, or such other grade stamp as is approved in advance
by the Engineer.
B.
C,
Plywood: Identify plywood as to species, grade, and glue type by the stamp of the
American Plywood Association.
Other: Identify other materials of this Section by the appropriate stamp of the
agency listed in the reference standards, or by such other means as are approved
in advance by the Engineer.
0. Lumbar not grade stamped, and lumber of improper grade, shall be removed from the job site and immediately replaced by grade stamped lumber of the proper
grade.
e
1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 203 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 96 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 96100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
2.02 LUMBER
A. All framing lumber to be covered with gypsum board shall be air or kiln dried
with a moisture content of 19% maximum, and be stamped “S-Dry”.
B. All wood in contact with concrete or masonry shall be pressure treated 0. F.
with pentachlorophenol or approved equal preservative. Untreated redwood
may be used for trim, etc., where strength and holding power or connectors or
fasteners are not a factor.
C. All timbers 6 x 8 and larger exposed to view shall be free of heart center
(FOHC), with moisture content of 22% maximum.
0. Lumber (Wood Framing): Meet requirements of following minimum grades,
unless otherwise noted:
l&E
Studs
Plates
Beams
Exposed Beams
Joists
Posts
Blocking &
Misc.
a l/08/98
sIBsas Grade
D.F. Stud for 2x4,
##2 for 2x6 or Greater
D.F. #I3 or Batter
and 123b
D.F. #l for Spans of
6’.0” or greater,
#2 for all others
D.F. #l Appearance
Grade FOHC
D.F. No. 2, UON
D.F. #l for Concealed,
#l FOHC for Exposed, #2 for 4x4, #l for
4x6 or greater
D.F. ##3 or Better WCLIB 123d
Contract No. 3348
Referancee
WCLIB 121~
and 123b
WCLIBl2lc
WCLIB 130b
WCLIB 123b
WCLIB 131b
*
.
0
Page 204 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
2.03 PLYWOOD:
Plywood shall conform to requirements of Voluntary Products Standard PSl-66,
Douglas Fir, Structural I, except as otherwise specified, exterior grade. Each piece
shall be grade stamped and identified.
A. Sheathing and Shear Walls: See Structural Drawings
B. For Irrigation Control Backboards and Similar Uses: APA Exterior Grade A-D.
C. For Fully Concealed Applications, Except as Specified Above: Exterior Grade
C-D.
2.04 MATERIALS OTHER THAN LUMBER
A. General:
All materials, insofar as practicable, shall be delivered to the site in the
manufacturefs original containers, and shall bear the trademarks and names
thereof.
B. Pressure Treatment (Decay and Termite Prevention):
1.
2.
Pressure treat for dewy and termite prevention, wood materials which
are embedded in or set against concrete, masonry, plaster or where shown on drawings or where otherwise exposed to continuing dampness or moisture or required by the Building Code.
Treat in accordance with the following standards:
a. American Wood Preservers Assn. (AWPA) Standard C 2-77,
“Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative
Treatment by Pressure Processes”. b. American Wood Preservers Assn. (AWPA) Standard C g-77,
“Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes”.
C. American Wood Preservers Bureau (AWPB) Quality Control
Standards.
C. Cut Treated Materials:
Treated materials, which are cut or countersunk for flush installation of bolt
heads, shall have cut surface well brush-coated with 2 coats of the preservative
used in the original treatment.
a 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 205 of 299 Pages
DIVISION,96 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 FRAMING
A.
B.
C.
- w 1 I08198
General:
Sizes shall be as shown on drawings. Framing shall be closely fitted, accurately set to required lines and levels, and rigidly secured in place Joists shall be set with the crown edge up. Members shall be framed for passage of
pipes and ducts to avoid unnecessary cutting of structuml framing. Nailing, spiking and bolting shall be done in accordance with Uniform Building Code,
and schedules and details shown on drawings. Members shall be located to
give true surfaces for finish materials. Metal connectors and joist hangers shall
be located where shown. Drill holes for bolts of same diameter as bolt shank, plus l/16-inch. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts. Lag screws shall
not be driven. Provide sub-drilled holes for all screws, or use self-drilling
screws. All fasteners shall be fully nailed or bolted.
In addition to framing operations normal to the fabrication and erection indicated on the Drawings, install wood blocking and backing required for the
work of other trades.
Do not notch, cut, or bore members for pipes, ducts, or conduits, or for other
reasons except as shown on the Dmwings or as specifically approved in advance by the Engineer. Where plates are cut for passing pipes and similar
items, they shall be reinforced on both sides with l/8” x 3” x 18” steel plates
punched for 19-d nails 6” on center, staggered.
Sills:
Sills shall be set level and square. Sills shall be anchored to the foundations as
indicated. Bolts shall be provided with plate washers and nuts. Bolts in exterior walls shall be zinc coated.
Joists: -_
Joists shall be of the sizes and spacing indicated and shall be set accurately and in alignment. Floor and ceiling joists shall be of uniform width. Joists shall
have full bearing on supports. Laps shall occur over bearings only and shall be
spiked.
Contract No. 3348 Page 208 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
0. Wall Framing:
Studs shall be selected for straightness, and set plumb, true, and in alignment; studs over 8 feet long shall be bridged horizontally with nominal 2-inch thick material of the same width as the studs. Sizes and spacing of studs shall be as
indicated. Studsshall be doubled at jambs of openings (U.O.N.).
E. Ceiling Joists:
Ceiling joists shall be sized as indicated, and set accurately and in alignment. Joists shall be toe-nailed to wall plates with not less than three lo-penny nails. Openings in ceilings shall be framed with headers and trimmers.
F. Plywood Sheathing:
1.
2.
Placement: a. Place plywood. with face grain perpendicular to supports and
continuously over at least two (2) supports, except where
otherwise shown on the Drawings.
b. Center joints accurately over supports, unless otherwise shown
on Drawings. Protection of Plywood: Protect plywood from moisture by use of waterproof coverings until the plywood in turn has been covered with the next succeeding component or finish.
3.02 COORDINATION:
A. Coordinate with roofing work and provide treated cants, stops and nailers, for insulation, roof drains, and flashings in accordance with roofing manufacturer’s
requirements. In general, stops and nailers are required at edges of roof decks
and around projections through the deck.
3.03 CLEANING-UP
A. Keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition at all times during the
progress of this portion of the Work. Do not allow the accumulation of sawdust, cut ends, or debris. At the end of each working day, or more often if required for safety, thoroughly sweep all surfaces where refuse has settled and remove the refuse to the area designated for its storage. At completion of this portion
of the Work, thoroughly broom dean all surfaces of the interior.
B. Upon completion of framing and any required inspections of framing, which will be left exposed in the completed building and prior to application of painters stain of any surfaces, remove all exposed grading stamps, blemishes and excessive weathering from framing members.
#, l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 207 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06113 - SHEATHING PAPER
1 .oo
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
2.00
2.01
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and the requirements of
Division 1 shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though
repeated in full herein.
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work included in this Section:
1. Requirements for furnishing and installing sheathing paper.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
::
Rough Carpentry Lath and Plaster
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDtlNG
A. Provide factory wrapping, packaging, and other means necessary to prevent damage or deterioration of products during shipment, handling, and storage.
B. Maintain protective coverings in place and in good repair until removal is
necessary.
JOB CONDlTlONS
A. Surfaces to receive sheathing paper shall be free from projecting nails, wires, or
other conditions which might damage paper.
B. Surfaces to be covered shall be dry, and shall have dried in fair weather not less
than 3-days following wetting by min.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt:
UBC Standard 32-1, Type 15, Grade 0, plain (unperfomted), (UON).
Contract No. 3348 Page 208 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 06 -WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06113 - SHEATHING PAPER
B. Fastenings:
1. Nails, staples, hog rings, or tie wire suitable for framing or backing.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
0.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
# l/08/98
Locations:
Provide sheathing paper under exterior metal lath and plaster at top of parapet
where indicated.
Installation Types:
Single layer on vertical surfaces, double layer over wall caps, and where indicated.
Openings and Penetrations:
Paper flash as specified.
Utilize sheathing paper in longest lengths practical to minimize joints.
Horizontal Joints:
Lap paper not less than 3 inches.
Walls Comers:
Wrap paper to overlap not less than 12 inches each side of wmer.
Intermediate Vertical Joints:
::
Lap paper not less than 6 inches.
In adjacent sheets, offset joints not less than 48 inches.
3. In alternate sheets, offset joints not less than 24 inches.
4. Do not locate any two joints at same vertical alignment.
Lap paper over head flashings and base screeds and under sill flashings at metal lower vents. Treat penetrations and other details as necessary for adequate
weather protection.
Secure paper to maintain in place until covered by other materials.
Contract No. 3348 Page 209 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06113 - SHEATHING PAPER
J. When complete, sheathing paper shall be reasonably flat, without excessive
warps and bulges, and free from unnecessary holes, cuts, tears, and other
damage and defects.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install a full-width sheet with bottom edge placed at lowest level on wall to ba
sheathed.
B. Install a second full-width sheet with bottom edge overlapping top edge of first
sheet.
C. Proceed upward to top of wall as required.
3.03 OPENINGS
A. Individually flash each vent opening head, jamb, and sill using sheathing paper
in 12 inch wide strips and in lengths equal or rough opening dimension plus 12
inches.
B. Install with inner edge of strips turned into opening for full depth of wall framing;
outer edge turned under wall-sheathing paper at heads, and over top of
wall-sheathing paper at jambs and sills.
C. At opening comers, clip paper strips as required, neatly shape and fit into
comers, and wrap and overlap ends of adjacent strips not less than 6 inches.
# 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 210 of 299 Pages
DltilSlON 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
0 SECTION 061510 TRUSS JOISTS
1 .oo
1.01
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
1.03
e 1.04
1.05
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS .
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and the requirements of Division 1 shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though
repeated in full herein.
A. This work includes the complete furnishing and installation of all TJI joists as shown
on the drawings, herein specified and necessary to complete the work.
B. These products shall be designed and manufactured to the standards set forth in the CAB0 Report No. NER-200.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A Carpentry and millwork
B. Glu-laminated members.
DESIGN
A. The Trus Joist Corporation products shall be custom designed to fit the dimensions
and loads indicated on the plans.
B. When requested, a complete set of design calculations shall be prepared by the manufacturer under the supervision of a registered professional engineer.
SUBMITTAL DRAWINGS
A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing layout and detail necessary for determining fit and placement in the building may be provided by the manufacturer.
B. Production: Do not proceed with fabrication and/or cutting until Shop Drawings and
Design Calculations (when required) have been reviewed by the Engineer and/or
Engineer.
@ q l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 211 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 061510 TRUSS JOISTS
2.00
2.01
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. Flange members, web members and adhesives shall conform to the provisions
of CAB0 Report No. NER-2000
2.02 FABRICATION
A. The TJI joists shall be manufactured in a plant approved for fabrication by the
building code and under the supervision of an approved third party inspection
agency.
2.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Each of the joists shall be identified by a stamp indicating the joist type, CAD0
NER report number, manufacturer’s name, plant number, and the independent
inspection agency logo and evaluation report number.
3.00
3.01
EXECUTION
ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. The TJI joists, if stored prior to erection, shall be stored in a vertical position
and protected from the weather. They shall be handled with care so they are not damaged. The TJI joists are to be erected and installed in accordance with
the plans, and any Trus Joist Corporation drawings and installation suggestions. Tempomry construction loads which cause stresses beyond
design limits are not permitted. Erection bracing, in addition to that specified, is
to be provided to keep the TJI joists straight and plumb as required and to
assure adequate lateral support for the individual TJI joists and the entire
system , until the sheathing material has been applied.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall give notification to the TJ representative prior to enclosing the TJI joists to provide opportunity for inspection of the installation,
3.03 PERFORMANCE
A. Products shall be proven by testing and evaluation in accordance with the a
provisions of ASTM D-5055.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 212 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06151- TRUSS JOISTS
3.04 FIRE RATING/SOUND RATINGS
A. Fire and sound ratings are to be established in accordance with assemblies as detailed in CAB0 Report No. NER-200.
3.05 WARRANTY
A. The products delivered shall be free from manufacturing errors or defects in workmanship and material. The products shall perform to Trus Joist
specifications for the normal and expected life of the building.
4.00 ALTERNATES AND/OR EQUALS
A. Due to the wstomized detailing and engineering characteristics of the roof
(and/or floor) framing assembly, it is a requirement that TJI joists be used in the
“base” bid.
B. Other manufacturers bids are to be listed in the alternative section of your
proposal. All framing plans, detailing, and calculations for the alternate bids will
be reviewed by the owner, Engineer, and engineer for structural performance,
possible conflicts with related trades, and ,wmpatibility with the overall building
requirements and building code.
C. Alternate products will only be permitted if written approval and acceptance is
obtained by both Engineer and Cii.
0. At the discretion of the specifier of record, accepted alternates will be listed on
the final addendum prior to the bid date.
l 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 213 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06161 - PARALLAM
1 .oo
1 .Ol
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and the requirements of
Division 1 shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though
repeated in full herein.
SCOPE OF WORK _.
A; This work includes the complete furnishing and installation of all Parallam parallel
strand lumber P.S.L. as shown on the drawings, herein specified and necessary to
complete the work.
B. These products shall be designed and manufactured to the standards set forth in
the CAB0 Report No. NER-292.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Carpentry and millwork.
B. Truss joists.
DESIGN
A. The Pamllam P.S.L. shall be custom designed to fit the dimensions and loads
indicated on the plans.
B. When requested a complete set of design calculations shall be prepared by the
manufacturer under the supenrision of a registered professional engineer.
SUBMITTAL DRAWINGS
A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing layout and detail necessary for determining fit and placement in the building may be provided by the manufacturer.
B. Production: Do not proceed with fabrication and/or cutting until shop drawings and
design calculations (when required) have been reviewed by the Engineer and/or
Engineer.
m
w l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 a Page 214 of 299 Pages
0 DIVISION 96 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06161- PARALLAM
2.99
2.01
2.02
2.03 FABRICATION
2.94 IDENTIFICATION
3.99
3.01
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Materials shall comply with CAB0 Report No. NER-292.
A. Veneers shall be Douglas Fir or Southern Pine or thicknesses approved by the
building code. They shall be ultrasonically graded or graded by other advanced
grading systems approved by the code.
B. Adhesives shall be of the waterproof type conforming to the requirements of ASTM D-2559.
HARDWARE
All hardware is to be fabricated by others according to details contained in the contract
drawings.
A. Parallam P.S.L. shall be manufactured in a plant recognized by the building code
and under the supervision of an approved third party inspection agency. It shall be
manufactured in a continuous process with all grain parallel with the length of the
members. All .members are to be free of finger joints or scarfs or mechanical
connections in full length members.
A. Parallam P.S.L. shall be identified by a stamp indicating the product type and grade, CAB0 NER report number, manufacturer’s name, plant number, and the
independent inspection agency logo and evaluation report number.
EXECUTION
ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. The Parallam P.S.L. if stored prior to erection, shall be protected from the weather.
They shall be handled with care so they are not damaged. The Parallam are to be erected and installed in accordance with the plans, and any Trus Joist Corporation
drawings and installation suggestions. Temporary construction loads which cause
stresses beyond design limits are not permitted. Holes, cuts or notches not previously approved by Trus Joist engineering shall not be permitted. The final
erection of the Parallam P.S.L. shall be under the direction of a qualified
construction supervisor.
e 1 JO8198 Contract No. 3348 Page 215 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 08 - WOOD AND PLASTIC SECTION 061610 PARALLAM
3.02 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall give notification prior to endosing the Parallam P.S.L. to
provide opportunity for inspection of the installation.
3.03
4.00
WARRANTY
The products delivered shall be free from manufacturing emrs or defects in
workmanship and material. The products shall perform to Trus Joist specifications for the normal and expected life of the building.
ALTERNATES AND/OR EQUALS
B. Connections: Lateral nail holding and withdrawal are as provided in the code
for Douglas Fir sawn lumber. Nails installed parallel to the glue lines on the
narrow face shall not be spaced closer than 4 inches for lo-penny common
nails and 3 inches for 8-penny common nails.. Nails installed perpendicular to
the glue lines on the wide face shall be installed in accordance with the code.
These nailing specifications are based on a member at least 3/4 inches thick
and 3-l/2 inches wide. Holding power of bolts installed perpendicular to the
glue lines is as provided in the code for dense Douglas Fir.
A.
B.
C.
D.
a 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 216 of 299 Pages e
Due to the customized detailing and engineering characteristics of the roof
(and/or floor) framing assembly, it is a requirement that Parallam P.S.L. be used in the “base” bid.
Other manufacturers’ bids are to be listed in the alternate section of your proposal. All framing plans, detailing, and calculations for the alternate bids will
be reviewed by the City and engineer for structural performance possible conflicts with related trades, and compatibility with the overall building
requirements and building code.
Alternate products will only be allowed in written approval and acceptance is
obtained by both Engineer and City.
At the discretion of the specifier of record, accepted alternates will be listed on
the final addendum prior to the bid date.
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
1 .oo GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and the requirements of Division 1 shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though
repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Laminated Plastic Casework.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing list of materials and hardware,
sizes, sections, elevations and details of construction and assembly as required by
Section 1, Millwork Shop Drawings of the WIC Manual of Millwork.
1.
2.
Indicate all grounds, backing, blocking, sleepers, and other items required
for the installation of casework which are to be furnished and installed as part of the structure by the General Contractor.
The WIC Certified Compliance Grade Stamp indicating the grade specifmd
shall be affixed to the Millwork Shop Drawings, certifying that the casework will be manufactured in accordance with the WIC grade specified, and that
the cabinet construction complies with CAC Title 21.
B. Samples and Product Data: Submit the following items for selection and approval:
1. Choice of door pulls.
2. Full range of plastic laminate patterns and wlors.
3. Catalog data for each proposed cabinet hardware item.
C. Certificates: Before delivery to the job site, the fabricator shall issue a WIC
Compliance Certificate, certifying that all casework meets specified qualities and
grades. The WIC Certified Compliance Grande Stamp shall be affixed to shop drawings and each unit of casework.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standards: Comply with specific provisions of the following:
1. Woodwork Institute of California @VIC) “Manual of Millwork”, latest edition.
m l/08/98 Contrht No. 3348 Page 217 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Laminated Plastic: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.
B. Hardware for Casework Provide as listed in WIC Supplement No. 1 to Section 15.
Provide pulls on all doors.
1. Hinges: Heavy duty wrap-around, 2-114” minimum width, offset for overlay
doors.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Quality Standards: Comply with the indicated standards as applicable:
1. Plastic Covered Casework: WIC Section 15, custom grade.
B. Design and Construction Features: Comply with the details shown for profile and construction of casework and where not otherwise shown, comply with applicable
Quality Standards.
::
Construct casework of overlay style.
Coordinate with sheet metal fabrications.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Securely anchor casework in place. Coordinate with sheet metal fabrications.
a 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 218 of 299 Pages a
a
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
1 .oo
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
a
1.05 DELIVERY STORAGE
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General
Requirements”, shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work Included: Treat exterior surfaces of masonry walls, induding top of wall and
roof side of all masonry parapets with specified water repellent solution.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications, application instructions, and
general recommendations for water repellent coating. .- .
B. Certificate: Submit manufacturer’s certificate of conformance.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with California Air Resources Board (CARB) requirements for maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) content.
B. Application Qualifications: A firm with not less than 3 years of successful experience in application of water repellent coating of type required on substrates similar to those of this project.
C. Notification: Notify water repellent manufacturer at least 48 hours prior to water
repellent application.
D. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Proceed with application of water repellent when weather conditions and substrate conditions are in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
A. Deliver materials in original sealed containers, dearly marked with manufacturer’s
name, brand name, and type of materials.
G l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 219 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK .
B. Store material in area where temperatures are not less than 50 degrees F (10
degrees C) or over 85 degrees F (29 degrees C), unless otherwise authorized by manufacturer.
1.06 GUARANTEE
2.00
2.01
A. Provide manufacturer’s five-year written warranty against moisture penetration.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. Provide non-silicone, dear, non-yellowing, penetrating water repellent solution
consisting of dissolved chemical solids in complete solution requiring no
agitation.
B. The solution carrier shall not stain or diswlor concrete or masonry.
C. Chemical Solids Content: 5.5%
D. Solids shall be nonflammable after evaporation of carrier.
E. Provide water repellent solution wmpatible with either water-base or oil-base
paints.
2.02 MANUFACTURER/PRODUCT
A. ’ Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
Rainguard Products Company “Vandal Guard”
“Rainguard Blok-Lok with Micr+Lok” Inglewood, California, 213/670-2953
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Test Application: Prior to performance of water repellent work, induding bulk purchase/delivery of products, prepare a small application in an obtrusive
location and in a manner acceptable to the Engineer, for purpose of
demonstrating final effect (visual and physical/chemical) of planned installation.
Proceed with work only after Engineer’s acceptance of test application, or as
otherwise directed.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Pa& 220 of 299 Pages l
B DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
G 1 I08198
Clean substrate of substances which might interfere with penetration/adhesion of
water repellents. Test for moisture content, in accordance with repellent manufacturer’s instructions to ensure that surface is sufficiently dry.
Coordination with Sealants: Where feasible, delay application of water repellents
until installation of sealants has been completed in joints adjoining surfaces to be coated with repellent.
Protect adjoining work, induding sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over
of water repellent. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Installation: Apply a heavy saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces
indicated for treatment using low pressure spray equipment. Comply with
manufacturer’s instructions.
Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for limitations on drying time between coats.
Apply spray coating of Vandal Guard over water repellent coating, comply with manufacturer’s instructions.
Contract No. 3348 Page 221 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07500 - BUILT-UP ROOFING
1 .oo GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General
Requirements,” apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE
A. Work Included in this Section:
:.
3:
Built-up roofing of inorganic fiberglass composition.
Bondable base flashing.
Parapet wall wvering.
8. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
::
Sheet metal.
Plumbing
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical, product data, installation
instructions. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
1. For asphalt bitumen, provide label on each container or certification with each load of bulk bitumen, indicating flash point (FP), finished blowing
temperature (FBT), softening point (SP) and equiviswus temperature
WV.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide primary products, including each type of
roofing sheet (felt), bitumen, composition flashings, and vapor barrier (if any),
produced by a single manufacturer, which has produced that type product successfully for not less than 3 years. Provide secondary products only as
recommended by manufacturer of primary products for use with roofing system specified.
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1. Uniform Building Code (UBC), Chapter 32, Section 3203(e) Fire Retardant
Roof Coverings.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 222 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION .
SECTION 07500 - BUILT-UP ROOFING
C. UL Listing: Provide built-up roofing system and component materials which have
been tested for application and slopes indicated and are listed by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for Class A external fire exposure.
1. Provide roof covering materials bearing Classification Marking (UL) on
bundle, package or container indicating that materials have been produced
under UCs Classification and Follow-up Service.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations and warranty requirements.
B. Protect work of other trades from damage. If work of other trades is damaged in
performance of work of this sedton, replace or patch in manner fully acceptable to
the City.
1.06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348
Pii Pockets:
Pitch pockets will not be allowed on this project for any reason.
Field Conditions:
Verify drawing dimensions with actual field conditions. Inspect related work and
adjacent surfaces. Report all conditions which prevent proper execution of this
work to the Engineer.
Applicator:
Officially listed and approved by the roofing material manufacturer. Applicator to
provide written proof of same with submittals.
Delivery and Storage:
Deliver all materials in their original containers, with seals unbroken, and with
manufacturer’s name and product identification dearly legible. Store so as to preclude entry of moisture or damage from any sourc8. Remove wet materials
from buildings and site. All asphalt emulsion materials must be protected from
freezing.
Page 223 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07500 - BUILT-UP ROOFING
E. Membrane Phasing:
Phasing of built-up roof membrane layers will not be allowed. Surfacing may be
installed over a clean surface after all plies are completed.
F. Guarantee:
At the time of completion of the aforementioned items, submit to the City, a 10 year
(NDL) no dollar limit guarantee including materials and labor, and three (3) copies
of the attached Agreement to maintain this roofing work jointly signed by the
General Contractor, Roofing Subcontractor and Roof Manufacturer, stating the
following:
1.
2.
3.
The undersigned hereby proposes and upon execution thereof by the City
does agree, for a period of ten (10) years after execution date thereof, to
inspect and make immediate emergency temporary repairs as required to
stop leaks or correct defects in the built-up roofing within twenty-four (24)
hours of notice received from Cii by t8lephOn8, telegram or lettet; and
further agrees to make such temporary and permanent repairs without
reference to or consideration of the cause or nature of such leaks or defects
in the work. Work required within the period will be completed without cost to the City,
except that repair work required because of Act of God, abuse, alterations,
(other than that caused by defects in the roofing work), will be paid for by
the City, promptly after completion of the required repair work in each
instance. HoW8ver, this agreement and the enforcement of its provisions
shall not deprive the City of any action, right or remedy otherwise available
to him. Repair work completed at the City’s cost shall be invoiced to the City at
prevailing rates, and shall include an itemized breakdown of quantities and
unit costs for labor and materials, and shall include not more than twenty
(20%) percent markup for overhead and profit.
G. Site Inspection:
The roofing manufacturer, at a minimum, shall send his technical representative
(not a sales representative) to the job when the work is 10 to 20, 50 to 75, and again at 100 percent complete. Representative shall verify that the installation is in
conformance with manufacturers installation specifications. Cuts/plugs necessary
to the guarantee described in Paragraph ‘F’ above shall be taken at this time. Cuts shall be taken at one (1) per ten (10) squares. Representative shall issue a written report of his findings prior to final billing for the roof work. Certificate of
maintenance agreement (See Paragraph 3.09) shall be executed and attached.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Pa98 224 of 299 Pages
0 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07500 - BUILT-UP ROOFING
2.00
2.01
2.02
a
2.03
2.94
2.05
2.08
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS (R-2)
A. This Specification is based upon Manville 4 GNC. Other manufacturers shall be
limited to Owens-Coming, ConGlas, and Celotex.
B. Summary of Materials
Basesheet: GlasBase, ASTM D4601 Type II, 1 layer, 28%
Felts: GlasPly II, 2 plies, ASTM D2178 Type VI.
Bitumen: Type Ill, 23# per square per ply, ASTM D-312.
Mineral Cap Sheet: Glaskapi 1 layer ASTM D3999.
ASPHALT I
Air blown asphalt manufactured specially for roofing purposes complying with the latest addition of ASTM Specification D312. Type II asphalt shall be used for interply and
surface moppings.
PRIMER
Asphalt primer conforming to ASTM Specification D-41 or Federal Spedfication
SS-A-701 B.
PLASTIC CEMENT
Asphalt plastic cement conforming to Federal Specification SS-C-153, Type I, or ASTM
04586 Type II.
PLY SHEETS
Shall be Type VI conforming to ASTM D-2178, Type VI.
MINERAL SURFACE CAP SHEET
Inorganic mat saturated and coated with weather grade ashphat embedded with opaque,
noncombustible universal granules. Sheet to conform with ASTM D-3909.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 225 of 299 Pages
DNISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07500 - BUILT-UP ROOFING
2.07 NAILS
Annular ring shank, square head, 1” dia. cap, one-piece nails. STAPLES ARE NOT
ACCEPTABLE.
2.08 CANT STRIP
Four (4)-inch high perfite.
2.09
2.10
3.00
3.01
_.
BASE FLASH
Dynaflex SBS base flashing over one (1) layer glass base sheet on wood parapets or
prime and 1 layer Dynaflex on wncrete surfaces.
PARAPET COVERING
Mineral Cap Sheet over-l layer Type VI Felt over 1 layer base Sheet, or same as base flashing (two part wall covering). Detail DFE-3 (WH).
EXECUTION
COORDINATION OF WORK
A.
B.
C.
0.
E.
Roofing applicator shall acquaint himself with the work of other trades whose work
abuts, adjoins, or is in any manner affected by work under this section. Consult the
drawings of other trades, and coordinate their work with the work under this
section, to avoid omissions and delays.
Install metal flashings that are an integral part of the roofing simultaneously with
the roofing application. Coordinate the installation of such flashings. Determine
that the rwfing installation, induding the metal accessories furnished by other
trades, is suitable to receive the required warranty.
Apply parapet covering prior to installation of sheet metal coping.
Projections and extensions through the roof: All pipes, vents, ducts, stacks, and
openings shall be installed through the roof deck before roofing is applied. No
projections shall be constructed through the flashing cant, and not less than 15
inches from the intersection of the cant and roof deck.
Construction T&tic: The general contractor and roofer shall take precautions to
prevent all construction trades from damaging the roof during and after
construction.
e l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 228 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07500 - BUILT-UP ROOFING
F. Weather and Water: Roofing shall not be applied unless correct asphalt
application temperatures can be maintained to obtain good embedment and adhesion. Nor shall operation be conducted when water in any form is present
on deck, such as rain, dew, ice, frost, snow, or fog. Water on the roof shall be
limited to containers for human consumption. Moisture content of plywood
shall not exceed 19% at placement of roofing.
3.02 ROOF APPLICATION
A. Using base sheet, start with an 12” width. Following felts to be applied full width, lapping each felt 2” over the preceding one. Nail the laps at 9” centers
and down the longitudinal center of each felt nail two rows of nails with rows
spaced approximately 11” apart and nails staggered on approximately 18”
centers. Use square spiral anular ring shank squar8 head, 1” dia. cap, one
piece nails. DO NOT STAPLE.
B. Starting at the low edge apply one 18” wide then over that one a full 36” wide
Type IV. Felt - following felts are to be applied full width overlapping the
preceding felt by 23-213” in such manner that at least 3 plies of felt cover the base felt in all locations. Install each felt so that it is firmly and uniformly set,
without voids, into the hot (at EVT) asphalt, applied just before the felt at a nominal uniform rate of 23 Ibs. per square over the entire surface.
C. Starting at the. low edge apply one layer of the cap sheet, being sure to
maintain 2” side laps and 6” end laps over the proceeding sheets. Rack mop the cap sheet and flop it into a full width of mopping of asphalt (3040 Ibs per
sq. total). The temperature of the asphalt when applied must be such that,
when the cap sheet is set into it, it’s temperature is approximately 2OoF above
the M to assure proper bonding. The cap sheet must be firmly and uniformly
set into the hot asphalt with all edges well sealed.
Broadcast granules of same wlor into any exposed asphalt at laps, seams and
spills while asphalt is still hot.
0. Roofing shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions. All plies shall be shingled in, free of buckles and fishmouths.
Each layer shall be laid so that the flow of water is over or parallel to (but never
against) the lap. End laps shall be a minimum of 12” apart.
E; Embed the full 38” width of each ply in hot bitumen. Asphalt shall be
sufficiently hot to insure a complete bond of ply to ply.
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 227 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07500 - BUILT-UP ROOFING l
3.03 WOOD PARAPET
Lay one layer base sheet ov8r top of parapet allowing it to extend 2” down outside edge. Nail on top of parapet for placement and 9” OX. in both directions on vertical
surfaces plus 4” O.C. at side laps. Lap 6”. Solid mop and embed second layer in hot
asphalt. Nail at 4” O.C. on top of parapet. Extend over and 2” down outside wall. Lap
6” minimum. Solid mop and embed mineral cap sheet over Type IV Felt, nailing at 4”
on center on top of parapet. Lap 6” minimum. Detail #DFE-3 (WH).
3.04 BASE FLASHING
3.05
Install at all vertical surfaces including walls and curbs 1 layer base flashing set 1
layer Dynaflex in hot asphalt. Nail 4” O.C. Detail #KIFE-3 (WL).
CANT STRIPS
At all intersections of roof with vertical surfaces, provide and install 4” high perlite cant
strips in hot asphalt or plastic cement, unless otherwise detailed.
3.08 ROOF DRAINS
Lead pan (4 Ibs.), set into roof drain and overflow scupper. Trim 8dg8S in drain.
3.07 CONTINUOUS PIPES (Gas Lines, Etc.)
Do not penetrate valleys or waterways. If possible, enter deck in a horizontal
direction, into a hood, (pelican’s mouth) or counter-flashed vertical surface. Do not
nail, or mastic seal support blocks through roofing. Large or long pipes should be set
3.08
on rollers. Use screw tightening damping ring.
VENT PIPES
All pipes shall have full height lead flashing (4 Ibs.) formed into tops.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Test cuts, if required by City, shall be taken as follows:
A. Take one test cut for each 50 squares of roof area, or part thereof. Test cuts will be weighted and visually inspected on jobsite and then removed for delivery to testing laboratory. Additional test cuts may be taken if inspection service has ..- reason to believe that specifications have not been followed in completing
roofing application.
1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 228 of299Pages l
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07500 - BUILT-UP ROOFING .
B. Test Samples: 4” x 42” cut across laps in felts in a manner to expose all plies,
C. Weight Tolerance: Manufacturer’s recommended minimum Weight in ounces
per square foot.
D. Should the test cuts show the material to be light in total weight or plies the
roofing shall be brought up to manufacturer’s recommendations to comply with
membrane warranty at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. Roofing will not be permitted to proceed until all defidi8ncies disdosed as a
result of “test cuts” have been wrtected and approved.
F. Repair cutouts immediately after removal of samples. Place the same number .
and types of sheets and moppings required by the specifications, applied over .
the cut with the first sheet overlapping the cutouts area by at least 6” on all
sides, with each succeeding sheet overlapping the previous sheet by at least 3”
on all sides. Replace surfacing or coating in areas of test cuts.
3.10 CERTIFICATE OF MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT
Note: To be signed and submitted to Cii prior to issuance of Certificate of
Completion.
We (Roofing Contractor and (General Contractor) agree for a period of ten (10) years
from execution date, to inspect and make immediate emergency repairs as required to
stop leaks and/or correct defects in the built-up roofing, within twenty-four (24) hours
of notic received from owner/tenant by telephone, telegraph or letter for the project
outlined below.
CitymNANT OF BLDG.
ADDRESS:
CITY & STATE:
NO. OF SQUARE FEET IN ROOF:
DATE EFFECTIVE: THIS OF DAY 19,
l/O8198
a
Contract No. 3348 Page 229 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION -
SECTION 07500 - BUILT-UP ROOFING
A. We agree to make such temporary and permanent repairs as may be required
without reference to or consideration of the course or nature of such leaks or
defects in work.
B. _ We further agree that work required will be completed without cost to the
City/Tenant, except that repair work required because of Act of God, abuse,
alterations, or failure to the substrate and/or supporting structure (other than
that caused by defects in the roofing work), will be paid for by the City/Tenant,
promptly after completion of the required repair work in each instance.
C. This agreement, and the enforcement of its provisions, shall not deprive the
City/Tenants of any action, rights, or remedy otherwise available to him.
D. Repair work completed at City’s/Tenant’s expense shall be invoiced to the
City/Tenant at prevailing rates, and shall include an itemized breakdown of
quantities and unit costs for labor and materials, and shall include not more
than twenty percent (20%) markup for overhead and profit.
(Roofing Contractor) (General Contractor)
By:
Title:
Address
Telephone:
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 230 of 299 Pages
a
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07600 - SHEET METAL
1 .oo GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDlTlONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General Requirements,” shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work lnduded in this Section
1.
2.
General Requirements:
a. Soldering and seaming.
b. Caulking of sheet metal work of this section.
dc:
Separation of dissimilar metals of this section. Cleats and fastenings.
e. Shop painting. Galvanized Steel: All exterior sheet metal, unless otherwise specified or
shown on drawings, shall be galvanized steel. Exterior items include the following:
a. Cap flashings and counterflashings.
b. Copings.
Ii:
Metal louvers.
Flashings at all intersections of roof with vertical surfaces at all projections through roof and elsewhere as shown on the drawings or
required so as to provide watertight protection.
t’
Sheet metal dosures not otherwise specified.
Flashings at all penetrations through roofing and/or waterproof
membrane other than those specified under divisions 15 and 16.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
::
Preformed Metal Roofing.
Built-Up Roofing.
:*
Caulking and Sealants.
5:
Doors and Glazing Systems.
6. .
Plumbing.
Electrical.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 231 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07600 - SHEET METAL
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Sheet Metal: 24 gauge minimum; FS Q Q-S-775d, Class D, ASTM 525
Class 1.25 Commercial galvanizing.
B. Solder: 50 percent pig lead, 50 percent block tin, conforming to ASTM 832. Each
bar shall bear the name of the manufacturer and composition of the metal.
C. Flux: Muriatic acid killed with Zinc or an approved brand of soldering flux.
D. Cleats: 24 gauge galvanited steel. One end shall be locked into the seam or
folded edge of sheets. The other end shall be nailed with two nails and folded back
over nail heads. Cleats shall be pm-tinned for soldered seams.
E. Nails, Screws and Bolts: Shall be galvanized or cadmium plated.
F. Plastic Cement: Non-hardening type, asphalt based manufactured by
Johns-Manville for use with asphalt roofs.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
The scope of work as listed is not all-inclusive. It is the intent of this section to provide all
sheet metal items required which are not specified elsewhere. All necessary flashings
dosures, etc. shown or required to make the work watertight shall be provided under this
section, except those items which are furnished under other sections. Cooperate with all
other trades and install all items as required in time to avoid delaying the work.
2.03 FLASHINGS
A. General: Flashings shall be provided at all locations shown or as required to make
the work watertight.
B. Base flashings are specified in Section “Built-Up Roofing.”
C. Counterflashings shall turn down over base flashings not less than 4 inches.
Counterflashings shall be formed to provide spring action against base flashings.
Where counter-flashing and reglets are shown or required, they shall be reglets and counterflashing systems types as shown. Preformed internal and external comers of counterflashing shall be provided. Special counterflashings shall be fabricated as detailed and shall provide spring action agatnst base flashings. At ducts, solder
sheet metal to duct in a weather-tight manner.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 232 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07600 - SHEET METAL
2.64 PITCH POCKETS
Will not be allowed, accepted or otherwise.
2.05 REGLETS
Reglets shall be 24 gauge galvanized steel. Reglets shall be of types specially designed for use with wall conditions as indicated. Reglets shall be complete with preformed internal
and external comer sections, provisions for expansion and contraction and removable
counterflashing. Leave temporary closures in place to exclude entrance of plaster or
concrete until completion of this work.
2.66 METAL LOUVERS
A. Construct metal louvers of 20 gage minimum galvanized iron of size and design
indicated on plates 103 and 108, SMACNA Architectural Manual. Provide inside
vertical brace for blades over 3 feet long. Provide metal louvers of the following
design (SMACNA):
. ::
3.
4.
Jamb and Head: Fig. A-l Sill: Fig. 51
Blades: Fig. D-l
Louver Screen - Fig. B: Provide 518” galvanized mesh 17 ga. heavy
hardware grade with rewireable galvanized metal frame on inside face of
louvers in exterior building walls. Secure framed hardware cloth screening to
louver frame in removable metal dips.
3.60 EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: Surfaces to be covered with sheet metal shall be smooth and free from
defects. Remove all dirt, rubbish or other foreign materials. Except as otherwise
shown or specified, comply with applicable recommendations and details of the
“Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” by SMACNA.
6. Protection of Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals from each other by
painting each metal surface in the area of contact with a heavy application of
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by the
manufacturers of the metals.
l/08/98
I)
Contract No. 3348 Page 233 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07600 - SHEET METAL
C. Sheet Metal Expansion Seams: Expansion seams shall be provided in all
continuous runs of sheet metal at intervals of not over 18 feet. Extreme care shall
be used to prevent sheet metal from loosening or distorting due to expansion and
contraction. Seams shall be spaced as shown, or where not shown, at uniform
intervals of approximately 18 feet and with a seam located 2 feet from each comer,
intersection and termination.
D. Fabricate and install work with lines and wmers of exposed units true and accurate.
Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves and avoidable tool
marks.
3.02 INSTALLATION
All sheet metal directly in connection with built-up roofing shall be installed on top of the
base sheet membrane in a bed of plastic cement.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 234 of 299 Pages
II)
a DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07610 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
1 .oo GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 01,
“General Requirements”, shall apply to all work of this section with the same force and
effect as though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work lnduded in this Section:
1.
2.
The extent of each type of preformed metal panels are indicated on the
Drawings and by provisions of this Section. Scope of work includes, but
shall not be limited to: preformed panels, related accessories, valleys,
hops, ridges, eaves, comers, miscellaneous flashings, and attachment
devices.
Underlayment below sheet metal roofing panels.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
4D ::
3.
Rough Carpentry. Sheet Metal.
Painting.
1.03 SUBMI-ITALS
A. Submit within thirty (30) calendar days after award of contract manufacturer’s current specifications, installation recommendations, and wlor samples.
B. Submit shop drawings showing roof plans, pan widths, profiles, details of forming,
joining, trim flashing and accessories. Show details of weatherproofing at edges,
terminations, and penetrations at metal roofing.
1.64 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Installers: Competent and skilled sheet metal applicators familiar
with and experienced in installation of standing seam metal roof systems.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 235 of 299 Pages
DlVlSjCN 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07810 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Twenty (20) year paint finish guarantee is required from manufacturer.
B. A two (2) year weather tightness guarantee is required from panel applicator.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL ROOFING PANELS (R-3)
A. Product: UC-System IV Una-Clad Roofing System as manufactured by Copper
Sales, Inc., Minneapolis, MN, l-800-426-7737.
8. Materials:
1. Profile: l-112” standing seam with batten condition at hips and ridges.
::
Edge Pan Width: 24”
4. .’
24 gauge galvanized sheet metal panels. 20 gauge battens and caps.
Factory primed and painted finish; Sherwood Green wlor.
5. Flashings, closures, trim, etc. fabricated of. same material, gauge and finish
as adjacent panels.
2.02 UNDERLAYMENT
One layer type 30 felt with rosin paper applied over felt to avoid bonding between felt and
metal panels.
2.03 FASTENERS
Shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. The applicator shall verify feld dimensions and substrate conditions prior to fabrication and installation.
3.02 SUBSTRATE
A. Lay padding felt over a clean, dry roof deck and nail according to U.B.C. nailing schedule. Lap head laps of felt 6” minimum and side laps of felt 8” minimum and
nail according to Code.
‘3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 238 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07610 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
B. Overlay with rosin paper.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Workmanship shall conform to standards set forth in the Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual as published by S.M.A.C.N.A.
B. Panels should be installed in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and
level, and vertical lines are plumb.
C. All starter and edge flashings should be installed prior to panels.
D. Prevent direct contact of metal roofing with dissimilar metals that might cause
electrolysis.
E. Fasteners should not be overdriven or misdirected; which would cause damage to
trim or panel.
3.04 TOUCH-UP
Only minor scratches and abrasions will be allowed to be touched up. Any other
damaged material shall be replaced.
3.05 SEALANT
Recommended location of sealant to be shown on manufacturer’s shop drawing
submittals and as deemed necessary by Engineer in the Drawings or upon visual inspection.
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 237 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07820 - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
1 .oo GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General -
Requirements” shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work lnduded in this Section:
1. Metal framed skylight work including design, fabrication, erection, glazing
materials, glazing tapes, gaskets, caps, trim, splice plates, flashing, cladding,
and other materials contiguous to the skylight. All work shall be performed by
one manufacturer and it shall be the sole responsibility of that skylight manufacturer to provide a complete and watertight assembly. Skylights shall
inwrporate profiles and design features shown on the Drawings which shall be
strictly adhered to. Suggested modification shall be preapproved by the
Engineer.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Within thirty (30) calendar days after the award of Contract, submit:
A. Shop Drawings: Full scale shop drawings indicating methods of construction,
location and spacing of anchorage, joinety, finishes, size, shape, thickness and alloy
of framing materials, glazing materials and relationship to adjoining work.
B. Calculations: Structural calculations by a Structural Engineer licensed in the State of
California shall demonstrate compliance with the structural requirements as herein specified.
C. Samples: Samples for proposed shapes, glazing materials, finishes and wlors.
D. Compatibility statement that the materials in contact with the sealant are compatible.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. The skylight manufacturer shall furnish the City, prior to final payment, a written
manufacturer’s warranty for a period of ten years from the date of acceptance. The
skylights shall be free of defects in materials and factory workmanship, and defective materials shall be repaired or replaced, after proper notification, at no cost to the
owner.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Ptige 238 of 299 Pages a
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
0 SECTION 07820 - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
2.00
2.01
2.02
B. Glass and glazing material are warranted against seal failure, delamination or
defects in manufacture for a period of 10 years from date of manufacture or 9 years from date of substantial completion (5 years for sloped glazing), whichever is
longest.
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
The Drawings and Specifications were prepared to show intent and establish minimum standards of design and performance of work intended under this Section.
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
A. Design: Skylight members and glass panels shall be designed for live load, wind
load, negative pressure and concentrated load per the Uniform Building Code, 1991
Edition, and all applicable Federal, State, and Local Codes and Ordinances.
B. Deflections and Thermal Movements: Obtain necessary information from Engineer
on building deflections due to loadings, temperature variations, shrinkage, and
similar causes. Provide manufacturer’s stock products and system which are
capable of withstanding building movements and weather exposures including wind loading, and which are capable of performing within the following limitations:
1. Normal-to-wall deflections not exceeding l/l 75 of span, except l/300 for
glass-supporting members.
2. Parallel-to-wall deflections not exceeding 75% of glass edge clearances.
3. Thermal movements resulting from ambient temperature range of 12OoF.
C. Fasteners: Structural fasteners shall provide a 4:l safety factor when fully loaded.
D. Expansion and Contraction: Skylight assembly shall be so designed and anchored
that there will be no objectionable distortion or stresses in fastenings and joinery due
to expansion and contraction when subjected to a 12OoF temperature differential.
E. Air Infiltration: Air infiltration through the skylight assembly, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 283, (Test for Air Infiltration), shall not exceed 0.06 cubic
feet per minute per square foot of fixed unit area.
@ q l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 239 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07820 - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
F. Water Penetration: Water penetration is defined as the appearance of uncontrolled
water, other than condensation, on the roomside of any part of the assembly. Drain
to the exterior all water entering at joints or glazing reveals and all condensation
occurring within unit construction. No water penetration shall occur when the
assembly is tested in accordance with ASTM E 311 (Test for Water Penetration
Under Static Pressure).
2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. Bristol Fiberlite Industries: Structural Skylight Series.
B. O’Keeffe’s. Inc.: Standard Glazing System Series.
C. Or Equal.
2.04 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum:
1.
2.
Skylight framing members, structural reinforcement, perimeter curb members
and glazing caps shall be extruded aluminum alloy 6063.T5 or 60610T6 of
sufficient thickness for the application.
Flashings, trim, dosures, and other accessory items shall be of formed
compatible metal sheet suitable for the application having a minimum
thickness of 0.032 inches.
B. Fasteners:
1.
2.
Exterior fasteners used as cap retainers shall be 300 series stainless steel
pan heads, neoprene gasketed, Phillips slots, or as specified. Interior fasteners for attaching skylights to surrounding construction shall be of
cadmium-plated steel unless otherwise specified.
C. Glazing Materials:
::
Sloped Surfaces: l/4” thick lexan.
All glazing shall be single.
D. Glazing Accessories:
All glazing tapes, gaskets, setting blocks, and other materials used in securing, sealing, and setting of the glazing incorporated in the aiuminum framing system shall
be of a type, quality, and compatibility to provide performance and serviceability , throughout the life of the skylight system.
‘3 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 240 of 299 Pages l
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07820 - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
E. Finish:
1. All exposed framing surfaces shall be free of scratches and other serious
blemishes.
2. Exposed metal surfaces of framing, trim, break shapes and other accessories
shall be finished with a fluorpoiymer two coat system, P.P.G. industries
“Duranaf or equal. Coior match aluminum storefront, Ameritone “Derby
Green”, #l D28C.
a. All aluminum shall be chemically cleaned and primed for coating
manufacturer’s recommendations.
b. Coating shall meet or exceed AAMA Publication 603.7.
C. All pieces shall be cut, bent, broken, punched, holed, etc. prior to
application of finish.
2.05 FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
. @ l/08/98'
Skylights shall be factory fabricated and preassembled in largest size assemblies
consistent with economic considerations for shipping to and handling at the job site.
All cap retainers shall be attached using stainless steel fasteners. These fasteners
shall be designed and located such that all glazing strips are compressed to provide
a uniform compression seal. Fasteners shall be located at 12” O.C. or less.
All dips for the attachment of the rafter bars shall be of aluminum or stainless steel
and by shop-riveting, bolting, or welding to the rafter bars attain fully rated structural
loading.
All welding shall by by the heiiarc process. All exposed welds to be dressed where
practical.
Waterproofing shall not be reliant on additional continuous exterior silicone sealant
beads. Horizontal flush butt joints may rely on a continuous silicone seal.
Silicone or neoprene setting blocks shall be used for the support of the glass and
shall be sized and located in accordance with the glass manufacturel’s
recommendations. At no point shall the glass come into contact with metal parts of
the skylight.
Skylights shall have a properly designed weep system for drainage to the exterior
without excessive air infiltration.
Contract No. 3348 Pa& 241 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTiON 07820 - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 FIELD DIMENSIONS
A. Verify ‘field dimensions and adjust skylight construction and glazing panel size to
accommodate field conditions. When required, cast in place anchorage items along
with dimensional setting diagrams shall be furnished by the skylight manufacturer by casting during placement of concrete or masonry.
3.02 EXAMINATION OF SURFACES
A. Examine the members to which the work of this Section attaches or adjoins. Provide
notification of any conditions which jeopardize the integrity of the proposed skylight
installation. Do not proceed until such conditions are corrected, as beginning of
work shall imply acceptance of existing conditions.
3.03 GALVANIC PROTECTION
A. Aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals, if not organically coated, shall be given a heavy coat of zinc chromate or bituminous paint.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Skylight installation shall be the sole responsibility of the skylight manufacturer in
strict accordance with the approved shop drawings. Only experienced mechanics
familiar with this type of specialized work shall be employed.
B. Install skylights plumb, true, without warping or racking of panels, and without waves
or buckling.
C. Exercise care in the drilling of anchorage holes to obtain fully rated strength from the
attachment devices.
D. During erection, provide for thermal movement with a minimum ambient air
temperature shift of lOOoF without creating undue stresses to fasteners, sealants,
glazing materials, or the structural system. -..
E. Apply sealant where indicated on the Drawings, or where standard practice dictates.
1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 242 of 299 Pages e
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07820 - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
3.05 GLAZING
A. After installing bedding tape or gasket on rafters, perimeter framing and cross bars,
glazing panels shall be carefully positioned on these supporting members. Sufficient
clearances must be maintained to preclude contact at any point with structural
surfaces or glazing fasteners. Nipping of edges of glass panels will not be permitted. Edge engagement of glazing panels must conform to manufacturer’s
published recommendations.
B. Apply outer glazing tape or gasket at entire perimeter of glazing panel and install
removable glazing caps. Tighten glazing fasteners securely in order to provide
uniform compression.
3.06 CLEAN UP
A. Glazing panels shall be left in scratch-free condition inside and out with all labels
removed. Remove all rubbish, debris, cartons, and crates from premises.
3.07 FINAL CLEANING AND PROTECTION
*
A. Subsequent to installation of skylights, the General Contractor shall be responsible
for the cleaning of glazing, framing members and accessories. No abrasive material of any kind shall be used in cleaning of skylight surfaces. The General Contractor
shall exercise caution to prevent mortar, concrete, or run-off water containing lime or
other substances that might damage the glazing panels or other surfaces by lying on
or flowing over the installed materials. Such damaging substances shall be removed
or rinsed off immediately.
(I) a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 243 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07900 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS
1 .oo GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General Requirements,” shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work Included in this Section:
1.
2.
Exterior Sealant: Clean and caulk at the following exterior locations:
;:
Joints in all materials susceptible to air or weather infiltration.
Joints between dissimilar exterior materials.
C. Joints between metal door, window and louver frames and adjacent
materials.
d. All other exterior locations indicated on the drawings to be sealed or
required to provide a watertight installation.
Interior Surfaces
a. Interior joints around metal frames built into exterior walls or roofs
where such joints are indicated on the drawings to be sealed or
where such joints are not covered by trim. b. At ail other interior locations indicated on the drawings to be sealed.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
::
3.
Sheet Metal. Door and Glazing Systems.
Plumbing.
1.03 GENERAL
This specification does not necessarily name all locations where caulking and sealing
are to be installed. Carefully examine the drawings and the construction as actually
erected, and provide caulking or sealant at all locations where water infiltration could
occur. This includes examination of caulked joints provided by others and performing
and recommending any remedial measures deemed necessary in their work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
a 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 244 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTiON 07900 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS
1. Submit ‘prior to actual placement samples of exposed caulking and sealants
required for City’s approval of colors. Unless otherwise directed, apply
samples in 6-inch runs in actual joints at the job site.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
6.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
0 1 I08198
General: Caulking and sealants, primers and accessories shall be compatible with each other and non-staining to exposed materials including adjacent
materials.
Primers (If Required): As manufactured and recommended for each substrate by
approved manufacturer of each caulking and sealant material used.
Back-Up Materials: As recommended for and compatible with each caulking and
sealant used. In general, use bead or rope-shaped, polyethylene or polyurethane foam, except where manufacturer of sealant requires open cell foam only (typical
for silicone sealants) use open cell polyurethane type; Denver, Taylor, or approved equal. For joints subject to horizontal traffic or puncture, use semirigid
vinyl or polyethylene foam, solid neoprene rod (60 Durometer) or similar approved
support type backing. Do not use any bituminous, oily or solvent containing
materials or any incompressible materials. In general, width or diameter of
preformed backing material to be l-1/4 to l-1/3 times the width of the joint to be
sealed.
Caulking For Joints in Walls and Other Vertical Surfaces: General Electric
“Silpruf.”
Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically
curing, elastromeric sealant of base polymer indicated, complying with ASTM
C920 requirements.
The applications for joint sealants are indicated in the Sealant Schedule at the end
of this section. Provide one of the options listed for each application. Provide
materials selected for compatibility with each other and with substrates in each
joint system; confirm with manufacturer.
Sealant No. 1: Polyurethane Sealant, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, uses NT, M,
A, and 0. Provide one of the following products:
Dymeric: Tremco, Inc.
Dynatroll II: Pecora Corp.
Contract No. 3348 Page 245 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07900 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS
Rubbercalk 210: Products Research 81 Chemical Corp.
NP II: Sonnebom
H. Sealant No. 2: Polyurethane Sealant, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, M,
A and 0. Provide one of the following products:
Dynatrol I: Pewra
1A: Sika
Dymonic: Tremco, Inc. Rubbercalk 6000:. Products Research & Chemical Corp.
I. Sealant No. 3: Acrylic Sealant, Type S, Grade NS, Uses NT, M and A;
recommended by manufacturer for general use as an exposed building
construction sealant. Provide one of the following products:
One Part Acrylic: Dap, Inc.
Mono: Tremw, Inc.
60 + Unicryllc: Pecora Corp.
J. Sealant No. 4: Polyurethane Sealant, Type M, Grade P,, Class 25, Use T.
Provide one of the following products:
N.R.-200 Urexpan: Pecora, Corp.
Sonolastic Paving: Sonneborn.
Rubbercalk 270: Products Research & Chemical Corp.
THC-900: Tremw, Inc.
K. Sealant No. 5: Mildew-Resistant Silicone Rubber Sealant, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, Uses NT, M and A; compounded specifically for mildew resistance and
recommended by manufacturer for interior joints in wet areas; passing ANSI
A136.1 test for mold growth. Provide one of the following products:
Tremw Proglaze: Tremw, Inc.
Dow Coming 788: Dow Coming Corp.
Silicone Sanitary 1702 Sealant: General Electric Co.
L. Solvents and Cleaning Agents: As recommended by sealant. manufacturer,
non-oily type.
M. Bond Breakers: Polyethylene tape or masking tape, as recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 246 of 299 Pages
IVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
ECTION 07900 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS
3.00
3.01
EXECUTION
SURFACE PREPARATION
Joints and surfaces. to be caulked shall be free from dust, dirt moisture or other foreign
materials; concrete shall be fully cured, and curing agents, which act as bond breakers, shall be remove. Joints shall be lightly sandblasted, using care to protect exposed
surfaces, Primers shall be applied where recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Install backup material or joint filler at proper depth in joint to provide sealant
dimensions as hereinabove specified. Backup material shall be of suitable size
and shape so that when compressed (25 to 50%), it will fit in joints as required. Sealant shall not be applied without backup material and, if necessary bond breaker strip. When using backup of hose or rod stock, roll the material into the
joint to avoid lengthwise stretching. Hose or rod stock shall not be twisted or braided. Use specified bond breaker strip between sealant and supporting type
backup material. Bond breaker strip shall be used in all joints where sufficient
room for backup does not exist.
a
3.03
B. Apply masking tape, where required, in continuous strips in alignment with joint
edge. Remove tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as
directed.
C. Prime surfaces, where required, with primer as recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
D. Follow sealant manufacturer’s instructions regarding mixing, surface preparation, priming, application life and application procedure.
SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Joints:
1. Joints between metal frame and masonry:
Sealant No. 1
Sealant No. 2
Sealant No. 3
1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 247 of 288 Pages
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07900 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS
2. Exterior sills, jambs, and heads of window frames, door frames, louvers
and and similar openings, and where metal, wood or other materials abut or joint masonry, concrete or each other:
Sealant No. 1
Sealant No. 2 Sealant No. 3
3. Horizontal joints in pavement and sidewalks:
Sealant No. 4
4. Other exterior joints as indicated or shown:
Sealant No. 1
Sealant No. 2
Sealant No. 3
8. Interior Joints:
1.
2.
Joints between plumbing fixtures and other elements:
Sealant No. 5
Other interior joints as indicated or shown:
Sealant No. 3
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 248 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WlNDOWS
SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General
Requirements”, shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work Included in this Section:
::
Hollow Metal Doors.
Pressed Metal Frames.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
1. Finish Hardware.
1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Verification of Dimensions:
The hollow-metal-door-and frame Contractor (hereinafter referred to as Contractor) shall visit the premises to thoroughly familiarize himself with all details of the work
and working conditions and veriQ all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the
City of any discrepancy before performing any work. Work shall not be started until
any defects and discrepancies have been corrected. Commencement of work
shall apply acceptance of the conditions by the Contractor.
B. Coordination:
The Contractor shall be specifically responsible for the coordination and proper
relation of his work to the building structure and to the work of other trades.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop Drawings shall be submitted within thirty (30) calendar days after
award of contract. Doors and door frames shall not be delivered to the job
site until after the approved shop drawings have been returned to the
Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for any errors of detailing and
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 249 of 29gPages
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES .
fabrication and for the correct dimensions, fittings, and proper attachment of
items directly connected with the installation of doors and door frames and
shown on the shop drawings.
a. Doors: Shop drawings shall indicate location and elevation of each
door, details of construction, method ‘of assembling sections,
locations and extent of hardware reinforcement, hardware locations;
sizes, shapes, and thicknesses of materials; lower sections and
glass panels, where required; joints and connections.
b. Door Frames: Shop drawings shall show construction of frame,
thickness of metal, provisions for receiving hardware, method of reinforcing, type and location of anchors, hardware locations, and
connections at openings.
C. Shop painting and Catalog Cuts: Shop drawings shall also include
specifications for shop painting including pretreating and painting
materials processes, and catalog cuts or descriptive data for the weatherstripping and threshold.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Deliver, store, and handle metal doors and frames in a manner to prevent damage
and deterioration.
B. Provide packaging such as cardboard or other containers, separators, banding,
spreaders, and paper wrappings as required to completely protect all metal doors and frames during transportation and storage.
C. Store doors upright, in a protected dry area at least 1 inch or more off the ground
and floor and with at least l/4 inch air space between individual pieces.
D. Protect all prefinished and hardware surfaces as required.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steel doors and frames by one of
the following:
AmwekYDiv. American Welding & Mfg. Co.
Fenestra Corp.
SteelcraWDiv. American Standard Co.
Republic Builders Products Corp./Subs. Republic Steel
a 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 250 of299Pages
e
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTtON 08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
2.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS:
A. Types:
1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 251 of 299Pages
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Doors shall be l-3/4” steel doors with face sheets of 18 gauge, galvanized,
cold rolled, per ASTM A386 and A568, leveled sheet steel. Both faces of the door shall have smooth, seamless, and unbroken
surfaces, with top and bottom edges closed flush to the door face sheets.
No inverted channels shall be allowed.
Lock and hinge edges shall be formed by full overlap of each face sheet
around the perimeter vertical channels of a unitized grid structure, meeting
at the center-line of each edge. All structural components shall be manufactured of galvanized steel, utilizing
maximum strength welding design and techniques throughout. Doors requiring kraft honeycomb or foam material as the stabilizer shall not be
allowed. Inner structure of the door shall be formed as a unitized grid, composed of
minimum No. 18 U.S. gauge steel channels with rigidized webbing, cold roll formed to assure consistent dimensions. The grid pattern shall consist of
four (4) vertical members and eight (8) horizontal members. The grid shall
be unitized by double projection welding at each junction and shall have
applicable hardware reinforcements attached by multiple welds. The grid
shall form the flush top and bottom sections of the door.
Inner surfaces of the face sheets shall be specially coated with a layer of
synthetic resin-base sound deadener prior to assembly to the grid. The
substance shall be noncombustible, vermin-proof, corrosion resistant, and
indefinitely elastic to retain proper deadening properties.
Structural attachment of the face sheets to the unitized grid assembly shall
be achieved by direct current principle, double projection, multiple series
welds, using electronically operated equipment specifically designed to
assure maximum strength and rigidity throughout.
All doors shall be mortised and reinforced for hinges and locks to allow field
application. Hinge reinforcements shall be a minimum No. 14 U.S. gauge
steel, die- formed to provide screw thread depth equivalent to No. 10 U.S. gauge. Lock reinforcement shall be formed of minimum No. 14 U.S. gauge
integral steel. All hinge accommodations shall be preformed as an integral
part of the continuous vertical member forming the peripher)! of the unitized
grid. The backup reinforcements of hinges and lock shall be die-formed to
extend no less than five (5) inches into the interior, and shall join the parallel
inner vertical member of the grid structure to insure a uniform door.
Inserted plate-type reinforcement shall not be allowed as an acceptable
method of door suspension. Provision shall be made for additional
reinforcement, for a surface applied door closer.
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
B. Finishes:
::
3.
Alt welds shall be ground smooth and touched up with “Galvaloy”. Doors shall be cleaned by a process conforming to Federal Specifications
TT-C-490, Grade 1. Immediately after cleaning, finish with a zinc dust primer conforming to
Federal Specification TT-P-64ld, Type 11.
C. Hardware Preparation: ,
Secure templates from the finish hardware supplier. Reinforce all hardware
locations as required for long life under hard senrice.
2.03 METAL FRAMES:
A. Dimensions:
Frame dimensions shall be the manufacturer’s standard for the doors being
furnished.
B. Composition and Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Frame materials shall be 16 gauge galvanized, cold rolled steel die formed to profiles as detailed on the Engineer’s drawings. Frames shall comply with
SDI-100.
Comers are to be mitered, welded, and ground smooth.
Frames for hollow metal doors shall be reinforced with heavy gauge
reinforcements for hinges, closers and lock strikes.
Provide drilled and tapped 10 ga., minimum, steel reinforcing at all mortise
type hardware cutouts.
Protect all reinforced points with 24 ga. plaster shields for all frames in masonry and poured concrete walls.
6. Provide suitable type adjustable anchors for each respective wall condition.
C. Finishes:
1.
2.
Prior to finishing, all welds shall be ground smooth and touched up with
“Galvaloy”.
Frames shall be cleaned and primed as specified for the doors.
a 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 252 of 299Pages
a
m
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 JNSTALLATION OF DOOR FRAMES
A. Door Frames shall be installed plumb, square, level, in alignment, and accurately secured in position at the locations shown and noted on the
drawings. Wall anchors for door frames shall be installed approximately at the
hinge and strike levels, three (3) anchors per jamb.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF DOORS . \
A. Doors shall be hung accurately with proper clearances, specified hereinbefore,
in conjunction with the installation of hardware furnished in Section 08710
HARDWARE. Hardware shall be well secured, straight, neat, complete, and in
perfect working condition. Hardware shall be removed and reinstalled by
Contractor before and after finish painting by the painting contractor. Final
adjustment shall be made for the proper and easy operation of the doors after
painting. Hardware and operating parts shall be lubricated or waxed as
required.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF HARDWARE
a
A. See Finish Hardware Section.
3.04 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND THRESHOLD
A. See Finish Hardware Section
3.98 CLEAN-UP
Upon completion of the work under this section, the Contractor shall remove from the
premises all surplus materials, tools, equipment, rubbish, and debris resulting from his
work at his own expense and leave the installation in clean, neat and workmanlike
condition satisfactory to the Engineer.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Pe9e 253 of299Pa9es
DIVISI.ON 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
- SECTION 083310 OVERHEAD COUNTER DOORS
,
a
1 .oo GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General Requirements” shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work Included in this Section:
1. Overhead counter doors including controls and hardware.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
::
Metal fabrications.
Metal support systems.
1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Verification of Dimensions:
The Overhead Counter Door Contractor (hereinafter referred to as “Contractor”
shall visit the premises to thoroughly familiarize himself with all details of the work and working conditions and verify all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the
City of any discrepancy before performing any work. Work shall not be started until
any defects and discrepancies have been corrected. Commencement of work
shall imply acceptance of the conditions by the Contractor.
B. Coordination:
The Contractor shall be specifically responsible for the coordination and proper relation of his work to the building structure and to the work of other trades.
1.04 SUBMITTALS -_
A. Within thirty (30) calendar days after the award of wntract, submit the following:
1.
2.
Manufacturer’s literature on specified product, including a list of all specified
components and hardware.
Sample of the specified finish.
G l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 254 of 299 Pages
a
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 083310 OVERHEAD COUNTER DOORS
3. Shop drawings showing the door frame, hardware, and methods of
installation and attachment.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle metal doors and frames in a manner to prevent damage
and deterioration.
B. Provide packaging such as cardboard or other containers, separators, banding,
spreaders, and paper wrappings as required to completely protect all metal doors
and frames during transportation and storage.
C. Protect all prefinished and hardware surfaces as required.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish each overhead counter door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, mounting and installation
components.
B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set
in concrete or built into masonry for installation of units. Provide setting drawings,
templates instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
C. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce rolling doors to withstand a wind loading
pressure of 20 psf.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Provide overhead counter doors as manufactured by one of the following:
Raynor Garage Doors
The Cookson Co.
Cornell Iron Works, Inc.
Kinnear Div., Harsw Corp.
Overhead Door Corp.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 255 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 08331. OVERHEAD COUNTER DOORS
2.02 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
G l/08/98 Contract No, 3348
.
m
Door Curtain: interlocking slats designed to withstand the specified wind loading,
of continuous length for the width of the door without splices. Provide slats of the
material gage recommended by the door manufacturer for the size and type of
door required, and as follows:
1. Steel Slats: ASTM A446, Grade A, with G90, zinc coating, complying with
ASTM A525, and phosphate treated before fabrication.
a. Furnish manufacturer’s standard “flat-face: slats.
Endlocks: Malleable iron castings, galvanized, secured to curtain slats.
Bottom Bar: Manufacturer’s standard tube or bar shape, stainless steel.
Gasket: Replaceable gasket of flexible vinyl or neoprene between angles as a
weather seal and cushion bumper.
Curtain Jamb Guides: Steel shapes with sufficient depth and strength to retain the
curtain against specified wind loading. Build-up units with minimum 3/16” thick
steel, sections complying with ASTM A36. Slot bolt holes for track adjustment.
Weather Seals: Manufacturer’s standard rubber or neoprene on continuous metal pressure bars. At door heads, use a l/8” thick continuous sheet secured to inside
of curtain coil hood. At door jambs, use l/8” thick continuous strip secured to
exterior side of jamb guide.
Counterbalance: Manufacturer’s standard adjustable steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and mounted in barrel with grease-sealed ball
bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearing for all rotating members.
Hood: Entirely enclose wiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head
and act as a weather seal. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods, and
any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide
intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag.
1. Steel: Not less than 24 gage hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with 1.25 oz. “Commercial” zinc coating, complying with ASTM A525. Phosphate treat
before fabrication.
Page 256 of 299 Pages
m
0 DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTiON 083310 OVERHEAD COUNTER DOORS
2.03 FINISH
A. Shop clean and prime all ferrous metal and galvanized surfaces, exposed and
unexposed, except faying and lubricated surfaces, with door manufacturer’s
standard rust inhibitive primer drying to a flat sheen.
2.04 DOOR OPERATION
A. Manual Push-Up Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so that required
lift or pull for door operation does not exceed 25 Ibs. Adjust operating mechanism
so that the curtain can be easily stopped at any point in its travel and to remain in
position until movement is reactivated.
1. Provide galvanized steel lifting handle on bottom bar.
2. Provide cylinder lock keyed to building masterkey.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALtiTION
A. Installer shall be authorized manufacturel’s representative.
B. Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head moid strips, anchors, inserts, hangers and equipment supports in accordance
with final shop drawings, manufacturer’s instructions and as specified herein.
C. Upon completion of installation including work by other trades, test and adjust
doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist or distortion, and fitting weathertight
for entire perimeter.
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 257 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE
1 .oo GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General
Requirements” shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work Included in this Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Furnishing finish hardware for all doors, complete, except as otherwise
specified.
Mounting locations for ail finish hardware.
Templates for all items where hardware is required to be incorporated in
work of other sections.
Weatherstripping.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
::
Doors and Frames.
Toilet Accessories.
C. Furnish all items of hardware required to complete with work. Items of hardware
not definitely specified shall be provided of a type and quality suitable to the senrice
required and comparable to other hardware.
D. Where. the exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to the finished
shape or size of the members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having as nearly as practicable the same operation and quality as the type specified, subject
to City’s review.
1.03 GENERAL
1.84
All hardware required for the complete operation and function of each door shall be
provided. Where specifications call for cylinders only to be furnished, cylinders shall be
compatible with equipment to be furnished and shall be keyed to building master key
system. Provide all necessary coordination.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data containing drawings or cuts of
all hardware items at same time hardware scheudle is submitted. Make submittal
1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 258 of 299 Pages
m
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE
in a neat brochure form and include an index list of all items, with manufacturer’s
names and catalog numbers. If proposing a stubstitute, submit tthat product data
attached to one showing specified item and’indicate savings to be made. Include a
list of all manufacturers used and their nearsest representative with address and
phone number.
B. Hardware Schedule: Submit six copies of schedule at earliest possible date after receipt of Notice to Proceed. Organize schedule into “hardware Sets” in the same
format as listed in the specification (hortzontal schedule not acceptable), with an index of doors and heading, indicating complete designations of every item
required for each door or opening. Include the folllowing information.
:*
Type, style,function,size quantity and finish of each hardware item.
3:
Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.
Fastenings and othe pertinent information.
4. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings both
on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
5. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc. contained in schedule.
6. Mounting locations for hardware. 7. Door and frame sizes and mateirals.
C. Keying Schedule: Submit three copies of separate detailed schedule indicating
*
clearly how the City’s final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1108198
m
Manufacturer: Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers,
etc.) from only one manufacturer, although several may be indicatd as offering products complying with mquirem8nts.
Scheduled Designations: Except as otherwise indicated, the use of one
manufacturer’s numeric designation system in schedules does not imply that
another manufacturer’s products will not be acceptable, unless they are not equal
in design, size, weight, finish, function, or other quality of significance. However,
do not make substitutions after City’s acceptance of hardware supplier’s completed
hardware Sched~l8.
Hardware supplier must be a direct factory contract supplier who has in his
employment an experienced hardware consultant who is available at all reasonable
times during the course of the work, for project hardware wnsultation to the City,
Engineer and Contractor.
Contract No. 3348 Page 259 of299Pag8s
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE
D. Exit Doors: Openable at all times from the inside without the use of a key or any
special knowledge of effort.
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package
separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper
design for use on doors and frames of the thicknesses, profile, swing, security and
similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function,
regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information in the contract documents.
Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the times and to the locations
(shop or field) for installation, as directed by the Contractor.
1.
2.
Coordinate the provisions of reinforcement, in stud walls, for wall stops and holders.
Provide .for all doors to swing to maximum degree whether shown on plan or
not.
B. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request,
check the shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware.
C. Inspection: Hardware supplier shall inspect all hardware furnished within 10 days
of contractor’s request and include with his guarantee a statement that this has
been accomplished. Inspector or contractor will sign off the hardware as being
complete and correctly installed and adjusted. Further corrections of defective material to be the responsibility of the manufacturer or his representative.
1.07 GUARANTEE
A. Provide a two year guarantee from hardware supplier.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Approved Manufacturers: Approval of equals is for hardware equal to or better
than specified item.
Listed Approved As Equal
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 260 of299 Pages
DlVlSlON 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE
2.02
2.03
Hinges Monthard McKinney, Lawrence, Hager Stanley
Locks Schlage Stop & Holders TrimcO Quality, Builders Brass
Thresholds Reese Zero, Pemko
Seal 8 Bottoms Reese Zero, Pemko
FINISH
A. Generally to be 626, dull chrome at stops. Miscellaneous 830, stainless steel at
locks and plates. 600 prime coat a hinges.
B. Seals and Thresholds: Match jamb finish.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
l/08/98
Locksets: All locksets shall be mortise type. Strikes to be curved with box
construction, and have lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
Design to be Schlage 03A.
1. Keying ‘requirements as follows: Keying of cylinder locks shall be
coordinated with the City. For estimate use Grandmasterkeying charge.
Under City’s direction, key to new or existing system to be approved by
City’s representative in writing. Fumish.construction key system with keys
which can be rendered inoperative by the turn of the change key. Stamp all
keys “Do Not Duplicate”.
Hinges: Outswinging exterior doors shall have non-removable (NRP) pin. All
hinge open widths shall be minimum, but of sufficient size to permit door to swing 180 degrees. Furnish three hinges per leaf to 7’6” height, add one each two feet
extra and at pivots.
,Flush transom offset brackets: Use where parallel arm closers are listed for doors
with fixed panels over. Drop brackets required at narrow head rails.
Kickplates: Provide with four beveled edges. 10” high x width less 2”. Furnish
with machine or wood screws of stainless steel.
Screws: All exposed screws shall be Phillips head.
Seals: Solid neoprene to be Mil. Spec. R6856-CL Ill, Gr. 40; sponge neoprene to
be Mil. Spec. R6130, Type II, Group C.
Contract No. 3348 Page 261 of299 Pages
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE
G. Provide stops with risers as required.
3.00
3.01
3.02 CONDITION OF SURFACES
Inspect doors, frames and other surfaces to receive items of finish hardware and report
any defects which might adversely affect the installation and function of the hardware. Commencing work implies acceptance of surfaces as satisfactory.
3.03 COORDINATION
EXECUTION
MOUNTING LOCATIONS
Installation of doors is specified in other sections. The following requirements for location
of hardware shall govern doors of all types unless othewise specified.
A. Locks and Latches (Cylindrical, Mortise, Unit, Integral): 38 inches from finish floor
to center of knob, UON.
B. Door Pulls: 42 inches from finish floor to center of grip.
C. Push Plate: 48 Inches from finish floor to center of place.
D. Top Hinge: 5” from door top to top of hinge.
E. Bottom Hinge: 10 inches from door bottom to bottom of hinge.
F. Intermediate Hinge: Equally spaced between top and bottom hinge.
G. Astragel: Install astragel extending 1” from active leaf, covering opening between
doors full height; using non-removable bolts spaced 10” O.C.
Contractor shall coordinate and be responsible for the proper fabrication of work or
material to receive hardware. No extra cost will be allowed because of changes or
corrections necessary to facilitate the proper installation of any hardware.
g 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 262 of 299 Pages
0
l DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTiON 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE
3.64
3.05
3.06 SCHEDULE
INSTALLATION
A. Install each hardware item to comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been
completed. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and
operation.
B. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper
operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to
operate freely and smoothly.
ADJUSTMENT
When installation is otherwise complete, adjust working hardware for proper operation
and function.
The hardware for all exterior doors shown shall be complete by door manufacturer, and
shall include all necessary hinges, seals, stops and locksets. The locks shall be keyed
the same on all doors.
1 fO8f98. Contract No. 3348 Page 263 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
SECTION 09266 - LATH AND PLASTER
1 .oo GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General
Requirements”, shall apply to all work of this section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. Work Included in This Section:
1. Product and application of lath and plaster.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
::
3.
4.
5.
Concrete Unit Masonry
Rough Carpentry
Sheet Metal
Caulking and Sealant
Painting
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor:
Contractor shall be qualified to do cement plaster work.
B. Allowable Tolerances:
Maximum deviation from true plane l/8 inch in 10 feet as measured by straight
edge placed at any location on surface.
C. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Uniform Building Code (UBC), Chapter 47.
2. Southern California Plastering Institute (SCPI) “Lathing and Plastering
Reference Data and Specifications Guide”.
3. ASTM C1063; Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement- Based Plaster.
4. ASTM C926; Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster.
G 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 204 of 299 Pages
0
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 0 SECTION 09200 - LATH AND PLASTER .
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
::
Submit within thirty (30) calendar days after award -of contract.
Provide 24” x 24” sample showing texture and color for City’s approval.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for cementitious materials,
lath, metal support components, and accessories.
C. Material Certificates: Submit producer’s certificate for each kind of plaster
aggregate indicated evidencing that materials comply with requirements.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
a 1.08
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Deliver materials so as to insure uninterrupted progress of work.
B. Deliver all manufactured materials in tha original packages or containers -bearing
the name of the manufacturer and brand.
C. Keep all materials dry until used. Keep materials off the ground, under cover, and clear of damp walls or other damp surfaces.
CLIMATE CONDITIONS
A. Air temperature must be 40F. minimum and rising when applying cement plaster or exterior finish coat. Air temperature must remain above 40F. for a minimum of 24 hours. Consult National Weather Service before beginning work.
8. Hot weather requirements: Protect cement plaster and exterior finish coat from
uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry weather.
2.00
2.01
A. Protect contiguous work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration and other
hamrful effects which might result form plastering.
PRODUCTS
PLASTER MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, natural color.
Contract No. 3348 Page 265 of 299 Pages
.
DlVlSlON 09 - FINISHES
SECTION 09200 - LATH AND PLASTER
B. Special finishing hydrated lime: ASTM C 206, Type S.
C. Aggregates: ASTM C 144, all sand to pass No. 8 sieve.
0. Water: Clear and free from substances harmful to plaster.
E. Bonding agent for Portland Cement Plaster: ASTM C932.
F. Calor: Frazee Paint No.:
G. Finish: Sand Finish
2.02 MIXING (CEMENT PLASTER)
A. Mixes
1. General: Job-mixed cement plaster mix, Bondcrete or Mortaseal Mason’s
Lime with Portland Cement and Sand in accordance with ANSI A42.2, Type
L.
8. Proportions:
::
3.
Scratch Coat: 1 bag Portland cement, 314 to 1 bag lime to 6 cu. ft. sand.
Brown Coat: 1 bag Portland cement, 1 bag lime, 6 to 7 cu. ft. sand.
Finish Coat: 1 bag Portland cement, 2 bags lime, 7 to 10 cu. ft. sand. See
drawings for location of cement plaster finish coat.
C. Mixing:
1.
# l/08/98
General:
a. Accurately proportion materials for each plaster batch with
measuring devices of known volume.
b. Size batches for complete use within maximum of one hour after
mixing.
C. Retemper plaster stiffened from evaporation, but do not use or
retemper partially hydrated cement plaster. d. Do not use frozen, caked, or lumping materials, and remove such
materials from job site immediately.
8. Mix factory prepared cement plaster in accordance with
manufacturer’s written instructions.
f. Add wloring agent in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
9. Use moist, loose sand in mix proportions.
Contract No. 3348 Page 266 of 299Pages
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
0 SECTION 09200 - LATH AND PLASTER
h. Withhold 10% of mixing water until mixing is almost complete, then
add as needed to produce necessary consistency.
2. Mechanical Mixing:
a.
b.
C.
Clean mixer of set or hardened materials before loading for new
batch. Maintain mixer in continuous operation while adding materials.
Conform to mixing sequence, cyde of operations and time recommended by manufacturer of plaster materials.
2.03 SUSPENSION AND LATHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Lath
1 .* At vertical surfaces: Paper-backed lath, USG paper-backed lath or equal.
a. No. 17 gauge galvanized stucco netting meeting Federal
specification QQ-L-101.
b. Two horizontal No. 19 gauge galvanized wires at 6 inches O.C.
Backing: One additional layer #15, Type D felt.
2. it horizontal soffit: Diamond mesh, 3.4 lb&q. yd.
a. Fabricate from cold rolled steel.
b. Furnish galvanized or with factory applied rust-resistant paint.
C. Backing: 2 layers of #15, Type D felt.
B. Metal Accessories
1.
2.
3.
4.
General
a. Shapes used as grounds: Sued and dimensioned to provide for
required plaster thicknesses.
b. Flanges designed to permit complete embedment of accessory in
plaster and provide for alignment and attachment to underlying
surface.
Comer beads: small nose type, expanded flanges, 26 gauge galvanized
steel, except as noted on drawing.
Casing beads: square end, 24 gauge galvanized steel.
Control joint: Type #15, expanded flanges, 28 gauge galvanized steel.
C. Tie wire: Galvanized, annealed steel wire, 18 gauge minimum.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 267 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
SECTION 09200 - LATH AND PLASTER
D. Staples: 14 gauge wire staples, divergent points, 3/4 inch crown, lin. legs.
E. Nails (if soffrt supported by wood framing): 1 314 inch 11 gauge, 318” head, 3/4”
washer.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect all surfaces to which lath and plaster is
to be applied and verify that all work of other trades is sufficiently complete to allow the
lath installation, that all required backing is in place, and that all items which will be
concealed by the application of lath and plaster have been inspected and approved.
3.02 METAL LATH AND ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
G l/08/98
Install lath with long dimension running perpendicular to supports.
At metal supports attach lath with tie wires at 6 inch O.C.
At wood studs, attach lath with staples.
Do not continue lath across control and expansion joints.
Fasten metal accessories using wire ties or staples to prevent dislodging or
misalignment by subsequent operation.
Fasten at both ends and maximum 12 inches O.C. along sides.
Bring grounding edge of accessories to true lines, plumb, level and straight.
Install accessories to provide required depth of plaster and to bring plaster surface
to required plane.
Connect lengths of accessories as recommended by manufacturer to assure a
continuous line.
Where plaster abuts dissimilar materials, terminate with plaster casing bead.
Place control joints at locations and at spacing shown on drawings.
Contract No. 3348 Page 268 of 299 Pages
*
DIVISjQN 09 - FINISHES
SECTION 09200 - LATH AND PLASTER
3.03 CEMENT PLASTER
A.
Ii.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Apply scratch coat with sufficient material to form good keys on metal lath.
Embed and fill all spaces of lath and score horizontally.
Do not apply brown coat sooner than 48 hours after application of scratch coat.
Apply brown coat to scratch wat, bring out to grounds, straighten to a true
surface, float and compact and leave sufficient texture to assure adequate bond
for finish.
On vertical surfaces, cold joints in brown coat shall not occur over cold joints in
scratch coat.
Surface shall be free from imperfections which may reflect in the finish coat.
Apply finish coat to a nominal thickness of l/8”. Apply finish coat and trowel to a smooth, consistent sand finish.
Curing: Provide proper continuous moist curing for Portland Cement plaster,
including periods that extend over into holidays or weekends.
::
Scratch Coat: Moist cure for at least 48 hours.
Brown Coat: Moist cure for at least 48 hours, then allow to dry for 12 days
before applying finish coat.
3.04 CU-I-TING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, patch, point-up and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents and imperfections. Repair or replace work to
eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive crazing and check cracking, dry-outs,
efflorescence, sweat-outs and similar defects, and where bond to the substrate
has failed.
B. Remove temporary protection and endosure of other work. Promptly remove
plasterfrom door frames, windows, and other surfaces which are not to be
plastered. Repair floors, walls and other surfaces which have been stained,
marred or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When plastering work
is complete, remove unused materials, containers and equipment and dean floors of plaster debris.
l/08&8 Contract No. 3348 Page 269 of299 Pages
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
, a
1 .oo GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDlTlONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General Requirements” shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
/
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work Included in this Section:
1.
2.
Exterior Locations to Indude:
a. All exposed exterior metal which are not factory finished, shall be
painted. This indudes flashing, drains, rain water leaders, structural
metal, louvers, light supports, etc.
b. All concrete shall be sealed.
C. All exterior doors and frames and glass block frames shall be
painted.
d. All lath and plaster surfaces shall be painted.
Interior Locations to Indude:
a. Interior steel and sheet metal, which are not factory finished, shall be
painted on all surfaces. Factory prime coat properly touched up, will be sufficient for fully concealed surfaces, such as those against or
incorporated in walls.
b. Back prime all sheet metal before installation.
::
All interior doors and frames shall be painted.
All lath and plaster surfaces shall be painted.
fl’
All wncrete shall be sealed.
Interior surfaces of wncrete block shall be painted per finish
schedule.
B. Work Not Induded:
1. Surfaces not to be painted:
a. Prefinished materials such as baked and porcelain enamel, plated metals, etc., unless specifically noted to be painted.
b. Stainless steel, bronze, and aluminum.
C. Do not paint any moving parts or operating units, mechanical and
electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages,
sensing devices, motor and fan shafts, unless otherwise indicated.
-Q l/06/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 270 of 209 Pages
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
1.03.
1.04
1.05
d. Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters
Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification,
performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. Neatly mask all such items, and remove masking at completion of painting.
C. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
1. Water Repellant Coatings.
2. Structural and Miscellaneous Metals
9:
Sheet Metal
Doors
5. Plumbing and Electrical
DEFINITIONS
A. Term “Painting” as used herein indudes emulsions, enamels, paints, stains,
varnishes, lacquers, sealers and other coatings, whether used as prime,
intermediate or finish coats.
B. The term “exposed” shall mean visible from any position in any portion of the
space of area described.
C. The term “all surfaces” shall mean wherever the material or surface occurs on the
project, irrespective of the location or use.
REGULATORY AGENCIES
Paint materials and their application shall comply with current rules and regulations of
California Air Resources Board (CARB) and Federal lead content regulations.
SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
1. Submit with thirty (30) calendar days from award of contract.
2. Samples of final finish shall be prepared on the job and shall be entire
member or area painted in place. Hand samples acceptable only when
approved by the City (min. &l/2” x 11” white cardboard) and for
transparent wood finish (min. 12” x 12” size on wood). 3. Do not prepare final interior wlor samples until permanent lighting is in
place and operating.
4. Do not proceed with painting work until wlor samples have been accepted.
Q l/08/98
*
Contract No. 3348 Page 271 of288 Pap
.
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES SECTION 09906 - PAINTING
1.06
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
Comply with paint manufacturer’s recommendations as to environmental conditions
under which paint materials and systems can be applied. Apply no materials in areas
where dust is being generated or will be generated before coatings are thoroughly dry.
1.08 PROTECTION
Protect adjacent surfaces from spattered or sprayed paint using adequate drop doths,
masking etc., as necessary. Repair or cause to be repaired any surfaces damaged by painting operations.
1.09 EXTRA MATERIAL
B. Products List:
Submit with thirty (30) calendar days from award of contract a complete list of
required products, manufacturer proposed, and each manufacturets
recommended method of application. Product lists shall be arranged in the
same format and order as the Schedule of Products hereinafter included in this
Section of the Specifications. Submittals shall clearly indicate whether alkyd or latex systems are to be used for particular surfaces.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver paint materials to job site in unbroken wntainers bearing
manufacturer’s brand and product name and number and wlor designation.
B. Store materials and equipment at site in properly ventilated areas assigned for
this purposed. Do receiving, opening, and mixing of paint in this location.
Opening and mixing operations shall not take place in areas to receive
adhesive applied finishes, deck coatings, fluid applied waterproofing, or on
unprotected exposed slabs.
C. Take necessary precautions to prevent flre. Remove solled rages and waste
from premises at end of each day and store others in metal containers with
covers.
After completion of work, deliver to City 1 gallon of each paint wlor required, exclusive
of material required to properly complete the project. Provide in 1 gallon containers identified with appropriate labels.
a 1108198 Contract No. 3348 Page 272 of 299 Pa9es
0 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
8.
C.
D.
Unless otherwise spedfred, materials shall be selected from the following
manufacturers: Dunn-Edwards, Fuller O’Brien, Glidden, Pratt & Lambert,
Sherwin-Williams, Sinclair and Frazee.
Only pure, unadulterated, first quality materials are permitted. When
manufacturer makes more than one quality of product, use only his best
quality. Undercoats are to be of same manufacture as approved final coat.
Materials left from previous work are not acceptable. If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish proof from the manufacturer that material
is of recant manufacture and has been purchased by the Contractor for this specific job.
Specific products and systems are set forth in Schedules hereinafter induded
in this Section.
2.02 COLORS
A. Surface treatments, and finishes, are shown on the drawings and indicated in
the “schedules” on drawings. Paint wlors are shown on the Engineer’s “Color
Schedule”.
B. Prior to beginning work the Engineer will furnish sample wlor chips for surfaces
to be painted. Match the wlors of the chips and submit samples, as specified
herein, before proceeding with the work.
C. Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime
paints used. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime
paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of the total coatings system for
the various substrates. Upon requests from other subcontractors, furnish information on the characteristics of the specified finish materials, to ensure
that compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify the Engineer in writing of
any anticipated problems using the coating systems as specified with substrates primed by others.
D. Finish coat wlors shall be factory mixed; no on-site “mixing and matching” permitted.
l/08/98 0 Contract No. 3348 Page 273 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
2.03
3.00
3.01
E. Unless specifically noted othenrvise, wlors will not be changed within a surface
plane.
F. Unless otherwise directed by Cii, paint prime coated access panels, grills, etc., same wlor as adjacent surfaces, or if adjacent surface does not require
painting, use wlor as directed.
G. Where items of electrical equipment are installed in finished spaces and where
same have been furnished prefinished without benefit of prior selection of wlor
or finish by City, said items of equipment shall be etched or otherwise prepared
and given one spray coat of compatible finish to cover in wlor as approved by
City.
H. Where ducts and piping are exposed in finished areas, such items will be
painted to match wall or ceiling wlor and will not be wlor coded or painted in
accent wlors unless specifically noted othewise on the Drawings.
I. Paint surfaces visible through grills, registers and similar openings flat black.
LIFE OF FILM
The wlor of surfaces finished under this Section shall, at the end of one year, remain free from serious fading and the variation, if any, shall be uniform. The original
adherence of materials shall be maintained for one (1) year and during this period there shall be no evidence of any blisters, running, peeling, scaling, chalking, streaks
or stains. Washing with alkali-free soap and water shall remove surface dirt without producing the above or other deteriorating effects.
EXECUTION
CONDITION OF SURFACES
Before commencing painting, Contractor shall make certain that the work to be finished is in proper condition to receive paint; that the surfaces are clean, dry, smooth
and at proper temperature. Moisture meters shall be used to check for dryness. Surfaces which cannot be prepared or painted as specified, shall be immediately
brought to the attention of the Engineer in writing. Starting of work without such
notification will be considered acceptance by the Contractor of the surface involved.
Q l/08/96 Contract No. 3348 Page 274 of 299 Pages
.
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
3.02 PROTECTION
3.03
3.94
a
3.05
Surfaces not to be painted shall be carefully protected from damage by signs,
barricades, and other protective devices to indicate all newly painted areas, and
remove same when paint in each area has dried.
STORAGE
Paint shall be stored in separate, well ventilated and lighted area. “No Smoking” signs
shall be placed over the door. Distribution shall be performed in shed under
authorized supervision. Evaporative materials shall be kept tightly closed when not
actually in use. Stir all materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform
density, and as required during the application of the materials. Do not stir any film
which may form on the surfaces of materials into the material. Remove the film and, if
necessary, strain the material before using.
PREPARATION FOR PAINTING
Painting shall not be started until finish carpentry, including corrections and adjustments, is complete, all glazing is installed, and the area free from all debris,
thoroughly broom cleaned and dusted. Surface conditions shall be suitable for a
first-class finish and shall be subject to the approval of an authorized representative of
the paint manufacturer.
PREPARATION OF SURFACES:
A. General: Hardware, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in place but not to
be painted shall be completely removed or protected and masked as required
during painting.
B. Wood and plywood shall be sandpapered to a smooth and even surface and
dusted thoroughly. After prime or stain coat is applied, nail holes and surface imperfections shall be carefully filled with putty or plastic wood, tinted to match
prime or stain color and sanded to match adjacent texture. Coat of knot sealer
shall be applied to all knots, pitch pockets and sappy areas. All unprimed
millwork_,-shall be given specified first coat on all surfaces immediately upon
arrival to the job site. Frames and trim shall be backprimed before installation. Top and bottom edges of doors shall be painted after fitting is completed.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 275 of 299 Pa9es
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
C. Ferrous Metal: Grease, oil, dust and mud shall be removed by washing with
mineral spirits. Rust and loose mill scale shall be removed from unprimed
metal by sandblasting or wire-brushing to expose bare metal. Prime coat shall
be applied immediately on the same day to prevent corrosions. Shop primed
metal shall be examined and any abraded or bar8 areas shall be spot primed.
D. Galvanized Metal Surfaces: Oil, dirt and grease shall be removed, with all
surfaces washed with galvanized metal wash, applied in strict accordance with
recommendations of the manufacturer. Sheet metal shall be backprimed
before installation.
E. Plaster or masonry shall be dry before any sealer or paint is applied. after
primer-sealer coat is dry, all visible suction spots shall be touched up before
applying succeeding coats. Work is not to proceed until all such suction spots
are sealed. In case of presence of high alkali conditions, surfaces should be
washed to neutralize. If paint to be applied is latex or emulsion type, wash with
4 per cent solution of tetrapotassium-pyrophosphate in water - 5 ounces
dissolved in 1 gallon of water. If paint is conventional oil typ8, wash with zinc
sulphate solution - 3 pounds of zinc sulphate to 1 gallon of water. Metals shall be clean, dry and free from mill scale and rust. Remove all grease and oil from
surfaces.
F. Concrete surfaces shall be wire-brushed clean. Surfaces which are glazed or where traces of parting compound are present shall be sandblasted or acid etched (sandblasting is highly recommended). Acid etch, if specified, shall be
dilute muriatic acid. The acid shall then be removed with water. Upon completion of sandblasting or acid etching the Owner shall be notified in writing
by the painting contractor that all glaze and/or parting compound has been
4 completely removed.
Concrete stains resulting from the weathering of corroded metals can be
removed with a solution of 2 ounces of sodium metasilicate in 1 gallon water. Stained areas on weathered surfaces should be thoroughly wetted with water
before application of solution. Gently rubbing with a cloth wetted with the solution will generally remove the stain. In severe cases, two applications may
be required.
3.09 WORKMANSHIP
A. Skilled mechanics shall be employed and paint applied in accordance with best
practice to satisfaction of Owner.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Pege 276 of293Pages
.
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Paint shall be applied evenly without sags, drips, runs, brush marks, thin spots
or other defects.
Paint shall be applied at proper consistency, not thinned or otherwise altered,
except in accordance with manUfadUr8r’s printed inStrUctionS.
Paint shall be applied to dry and properly prepared surfaces when temperature
is not less than 50 d8gr88S and weather wnditions are favorable.
Each coat of paint shall be subj8ct to inspection and approval by Proj8ct
Superintendent befOr8 application next coat.
Each coat shall be lightly sanded and thoroughly brushed before application of
succeeding coat.
Prime and intermediate coats shall be tinted to have a slight variation from each Other and shall be approximately the same Wlor but lighter than th8 finish
coat.
Flat paint may be applied by brush or roller. Semi-gloss enamel shall be
applied by brush only on wood and on door frames, casework and trim. Semi-gloss enamel may be applied by fine textured roller on walls and ceilings.
Finish coats shall be compatible with the prim8 paints used under other
sections. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to insure compatibility of the total coatings system for the
various substrates.
3.07 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES
The following Schedule of Finishes lists the painting systems required for the
respective surfaces. where more than one finish lustre is indicated for any one
system, verify with City befor proceeding. Where both alkyd and latex systems are
given for the Sam8 surface, Contractor may us8 either system at his option, except
that the same system shall be used throughout the Project for the same surface. Where gloss-type finishes (except epoxy) are requited for high humidity areas, use
alkyd systems only; do not use latex systems. Submittals shall clearly indicate whether an alkyd or a latex system is being proposed for each surface; submittals
without such identification or showing both alkyd and latex systems for the same surface will b8 returned for resubmlttal.
EXTERIOR:
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Pa98 277 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
A. M8tal (Doors, frames, and hliSdkn8OUS):
1.
2.
First Coat:
a. Ferrous. Metals: red oxide, zinc chromate or white corrosion
resistant primer.
b. Galvanized metal: Vinyl Phosphate wash pretreatment followed
by galvanized metal primer.
Second and Third Coats (alkyd gloss): Enameliied house paint or
synthetic house and trim paint.
B. Concrete:
C.
1. Single coat of Thompsons Water Seal or equal.
Rooftop Equipment (Ducts, Pipes):
1. First Coat: Primer, ferrous or galvanized per substrate (omk if preprimed or factory finish, d8glOss if factory finish).
D.
E.
2. Second and Third Coat: Acrylic Latex House Trim.
Concrete Unit Masonry
1. See Section 07181 - Water Repellent Coating.
Cement Plaster (Flat 199% Acrylic)
1. Two Coats: S&-O-Life 100% Acrylic.
INTERIOR
A. Cement Plaster (Flat 199% Actylii)
1. Two Coats: Stuc-O-Lie 199% Acrylic.
B. Metal (Doors, Trim and Miscellaneous):
1.
2.
First Coat:
a. Ferrous metal: red oxide, zinc chromate or whit8 wrrosion
resistant primer.
b. Galvanized metal: Vinyl phosphate wash pretreatment. Second and Third Coats: Semi-gloss or eggshell enamel as sekt8d.
C. (hW8t8 Unit Masonry
Contract No. 3348 Page 278 of 299Pages
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
1. First Coat: #I695 X-Tra Seal
2. Second & Third Coat: Epoxy Enamel
3.08 SCHEDULE OF PRODUCTS
The following product numbers are given to establish the quality of materials desired
and need no further approval. Products of other manufacturers previously mentioned
may b8 used subject to approval of Cii and the conditions of these Specifications.
Product numbers are not to be construed as indicating the wlor desired. Product
numbers shall not be construed as having CARB approval. Responsibility for use of
approved products rests with Contractor.
Dunn Fuller-
Product Edwards O’Brien
Kelly-Moore
Exterior.
Exterior Wood Primer -
Acrylic Latex House Trim 60 Enameliied House
Paint 60
Synthetic House and Trim Paint 42-6
Red Oxide Primer 43-4
Zinc Chromate Primer 42-6
Galvanized Metal Primer 43-7
White Corrosion Resistant Primer 43-5
Interior:
220-23
66XX
260-xX
260-xX
621-04
621-06
320-04
320-04
3.08
Semi-Gloss Alkyd
Enamel 5 206-xX
Eggshell Alkyd Enamel 1-1X 206-xX
CLEAN UP
Glidden Sinclair
1951
3900
CA1 809
5210
5229
CA4600
289
1300
2400
250
ii
25
14
1806
2200
220
1250
1700
1710
A. At the end of each work day, material and equipment shall be returned to storage areas. Paint and oil saturated cloths shall be disposed of in a legal
manner.
1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 279 of299 Peg88
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
B. At completion of painting, all paint spots and other soil shall be removed from
surfaces not painted. Tools, equipment, storage shed, rubbish and debris,
shall be removed from the premises.
e l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 280 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
0
- DIVISION 10162 - METAL TOILET PARTITIONS
1 .oo GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General
Requirements” shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work Included in this Section:
::
Toilet partitions.
Installation.
B. Related Work Described Elwwhere:
1. Painting.
2. Toilet Acwssork.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
Submit with thirty (30) calendar days after award of contract:
A. Shop drawings, complete, showing all details for fabrication and installation.
B. Samples: Color of final selection.
C. Copies of the current specification for fabrication and installation of the toilet
partitions by the select8d manufacturer.
2.96 PRODUCTS
2.01 SYSTEM, TOILET PARTITIONS
A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., floor and wiling anchored, stainless steel
series 1010.
Q l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 281 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 10162 - METAL TOILET PARTITIONS
2.02 COMPONENTS, TOILET PARTITIONS
A. Panels, Doors, PllaSt8rS
:: 3.
Core: 11 gauge steel core welded to steel leveling bar.
Face: Satin finish type 304 stainless steel.
Thickness
a. Door Panels: 1 inch.
B. Pilaster Shoes: Stainless s&l, 2 piece.
C. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard design, heavy duty
operating hardware and accessories of chromium-plated non-ferrous cast alloy
(“Zamac”).
D. AnchOrag8s and Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard exposed fasteners of
stainless steel, chromium-plated steel, to match hardware, with theft-resistant type
heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized, cadium plated,
or other rust-resistant protective-coated steel.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for partition system, unless otherwise indicated. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled
holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partition-mounted hardware,
accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24” wide inswinging doors
for ordinary toilet stalls and 32” wide (clear opening) outswinging doors at stalls
8qUipp8d for us8 by handicapped.
C. Ceiling and Floor Anchored Partitions: Furnish galvanized steel anchorage
devices, complete with threaded rods, lock washers and leveling adjustment nuts
at pilasters, to permit connection to structural support above finished ceiling and at
floor. Furnish devices which are designed to support pilasters from structure
without transmitting load to ceiling finish. Furnish 3” high stainless steel trim
piece, finished to match hardware, at each pilaster.
D. Hardware: Furnish each compartment in partition system, as follows:
1. Hinges: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to
96 d8gr88s. Provide gravity type, spring-action cam type, or concealed
torsion rod type, to suit manufacturer’s standards.
# 1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 282 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES DIVISION 10162 - METAL TOILET PARTITIONS
3.66
3.01
3.02
2. Latch and K8ep8t: Manufacturer’s standard surface-mounted or recessed
latch unit, designed for emergency access, with combination rubber-faced
door strike and keeper.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer’s standard unit, combination hook and rubber-
tipped bump8r.
4. Door Pull: Manufacturer’s standard unit.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. Install plumb, true, square.
B. Ensure proper centering of fixt~s.
C. Provide uniform clearances at panels and at doors.
D. Entire assembly, rigid, secur8.
E. Finished installation free of chips, scratches.
F. Conform with the Uniform Building Code Handicapped Requirements and the
California Building Code, Title 24.
G. Attach to masonry walls with expansion bolts.
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
B.
C.
D.
a l/08/98 Contmct No. 3348 Page 2i)3 of 299Pages
Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on inswinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from dosed position when unlatched. Set hinges on outswinging doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed position.
Perform final adjustments to pilaster leveling devices, door hardware, and other
Op8Wing parts Of th8 p&itiOn assembly jUSt prior t0 final inspection.
Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings and accessories, and
touch up minor scratches and other fnish imperfections using materials and
methods recommended by the partition manufacturer.
Replace damaged units which cannot be satisfactorily field repaired, as directed
bY city-
1 .oo
1.01
1.02
1.03
2.00
2.01
SECTICN 10520 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS _
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “G8n8d Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “G8n8d
Requirements” shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work lnduded in this Section
1. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
2. Fire extinguishers.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
1. Rough Carpentry.
SUBMITTALS
A. Within thirty (30) calendar days after award of contract, submit:
1. Shop Drawings: Complete.
2. Certificate of Compliance: UL.
PRODUCTS
CABINETS
A.
B.
Type: Semi-recessed, steel body, steel door.
Specified Manufacturer. Larsens Manufacturing, Typ8 2409-5R for nominal 4 inch
rec8ss.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Acceptable Manufacturer: J.L. lndUStri8s, Type 1816.
Body: 46 gage steel, white painted.
Trim: 18 gage, painted to match door, l-1/2 trim projection.
Door: H-Duo door, 18 gage steel with horizontal clear glass, painted primer, with
pull and snap catch.
1 I08198 Contract No. 3348 Page 234 of 299 Pages
l SECTION 10520 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS
2.02
3.00
3.01.
G. Quantity and Location: As shown on Drawings.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Type: Multi-purpose, UL Standard 299 certified, fully serviced and tagged.
B. Rating: 2A10 BC, 5 pound.
C. Quantityz 1 per cabin&.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. In accordance with manufacturer’s directions for type of mounting required in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to
comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities.
Q l/08/98 Contiact No. 3346 Page 285 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
1 .oo GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General -
Requirements” shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK _.
A. Work Included in this Section
1. Furnish toilet accessories.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
1. Rough carpentry.
2. Metal toilet partitions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data, parts list and installation
instructions. Include maintenance and operating instructions.
B. Samples: When requested, submit full-size samples of units to Engineer.
Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work.
2.00
2.01
C. Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions
for installation of anchorage devices in Other work.
PRODUCTS
ACCESSORIES
A. Specified Manufacturer: Bobridc Washroom Equipment, Inc.
B. Finish: Satin finish stainless steel unless otherwise noted.
C. Quantitk shown: Verify.
a l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 286 of 299 Pages
@
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 0 SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
2.02 SCHEDULE OF TOILET ACCESSORIES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1 I08198
Soap Dispenser, TRA-1.
a. Type: Countertop mounted.
b. Catalog: 88665
Waste Rewptade TRA-2
z:
Type: Under counter. Catalog: 8269
Toilet Paper Dispenser, TRA-3
a. Type: Surface mounted.
b. Catalog: 8274
Sanitary Napkin Disposal, TRA-4
a. Type: Surface mounted.
b. Catalog: 8254
Grab Bars, Each Handicapped Toilet, TRA-5
it:
Type: Surface mounted, exposed fasten8rs.
Cat&g:
1) Toilet Side: B5507x48
2) Toilet Back: B6567x36
Stainless Steel Framed Mirror, TRA-6
a. Type: Surface mounted.
b. Catalog: 82966 series, 48” x 36”
Mop and Broom Holder, TRA-7
a. Type: Surface mounted.
b. Catalog: B224,36” long, 4 holders.
Toilet Partition, TRA-6
a. b. Type: Floor and wiling mounted.
Catalog: S8rieS 1010
Contract No. 3348 Page 287 af299 Pagers
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
9. Electric Hand Dryer, TRA-9
a.
b.
Type: Surface mounted.
Catalog: 8709
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate and rewmmended by manufacturer of unit.
Install units plumb, level and square, firmly anchored in locations indicated.
::
Use concealed fastenings wherever possible.
Provide exposed mounting devices and fasteners finished to match the
accessories.
B. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items.
C. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing labels and protective
coatings.
g l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 286 of 299 Pages
l
0 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The work under this Section indUd8s everything necessary for and incidental to -
executing and completing the plumbing work, except as hereinafter specifically excluded.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 30 days after the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide six (8)
brochures containing the following information:
1.
2.
Manufacturer’s data on each fixture and piece of equipment, noting the exact capacity and conditions.
Materials used for construction, induding pipe, hangers, supports, and
valves.
8. Prior to final acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall submit the fOlIOWing to
the City:
::
Record drawings.
Certificate of steriliition of water supply.
1.03
3. Guarantee.
SCOPE OF WORK
Work induded shall be as indicated on the drawings, including but not limited to the
following:
A. Sanitary Soil, Waste and Vent System.
B. DOm8stiC Cold and Hot Water System.
C. Plumbing Fiires and Equipment.
0. Steriliition and Tests
l/03/98 Contract No. 3349 P898 289 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and
regulations of the State Fire Marshall; the Safety Orders of the Division of
Industrial Safety; the National Electric Code; the Uniform Plumbing Code; Local Building Codes; and other applicable codes, laws or regulations of bodies lawfully
empowered and having jurisdiction over this project. Nothing in the plans or
specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes.
1.05 PERMITS
A. This Contractor shall obtain all other permits, patent. rights, and licenses that are
required for the performing of his work by all laws, ordinances, rules and
regulations or orders of any officer and/or body, shall give all notices necessary in
connection therewith, and pay all fees relating thereto and all costs and expenses
incurred on account thereof. No work shall be covered before inspection by the
jurisdictional inspection and the City. City will provide permit for sewer connections in street right-of-way.
1.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. All patching of finished construction of building shall be performed under the
sections of specifications covering these materials.
1 .O? GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise specified herein, all equipment and fixtures shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Before submitting his bid,the Contractor for the work under this section shall carefully study all drawings, and shall make a careful examination of the premises.
He shall definitely determine in advance, the methods of installing and connecting the apparatus, the means to be provided for getting any equipment into place, and
shall make himself thoroughly familiar with all the requirements of the contract.
After award of the contract, no subsequent allowances will be made to the
Contractor due to his failure to comply with the above requirements and any other
conditions affecting the installation and completion of all work.
C. All cutting of concrete work by this Contractor shall be by core drilling or wncrete
saw. No cutting or wring shall be done without first obtaining the permission of
‘the City’s Representative.
Special Note: Any work called for on plans shall be installed whether or not
mentioned in these specifications.
Contract No. 3348 Page 290 of 299Pages
DlVlSlON 15 - MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING
SECTION 18400 1 PLUMBING
1.08 DAMAGE BY LEAKS
A. This Contractor shall be responsible for damage to the grounds, walks, roads,
buildings, piping systems, electrical systems and their equipment and contents,
caused by leaks in the piping systems being installed or having been installed
herein. He shall repair at his expense all damage so caused. All repair work shall
be done as directed by the City’s Representative.
1.09 EMERGENCY REPAIRS
A. The Cii reserves the tight to make emergency repairs as required to keep equipment in operation without voiding the Contractor’s guarantee bond nor
relieving the Contractor of his responsibilities.
1.10 EXPLANATION AND PRECEDENCE OF DRAWINGS
A. For purposes of clarity and legibility, drawings are essentially diagrammatic, and,
although size and location of equipment are drawn to scale wherever possible, Contractor shall make use of all data in all the contract documents and shall verify
this information at building site.
B. The drawings indicate required size and points of termination of pipes, and
suggest proper routes to conform to structure, avoid obstructions and preserve
clearances. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets, and it shall be the work of the Contractor to make the installation in such a
manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom and
keep openings, and passageways clear, without further instructions or cost to the
cii.
C. It is intended that all apparatus be located symmetrical with architectural
elements. Refer to architectural details in completing the correlating work.
D. The Contractor shall fully inform himself regarding any and all peculiarities and
limitations of the spaces available for the installation of all work and materials
furnished and installed under the Contract. He shall exercise due and particular caution to determine that all parts of his work are made quickly and easily
accessible.
E. The Contractor shall study all drawings and specifications to determine. any
conflict with ordinances and statutes. Any errors or omissions shall be reported,
and any changes shall be shown in the as-built drawings and the additional work
performed at no cost to the City.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Pale 291 of2QQPagea
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
F. Submittal of bid shall indicate the Contractor has examined the site and drawings
and has included all required allowances in his bid. No allowance shall be made
for any error resulting from Contractor’s failure to visit job site and to review
drawings, and bid shall include costs for all required drawings and changes as
outlined above, all at no cost to City’s Representative. ’
1.11 SUPERVISION AND COOPERATION
A. This Contractor shall include the services of experienced superintendents for each
sub-section who shall be constantly in-charge of the work, together with the
qualified journeymen, helpers and laborers, required to properly unload, install,
connect, adjust, start and operate and test the work involved, including equipment
and materials furnished by others and by the City.
B. The work under this section shall be in cooperation with the work of other trades
to prevent conflict or interference and to aid rapid completion of the overall project.
.1.12 OPERATIONS
A. Cost of utilities for such operation shall be paid by the Contractor.
1.13, UTILITY SERVICES DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. All water and electric power used for wnstruction shall be supplied by Contractor.
1.14 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Q t/08/98
This section includes all excavation, protecting, backfilling and compacting for all
plumbing piping to be laid in earth inside or outside the building, in accordance
with Section 02200 - “Earthwork”.
No backfilling shalt be done until all work in trenches has been inspected,
approved and recorded on as-built drawings.
Lay water piping on minimum of 6 inches of fresh water sand and cover with 6
inches of the same.
Soil and waste lines shall be laid to proper grade on firm or compacted soil with
proper bell holes for ail hubs.
Water piping underground shall be laid to a depth not less than 24 inches below
finished grade, induding under concrete walks.
Contract No. 3348 Page 292 of 299 Pages
e
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
F. Excavation and Backfilling shall be accordance with Section 02200 “Earthwork” of
these specifications.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 FITTINGS AND PIPING
A. Waste Above Grade: Service weight cast iron no-hub with neoprene gaskets and
type 301 stainless steel damping device as approved by the Cast Iron Institute.
B. Soil, Waste Below Grade: Service weight cast iron bell and spigot with neoprene
compression type gasket joint.
C. Vent piping 3” and smaller above slab schedule 40-A-120 galvanised steel pipe
with 125 lb. banded cast-iron fittings or hubiess cast iron as in (A) above.
D. All Domestic Water Piping: Above grade type “L” copper tubing hard drawn with
wrought copper 50/50 soldered sweat fittings. Below grade type “K” copper tubing soft drawn with minimum number of silver soldered joints.
2.02 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
B.
Unions in copper tubing 2” and smaller Crane or Nibco 633 or equal.
Isolation Unions: Ebw or W & K dielectrics or equal armored type of same size
as pipe.
Pipe Isolation: Trisolators or Potter-Roemer PR-isolators or equal.
2.03 VALVES AND FITTINGS
A. Gate valves l-112” and smaller. Nibw T-l 13 or S-l 13, Crane or equal.
B. Globe valves l-l/2” and smaller: Nibw T-235, Crane or equal.
C.
D.
Ball valves 2” and smaller: Nibw, Crane or equal. _...
Stops: Acorn, T & S Brass or equal.
2.04 CLEANOUTS
A. Floor Cleanouts: J.R. Smith Fig. 4023, Wade or equal with polished nickel bronze non-skid adjustable round or square top.
# l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Pege 293 of 299 Pages
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
, a
B. Wall Cleanouts: J.R. Smith Fig. 4472, Wade or equal series with chrome plated
cover and screws.
2.05 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Riser Clamps: Fee and Mason Fig. 241 or Super-Strut C-720 over 4” Fee and
Mason Fig. 238 or Super-Strut C-720 or equal.
8.
C.
Offset Pipe Clamps: Fee and Mason Fig. 366 or Super-Strut C-767 or equal.
Pipe Isolation: Semw trisolators or Super-Strut isolators or equal.
D. Adjustable beam clamps: Fee and Mason Fig. 246 or Super-Strut Fig. CM-754
(where this type is not adaptable, an approved top beam, side beam or channel clamp by Fee and Mason or Super-Strut will be acceptable) or equal.
E. Trapeze Hangers: Super-Strut A-1200 or Unistmt P-1000 channel with pipe
damps and guides as required (include type to be used in submittal), or equal.
2.06 PLUMBING FIXTURES
3.00
3.01
A. Reference is made to Acorn of Bradley Manufacturing Company;it is understood
to mean that equivalent fixtures as manufactured by Elkay, Kohler or Eljer are
acceptable if used throughout. Equivalent carrier, floor drains, etc. by Josam,
Wade and Zum are acceptable.
8. See plans for fixture specifications. *
EXECUTION
PIPE INSTALLATION
A.
B.
No-Hub cast-iron Soil Pipe Institute Pamphlet #lOO and the I.A.P.M.O. 13-6-75.
Install all soil, waste and vent piping for all fixtures and outlets as shown on drawings. Piping shall be supported and strapped in an approved manner.
Supports on sanitary piping in and under building shall run to a uniform grade.
Contractor shalt verilj the point of connection as shown on drawings regarding
invert elevation and location before starting work.
C. Joints in copper tubing shall be made by first thoroughly cleaning the surface of the pipe and fittings, applying flux and sweating with 50/50 tin lead solder or silver
solder below grade.
G l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 294 of 299 Pages
*
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
0.
P.
l/08/98
Pipe shall be carefully cleaned before installation. The ends of threaded pipe shall
be reamed out full size with a long taper reamer so as to be partially bellmouthed
and perfectly smooth.
Flush out all water mains and sanitary drains with water so as to obtain free flow. .
Remove ail obstructions and defects discovered. Remove and relay any sections
and pipe already laid and found to be defective or which has had grade or joints disturbed.
Openings in pipes, drains, fittings apparatus and equipment shalt be kept covered or plugged to prevent foreign substance from entering.
Run piping free of traps, sags, or bends. Grade and valve for complete drainage
and control of the system.
All piping to be run to maintain headroom and keep passageways and openings dear. Run parallel and straight with adjacent walls or ceilings to present a uniform
appearance.
All piping, except where noted otherwise on plans, shalt be concealed in walls or above ceilings.
Bending or forcing of pipe will not be allowed. Use fittings for ail offsets or
changes in alignment of piping.
Proper provision shall be made for expansion and contraction by means of fittings
and anchors and supports of all piping.
Street elbows, bushings and long screw fittings will not be allowed.
Pm-set air chamber shalt be installed at the supply to each water faucet.
Unions shall be installed after each screw-type valve, connections for all equipment, appliances and as required for erection and maintenance. No unions
shall be installed in concealed location.
Install isolation unions on all connections between dissimilar metals (galvanizad
steel, black steel to copper).
No holes for pipe or equipment will be allowed in any structural members without written consent of the Engineer. Where pipes are to pass through or interfere with
any member, or where notching, boring or cutting of the structure is necessary,
the work shall be done by the General Contractor as directed by the Engineer.
Contract No. 3348 Pale 295 of 299 Pagea
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING _
SECTlON 15400 - PLUMBING
Q. Unless otherwise-specified herein, ail equipment and fixtures shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
R. Before submitting his bid, the Contractor for the work under this division shall
carefully study all drawings and make a careful examination of the premises. He
shall definitely determine in advance, the methods of installing and connecting the
apparatus, the means to be provided for getting equipment into place, and shall
make himself thoroughly familiar with ail the requirements of the contract. After
award of the contract, no subsequent allowances will be made to the Contractor
due to his failure to comply with the above requirements or any other conditions affecting the installation and completion of all work.
S. All ‘scale and figured dimensions are approximate and are given for estimate
purposes only. Before proceeding with any work, this Contractor shall carefully
check and verify all dimensions, sizes, etc., and shall assume full responsibility to other parts of the equipment, and to the structure.
T. Any minor changes in work, which has not been installed, shall be made by this
Contractor without additional compensation, except changes which are caused by architectural revisions - which increase or decrease the size of the materials
specified or indicated on the drawings. This Contractor shall submit an estimate of the cost of or credit for such changes he does not consider of a minor nature
and shall proceed only upon the written authority of the City’s Representative.
U. All piping shall be isolated from other piping, any part of the building, framing
conduit, etc, with l-inch strips of hair felt or pipe isolators.
3.02 CLEANOUTS
A. As specified (see plans for size), deanouts shall be caulked into pipe where shown on plans under countertops where they occur in walls to avoid their being
too conspicuous. Cleanouts shall be accessible in ail cases and shall be brought to surface on “Y” ranches. All cleanouts shall be provided with removable floor or
wall plate as herein before specified.
3.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Pipe straps shall be 8-gauge galvanized ken factory fabricated to fit against
supporting surface when installed. Makeshift devices wilt not be acceptable. No
plumbing tape is allowed.
$8 l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 288 of 299 Pages
a
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
B. Miscellaneous Supports: Wall brackets, etc., shall be provided where required in
accordance with the best standard practice of the trade in a manner as approved by the Engineer. In the event additional structural steel is required to transmit
toads to main structure, same shall be provided at no additional cost to the City.
C. ‘Vertical “no-hub” components shall be secured at each stack base and at
sufficiently dose intervals to keep the system in alignment and to adequately
support the weight of the pipe and its contents.
D. Trap arms and similar branches must be firmly secured against movement in any
direction.
3.04 FlXTLtRE INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Ail plumbing fixtures shall be bedded and caulked along joint at walls, and other
intersecting surfaces with General Electric dear silicone.
Plumbing fixture trim and exposed supplies and waste shall be brass with polished
chrome plated finish. Individual loose key stops, or, so specified, screw driver
stops, shall be provided for all supplies, and unless integral with valves or faucets,
unless otherwise approved by Engineer, shall be mounted under the fixture.
Where drains are specified with clamping collars, the water proofing membrane shall be carefully cut to fit the drain, then anchored between drain and collar with
rustpmofbolts.
Supplies shall be as scheduled with loose key stops.
Traps above floor shall be cast brass “P” traps with bronze nuts unless otherwise
indicated.
Provide branch tailpieces off air vent tines where required.
3.05 REQUIREMENTS FOR ACCEPTANCE
A. All of the following items must be completed prior to final inspections. No
exceptions will be made and no final payment will be made until all items are
completed.
8. Thoroughly dean all parts of the piping, valves, and equipment. Exposed parts
which are to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, and other
materials and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be
carefully wiped and all cracks and wmers scraped out.
l/08/98 Contract No. 3348 Page 297 of299 Pages
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
C. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with steel brushes to remove
rust and other spots left smooth and clean. Trap elements shall be removed
during cleaning and flushing period, after which they shalt be replaced and
adjusted.
D. Electrical device covers shalt not be installed until finish coat of paint is completed.
Device handles and receptacles shall be covered and/or protected during the painting operation to preserve the original factory bright new finish.
E. All domestic cold water lines shall be sterilized with chlorine, the chlorine residual
concentration shall indicate not less than 50 parts per million and shall be retained
for a period of not less than twenty for (24) hours. All work and certification of
performance must be done by qualified personnel.
3.08 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. No piping work, fixtures, or equipment shall be concealed or covered until they
have been inspected and approved by the City’s Representative, who shall be notified when the work is ready for inspection. All work shall be completely
installed, tested as required by this section and the State ordinances and State
Safety Orders and shall be leak-tight before inspection is requested. All tests
shall be repeated upon request to the satisfaction of those making the inspection.
B. All domestic water piping shall be flushed out, tested at 150 psi and shall be left
under pressure of supply main or a minimum of 40 psi for the balance of the
construction period. No air testing allowed.
C. Piping tests shall be made with the medium and under pressure listed below. Use
a calibrated Bristol Pressure Recorder on all tests. City’s Representative shall
install and remove each chart. Recorder range shall be O-300 pounds or required
range for specific test.
kie of Svstem Gauae Pressure Test Medium
(Lbs. per sq. inch, or vacuum in inches)
Soil, Waste, Vent
Piping
Minimum of lO-foot
head of each joint
for duration of check
of three hour minimum, with no loss in head.
Water
a l/08/98
Domestic Water 150 psi
Contract No. 3348
Water
Page 298 of 299 Pages
e
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING
D
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
D. Test pressure in pounds per square inch, or inches of vacuum, gauge, are given
an initial pressure to be applied to lines being tested, together with test medium.
E. Tests are to be applied for a minimum period of twenty-four (24) hours and until
tests are complete.
F. Final pressures at the end of test period shall be no more nor less than that
caused by expansion or contraction of the test medium due to temperature
changes.
3.07 DRAWINGS OF RECORD
A. In addition to the reprodudble “as-built” required, two complete sets of blue lines plumbing drawings will be provided for the purpose of showing a complete picture
of the work as actually installed.
B. These drawings shall sewe as work progress report sheets and the Contractor shall make all notations, neat and legible, thereon daily as the work prooeeds.
The drawings shall be available for inspection at ail times and shall be kept at the job at a location designated by the City’s Representative.
C. At completion of the work, these as-built drawings shall be signed by the
Contractor indicating his approval, dated and returned to the City’s Representative.
3.08 GUARANTEE
A. All work under this section shall be guaranteed in writing in accordance--with the General Provisions.
B. All material except as otheNvise noted shall be new, free from defect and of the
quality and rating shown or specified.
C. Any defect due to missing or improper material or faulty workmanship existing or
developing during the warranty period shalt be corrected and the resulting
damage repaired without additional cost to the City.
l/08/98
*
Contract No. 3348 Page 299 of 299 Pages
.
i
0 Y 0
%
4
e
2
d
5
8
2lTY OF CARLSBAD - AGENuk BILL s&x
AB# j5! 6Ur
MTG. 2/8/2000
DEPT. ENG
/ v
TITLE-
ii&E OF COMPLETION FOR THE POlNSElTlA PARK
DEPT. I-ID.’ ‘%k~
PHASE I-A IMPROVEMENTS ClTYATlY. @-
PROJECT NO. 3348 CITY MGR.
RECOMMENDED ACTION:
Adopt Resolution No. &oo - 4 3 accepting the construction of the Poinsettia Park Phase l-
A improvements, Project No. 3348, as complete and directing the City Clerk to record a
Notice of Completion and release bonds in accordance with State Law and City
Ordinances.
ITEM EXPLANATION:
On, September 8, 1998, R.E. Smith Engineering and Construction, inc. was awarded a
contract in the amount of $881,809.60 for construction of the Poinsettia Park Phase 1-A
Improvements.
R.E. Smith Engineering and Construction, Inc. completed the work on December 31, 1999.
City forces have inspected said work and found it to be satisfactory. Staff recommends
format acceptance by the City Council.
FISCAL IMPACT:
A summary of the final project cost is as follows:
EXHIBITS:
1. Location map.
2. Resolution No. dOoO-43
3. Notice of Completion.
I
EXHIBIT 1 /
LOCATION
DE LAS ONDAS
NOT JO SCALE
PROJECT NAME PROJECT EXHIBIT POINSE T T/A PARK NUMBER 3346-IA I
SCOTT EVANS. CARLSBAD ENGINEERING DEPT.
% 1
2
i
4
5
6
7
0
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
20
RESOLUTION NO. 2ooc-43
A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF
CARLSBAD, CALIFORNIA, ACCEPTING THE CONSTRUCTION
OF THE POINSETTIA PARK PHASE 1-A IMPROVEMENTS,
PROJECT NO. 3348.
WHEREAS, the construction of the Poinsettia Park Phase I-A Improvements has been
satisfactorily completed; and
WHEREAS, the formal project Notice of Completion has been prepared; and
WHEREAS, all project costs have been established to date.
NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED by the City Council of the City of Carlsbad,
California, as follows:
1. That the above recitations are true and correct.
2. That the construction of the Poinsettia Park Phase 1-A Improvements, specifically
identified as Project No. 3348, is deemed complete and hereby accepted.
3. The City Clerk of the City of Carlsbad is hereby authorized and directed to execute
the Notice of Completion and have same recorded.
4. That bonds will be released in accordance with State Law and City Ordinances.
PASSED, APPROVED AND ADOPTED at a regular meeting of the Carlsbad City
Council held on the 8th day of F=bn==y , 2000 by the following vote, to wit:
AYES: Councilmembers Lewis, Hall, Finnila, Nygaard, Kulchin
NOES: None.
ABSENT: None.
-
Recording requested by:
CITY OF CARLSBAD
When recorded mail to:
City Clerk
City of Carlsbad
1200 Carlsbad Village Dr.
Carlsbad, CA 92008
Space above this line for Recorder’s Use
NOTICE OF COMPLETION
Notice is hereby given that:
1. The undersigned is owner of the interest or estate stated below in the property hereinafter
described.
2. The full name of the undersigned is City of Carisbad, a municipal corporation.
3. The full address of the undersigned is 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Cartsbad, California
92008.
4. The nature of the title of the undersigned is: In fee.
5. A work of improvement on the property hereinafter described was completed on December
31, 1999.
6. The name of the contractor, if any. for such work of improvement is R.E. Smith Engineering
and Construction, Inc.
7. The property on which said work of improvement was completed is in the City of Cartsbad,
County of San Diego, State of California, and is described as the Poinsettia Park Phase 1-A Improvements, Project No. 3348.
8. The address of said property is within the limits of the City of Carisbad.
VERIFICATION OF CITY CLERK
I, the undersigned, say:
I am the City Clerk of the City of Carlsbad, 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad,
California, 92008; the City Council of said City on February *t J 2000, accepted the
above described work as completed and ordered that a Notice of Completion be filed.
I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct.
Executed on Februarv 9, ,2000, at Carl&ad, California.
CITY OF CARLSBAD
Karen R. Kundtz,
Ansi &ant Ci tv Cl m-k
City 0 - 0 m
February 10,290O
Gregory J. Smith
County Recorder
Poet Office Box 1750
San Diego, CA 92112-4147
RE: NOTICE OF COMPLETION
Enclosed for recordation is the following described document:
Notice of Completion
R. E. Smith Engineering and Construction, Inc.
Poinsettia Park Phase 1-A Improvements
Project No. 3348
Also enclosed are instructions on how the City is to be billed for the recordation fees
incurred. Thank you for your assistance in this matter.
ISABELLR J. PAULSEN
Administrative Secretary
IJP
Encloeures
1200 Carlsbad Village Drive l Carlsbad, CA 92008-l 989 - (760) 434-2808 @